Forms order entry system

An order entry system is provided comprising a first computer system, a printing station computer system, a form design repository, a second computer system, a validation engine, and a pricing engine. The first computer system captures form design data and the second computer generates a form price, validates the form, and transmits a validated and priced order to the printing station computer system. The second computer is also programmed to store an index of form design files in the form design repository. The forms order entry system is also programmed to determine manufacturability of an ordered form by comparing its form design data to a set of validation rules and route manufacturability exceptions to a selected one of a plurality of exception handling locations. The pricing engine determines identified labor, material, burden, and mark-up cost components, and applies a set of pricing rules to them, to enable calculation of a form price.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 
The present invention relates to a forms order entry system and, more 
particularly, to a forms order entry system including a first computer 
system including an order entry user interface, a second computer system 
remote from and in communication with the first computer system, and a 
printing station computer system, wherein the second computer system is 
operative to price, validate, and transmit a forms order entered at the 
user interface in the first computer system. 
Comprehensive business form design, manufacture, and pricing is problematic 
because it is difficult to accurately coordinate form design, 
manufacturing, and pricing. For example, to create a form, one must create 
a form design, determine if the form is manufacturable, determine the 
steps necessary to manufacture the form, locate a manufacturing facility 
capable of manufacturing the form, determine the cost of manufacturing the 
form, etc. Each of these form design, manufacturing, and pricing 
determinations are often subject to the unique expertise of a number of 
individuals. Further, each of these individuals are likely to be located 
across an extended geographical area. The result is a form design, 
manufacturing, and pricing process that is subject to significant delay 
and inaccurate design, pricing, and manufacture. Accordingly, there is a 
need for a forms order entry system that provides for automation of a 
significant portion of the design, manufacture, and pricing mechanisms. 
Further, there is a need for a forms order entry system that does so in an 
efficient and user-friendly manner. 
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION 
This need is met by the present invention where an order entry system is 
provided comprising a first computer system, a printing station computer 
system, a form design repository, a second computer system, a validation 
engine, and a pricing engine. The first computer system captures form 
design data and the second computer generates a form price, validates the 
form, and transmits a validated and priced order to the printing station 
computer system. The second computer is also programmed to store an index 
of form design files in the form design repository. The forms order entry 
system is programmed to determine manufacturability and usability of an 
order or quote by comparing the form design data to a set of validation 
rules and routing manufacturability and usability exceptions to a selected 
one of a plurality of exception handling locations. The pricing engine 
applies a set of pricing rules to labor, material, burden, and mark-up 
cost components to enable calculation of a form price. 
In accordance with one embodiment of the present invention, a forms order 
entry system is provided comprising: a first computer system, a printing 
station computer system, and a second computer system. The first computer 
system includes a user interface and is programmed to capture form design 
data representative of a forms order entered at the user interface. The 
second computer system is remote from and in communication with the first 
computer system and the printing station computer system and is programmed 
to (i) generate a price corresponding to the form design data as a 
function of a set of pricing rules, (ii) validate the forms order by 
comparing the form design data with a set of validation rules, and (iii) 
transmit a validated and priced order to the printing station computer 
system. 
The form design data may comprise order specifications designated within 
the first computer system, a graphic form design file designated within 
the first computer system, or order specifications designated within the 
first computer system and a graphic form design file designated within the 
first computer system. Further, the second computer system may be 
programmed to associate and populate the order specifications from the 
graphic form design file and generate a form design populate report. 
In accordance with another embodiment of the present invention, a forms 
order entry system is provided comprising: a first computer system, a form 
design repository, and a second computer system. The first computer system 
includes a first server coupled to a first plurality of user interfaces 
and is programmed to capture form design data representative of a forms 
order entered at one of the first plurality of user interfaces. Form 
design files corresponding to the forms order entered at one of the first 
plurality of user interfaces are stored in the first server. The form 
design repository is remote from and in communication with the first 
computer system. 
The first computer system may include a least one additional server coupled 
to a second plurality of user interfaces. The first computer system may be 
programmed to capture form design data representative of a forms order 
entered at one of the second plurality of user interfaces. Form design 
files corresponding to the forms order entered at one of the second 
plurality of user interfaces may be stored in the additional server and 
the index of form design files created by the second computer system may 
correspond to the form design files stored in the first server and the 
second server. 
In accordance with yet another embodiment of the present invention, a forms 
order entry system is provided comprising a user interface and a computer 
system in communication with the user interface. The computer system is 
programmed to (i) generate manufacturing steps based on form design data 
representative of a forms order entered at the user interface, wherein the 
form design data defines the appearance and construction of an ordered 
form and wherein the manufacturing steps correspond to a specific 
manufacturing process for creating the ordered form, (ii) determine 
manufacturability of the ordered form by comparing the form design data to 
a set of validation rules, and (iii) transmit the manufacturing steps to a 
printing station according to whether the ordered form is determined to be 
manufacturable. 
The computer system may be remote from and in communication with the user 
interface. The printing station may include a digital press and data 
indicative of the form design data and the manufacturing steps may be 
transmitted to the digital press in digital format or reproduced at the 
printing station in a printed format. 
In accordance with yet another embodiment of the present invention, a forms 
order entry system is provided comprising a user interface and a computer 
system in communication with the user interface. The computer system is 
programmed to (i) generate manufacturing steps based on form design data, 
wherein the form design data defines the appearance and construction of an 
ordered form and wherein the manufacturing steps correspond to a specific 
manufacturing process for creating the ordered form, (ii) determine 
manufacturability of the ordered form by comparing the form design data to 
a set of validation rules, (iii) generate a manufacturability exception 
corresponding to a violation of one of the validation rules, and (iv) 
route the exception to a selected one of a plurality of exception handling 
locations according to the nature of the exception. 
In accordance with yet another embodiment of the present invention, a forms 
order entry system is provided comprising a user interface, a validation 
engine, and a pricing engine. The validation engine is in communication 
with the user interface and is programmed to (i) generate manufacturing 
steps based on form design data generated at the user interface, wherein 
the form design data defines the appearance and construction of an ordered 
form, and wherein the manufacturing steps correspond to a specific 
manufacturing process for creating the ordered form, (ii) determine 
manufacturability/usability of the ordered form by comparing the form 
design data to a set of validation rules, and (ii) generate 
manufacturability/usability exceptions based upon the manufacturability 
determination. The pricing engine is in communication with the user 
interface and is programmed to calculate a price corresponding to the 
ordered form as a function of a set of pricing rules. 
The pricing engine and the validation engine may be resident on a second 
computer system remote from and in communication with the user interface. 
The second computer system may be programmed to route the exceptioned 
manufacturing plan to a selected one of a plurality of exception handling 
locations according to the nature of the exception. The second computer 
system may be programmed to select a manufacturing plant as a function of 
the manufacturing steps and the form design data and the pricing engine 
may be programmed to calculate the price as a function of characteristics 
of the selected manufacturing plant or a hypothetical manufacturing plant. 
The price may comprise a combination of a form price, a freight price, and 
a storage price. 
In accordance with yet another embodiment of the present invention, a forms 
order entry system is provided comprising a first computer system and a 
pricing engine. The first computer system includes a user interface and is 
programmed to capture form design data representative of a forms order 
entered at the user interface. The form design data defines the appearance 
and construction of an ordered form. The pricing engine is in 
communication with the user interface and is programmed to calculate a 
price corresponding to the ordered form by (i) identifying a set of 
manufacturing steps corresponding to a specific manufacturing process for 
said ordered form, (ii) determining a labor cost component for at least 
one of the manufacturing steps, (iii) determining a material cost 
component for at least one of the manufacturing steps, (iv) determining a 
burden cost component and a mark-up cost component for the ordered form, 
and (v) applying a set of pricing rules to the identified labor, material, 
burden, and mark-up cost components to enable calculation of the price. 
The forms order entry system typically further comprises a validation 
engine programmed to generate said manufacturing steps for input to said 
pricing engine. 
The pricing engine is preferably programmed to calculate the price by 
determining a labor cost component for each of the manufacturing steps. 
The pricing engine may be programmed to initialize cost component inputs 
prior to applying the pricing rules, calculate the price by determining a 
plurality of labor cost components to set up and run at least one of the 
manufacturing steps and by determining a plurality of material cost 
components for consumption and waste for at least one of the manufacturing 
steps. The pricing engine may further be programmed to produce a pricing 
exception in response to application of the pricing rules and route the 
pricing exception to a selected one of a plurality of pricing exception 
handling locations according to the nature of the pricing exception. The 
pricing exception may be selected from the group consisting of a paper 
weight limit, a press impression limit, a single ply equivalents limit, an 
estimated total form price limit, a special customer account identifier, 
and combinations thereof. 
The pricing engine may also be programmed to operate in an override mode 
wherein at least one of the labor cost components, the material cost 
components, the burden cost components, and the mark-up cost components 
for the ordered form are replaced by an override value, and wherein the 
pricing engine is programmed to calculate the price based upon the 
override value. 
Accordingly, it is an objective of the present invention to provide a forms 
order entry system that provides for automation of a significant portion 
of the design, manufacture, and pricing mechanisms, and does so in an 
efficient and user-friendly manner. Other objectives of the present 
invention will be apparent in light of the description of the invention 
embodied herein.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS 
The general structure of the forms order entry system 10 of the present 
invention is illustrated in FIG. 1. The order entry system 10 comprises a 
first computer system 12, a printing station computer system 14, a second 
computer system 16, and a form design repository 18 linked together via a 
communications network 20. The first computer system 12 typically 
comprises a district or regional office computer system and includes a 
plurality of user interfaces 21-29 and a first server 13. Typically, a 
plurality of first computer systems 12 corresponding to a plurality of 
district or regional offices are included within the order entry system 
10, however, for the purpose of clearly describing the present invention, 
only one first computer system 12 is illustrated in FIG. 1. Each user 
interface 21-29 is coupled to a computer programmed to embody the 
structure and function of the present invention, as described in detail 
herein. 
In the illustrated embodiment, a first user interface 21 of the first 
computer system 12 is arranged to accommodate the needs of a district or 
regional office customer service representative (CSR). As is described in 
further detail herein, the CSR is one of the primary users of the order 
entry system 10 and inputs a significant amount of order entry data into 
the order entry system 10. A second user interface 22 of the first 
computer system 12 is arranged to accommodate the needs of a district or 
regional office forms designer. As is described in further detail herein, 
the forms designer is primarily responsible for the input of form 
graphics. Finally, a third user interface 23 of the first computer system 
12 is arranged to function as an auxiliary or walk-up user interface 
arranged to serve as an order entry or system-wide information source at 
the district or regional office. 
The printing station computer system 14 comprises a computer system located 
at a printing station or in communication with a printing station. 
Typically, the printing station computer system 14 is located at a form 
manufacturing plant or another form printing facility and includes three 
user interfaces 24-26 and a printing station server 15. A plurality of 
printing station computer systems 14 corresponding to a plurality of 
manufacturing plants are ordinarily included within the order entry system 
10. However, for the purpose of clearly describing the present invention, 
only one printing station computer system 14 is illustrated in FIG. 1. A 
first user interface 24 of the printing station computer system 14 is 
arranged to accommodate the needs of a pre-press forms designer. 
Specifically, the user interface 24 is arranged such that the pre-press 
forms designer has the ability to make changes to a form design files to 
account for unique or irregular characteristics of a specific press or 
change of press designated for printing an order. A second user interface 
25 of the printing station computer system 14 is arranged to accommodate 
the needs of a plant specialist. Specifically, the user interface 25 is 
arranged such that the plant specialist has the ability to access and view 
an order and communicate across the order entry system 10 to resolve order 
validation exceptions. Finally, a third user interface 26 of the printing 
station computer system 14 is arranged to accommodate the needs of an 
order coordinator. Specifically, the user interface 26 is arranged such 
that the order coordinator has the ability to change the identity of a 
manufacturing plant designated in a form order, generate a commitment to 
print a specific form order, and view the details of a specific order. 
The second computer system 16 is typically a centrally located corporate 
computer system including at least one user interface 27, a mainframe 11, 
and a corporate server 17. The user interface 27 of the second computer 
system 16 is arranged to accommodate the needs of a central computer 
system user, e.g., a corporate user. Specifically, the user interface 27 
of the second computer system 16 comprises a pair of user interfaces. One 
of the user interfaces is arranged such that the corporate or central 
system user has access to, and may maintain, a wide range of order entry 
data. The other user interface of the second computer system 16 is 
arranged such that the corporate or central system user may access, list, 
review, and edit the operating software of the order entry system 10. The 
mainframe 11 and the corporate server 17 hold system-wide operating 
software and additional software responsible for the system structure and 
functions described in detail herein. 
The form design repository 18 is coupled directly to the corporate server 
17, to the communications network 20, and to a pair of form design user 
interfaces 28, 29. The repository 18 holds in memory an index of form 
design files, as is described in further detail herein. The user 
interfaces 28, 29 are coupled to respective computers equipped with form 
design software such that form design functions performed at the second 
user interface 22 of the first computer system 12 may also be performed at 
the user interfaces 28, 29 coupled directly to the repository 18. All of 
the user interfaces 21-29 are arranged to communicate across the order 
entry system 10 via a conventional electronic mail system. 
Referring now to FIG. 2, although the user interfaces 21-29 are condensed 
into a single block element within respective portions of the order entry 
system 10, other aspects of the order entry system 10 of the present 
invention are illustrated in more detail than in FIG. 1, where like 
structure is referenced by like reference numerals. FIG. 2 includes a 
plurality of order entry servers 13 and associated components, as opposed 
to a single order entry server 13, so as to more clearly illustrate the 
fact that the order entry system 10 typically includes a plurality of 
order entry servers 13 within the first computer system 12. The specific 
block elements represented in FIG. 2 are discussed in detail herein in 
describing the operational structure represented in FIGS. 3-7. 
The general operational structure of the present invention is illustrated 
with reference to FIG. 3 and can be divided into four distinct components: 
order entry 100, order validation 200, order pricing 300, and order 
transmission 400. The flow charts of FIGS. 4-7 are detailed or exploded 
illustrations of each of these distinct components within the general 
operational structure of FIG. 3. 
Referring initially to FIG. 4, the order entry component 100 of the order 
entry system 10 of the present invention comprises a first step 102 
wherein order specifications 32, see FIG. 2, are designated. Specifically, 
the CSR either creates an original form order by designating specific form 
information or retrieves an existing or archived form order and modifies 
the existing order to meet the requirements of a specific customer. The 
order specifications 32 designated at step 102 depend upon the 
characteristics of the desired form. The order entry portion also 
comprises a second step 104 wherein order graphics 34, i.e., a graphic 
form design file 34, see FIG. 2, are designated. Specifically, the forms 
designer either creates an original form order by designating specific 
form graphics 34 to complement the order specifications 32 or retrieves an 
existing or archived graphics file and modifies it to compliment the order 
specifications 32. 
As is noted herein, the order entry system 10 of the present invention is a 
computer based system which operates with the aid of a conventional 
operating system, e.g., the Microsoft.RTM. Windows.RTM. 95 operating 
system available from the Microsoft Corporation. Accordingly, an order 
entry screen includes standard Windows.RTM. 95 features such as the title 
bar, the control-menu box, the menu bar, the minimize, maximize, and close 
buttons, scroll bars, and the taskbar. A toolbar is provided immediately 
beneath the menu bar. The toolbar contains several icon buttons which 
provide quick access to many of the most commonly used system functions 
(creating a new order, placing an order, pricing an order, reordering, 
requesting a quote, designating an order entry as a work in progress 
(WIP), creating a template, saving, printing, exiting, accessing an order 
log, accessing customer data). 
Preferably, the order entry system 10, and specifically the first computer 
system 12, are arranged to enable a user, e.g., the CSR, to select 
operations from the following menu items: File, Edit, Data, Options, Order 
Level Features, Ply Level Features, Utilities, Window, and Help. In 
addition, the first computer system 12 is arranged to generate graphic 
form design data. These menu items, the commands available within each 
menu item, and the graphic form design data generation are illustrated in 
FIG. 8 and described in detail herein with reference to FIG. 8. As will be 
appreciated by those practicing the present invention, a number of these 
menu items represent standard operating system functions. Specifically, 
the File menu describes commands to create, open, save, and print orders, 
the Edit menu describes commands to copy, move, insert and delete text, 
the Data menu describes commands to sort and find data, as well as show 
details, and the Window, and Help menus describe commands to change the 
user password, check user roles, change the appearance of windows, show 
the toolbar, and open Help. The Options menu, the Order Level Features 
menu, and the Ply Level Features menu describe commands which are unique 
to the operations of the order entry system 10. The Options menu describes 
commands to change, accept, reject, price, and place orders, the Order 
Level Features menu describes commands to enter information regarding 
features for orders, and the Ply Level Features Menu describes commands to 
enter information regarding features for each ply level of orders. The 
command items available within the respective menu items are set forth 
below. 
Referring now to FIG. 8, the File menu includes commands to create, open, 
save, and print orders. A new order can be created by choosing "New" from 
the File menu. This opens the Products dialog box which allows a user to 
select the product and manufacturing process. For example, choosing 
"Carbonless Sets" selects carbonless sets which may or may not be 
pre-collated, choosing "Continuous Singles" selects single-ply continuous 
forms, choosing "Labels" selects pressure sensitive labels, choosing 
"Mailer: Cont. Flat Glue" selects the flat-glued mailer form set, choosing 
"Mailer: Zipmailer" selects a mailer product manufactured with clean, 
die-cut inserts, easy opening, exposed return flap, and high ply with 
excellent feeding performance though a computer printout, choosing 
"Mailer: Zip Flat Glue" selects a zipset form with part of the set glued 
on several sides to form a pocket envelope, choosing "Rolls" selects 
preprinted or blank forms on jumbo rolls, choosing "Sheeted Singles" 
selects single ply forms, choosing "Standard Envelopes" selects 
non-continuous envelopes, choosing "Stanfast Sheets" selects the least 
complicated sheet form (sometimes called flat forms, cut forms, and 
singles, choosing "Stanset" selects continuous form products having 
multiple plies, choosing "Zipset" selects a unit set produced with either 
a limited or custom set of features, and choosing "Other Product" displays 
the Other Product dialog box. This feature allows a user enter another 
product description. It also covers subcontracted unmakable products. The 
number of plies for the product may be specified by clicking a Total Plies 
drop-down arrow within the Products dialog box. 
A Navigator list box is also available within the Products dialog box. The 
Navigator enables the CSR or other user to enter information at order 
entry by selecting screens that require data input during order entry. 
Choosing "Writing Device" from the Navigator list box opens a Writing 
Device window. This window allows a user to specify one or more primary 
writing devices and secondary devices. Choosing "Paper" from the Navigator 
list box opens a Paper/Ply window. This window allows a user to specify 
the paper and ply size at a ply level. Choosing "Ink" from the Navigator 
list box opens an Ink/Ply window. This window allows a user to select the 
ink for the front and back faces of a ply. Choosing "Ply Composition" from 
the Navigator list box opens a Ply Composition window. This window allows 
a user to identify the face change complexity (in relation to a previous 
order, if one exists) and the individual plates that are used on a 
ply-by-ply basis. Choosing "Perforations" from the Navigator list box 
opens a Perforations window. This window allows a user to specify 
perforation types and locations at a ply level. Choosing "Punching" from 
the Navigator list box opens a Punching window. This window allows a user 
to specify what punches will be used and where they will be located on the 
form. Choosing "Consecutive Numbers" from the Navigator list box opens a 
Consecutive Numbering window. This window allows a user to specify the 
format and location of consecutive numbers. Choosing "Fastening" from the 
Navigator list box opens a Fastening window. This window allows a user to 
identify stubs and specify types of fastening, as well as which plies to 
fasten together. Choosing "Non-Litho Printing" from the Navigator list box 
opens a Non-Litho Printing window. This window allows a user to select 
patch unit printing types for the order. Choosing "Printing" from the 
Navigator list box opens a Printing window. This window allows a user to 
select special printing types such as Pantographs and Prismatic for the 
order. Choosing "Sold to Customer Search" from the Navigator list box 
opens a Sold To Customer Search Window. This window allows a user to 
select a single customer address and return the selected address and 
associated customer information to the originating window. Choosing "Ship 
to/Bill to Customer" from the Navigator list box opens a Ship to/Bill to 
Summary window. This window allows a user to add, edit, or delete 
destinations. Choosing "Miscellaneous Charges" from the Navigator list box 
opens a Miscellaneous Charges window. This window allows a user to apply 
miscellaneous charges to an order. Choosing "Sales Split" from the 
Navigator list box opens a Sales Split window. This window allows a user 
to assign the sales split percentages by Sales Representative, Sales 
Teams, and Special Reserves. A "Search" feature enables a user to search 
for possible Sales Split Recipients at the district or corporate level. 
Choosing "Folios" from the Navigator list box opens a Folios window. This 
window allows a user to specify a folio (sample) distribution and 
quantities. Choosing "Proofs" from the Navigator list box opens a Proofs 
window. This window allows a user to specify a proof type, distribution, 
and quantity. Choosing "Storage" from the Navigator list box opens a 
Storage window. This window allows a user to select the storage type and 
the time of invoicing. Choosing "Packaging" from the Navigator list box 
opens the Packaging window. This window allows a user to choose the type 
of packaging, the amount of units per package, and various container 
options. Inner Packaging and Palletizing are also options within this 
window. Choosing "Special Instructions" from the Navigator list box opens 
a Special Instructions window. This window allows a user to select coded 
and invoice unit-of-measure instructions, enter invoice, additional, and 
CSR free-form instructions, and view (read-only) plant free-form 
instructions. Choosing "Bindery" from the Navigator list box opens a 
Bindery window. This window displays all types of bindery operations 
available for a given product. Choosing "MICR Fact Sheet" from the 
Navigator list box opens a MICR Fact Sheet window. This window allows a 
user to enter the form specifications for Magnetic Ink Character 
Recognition (MICR) printing. Data entered in this window normally includes 
account numbers, routing information, and related bank information. 
Choosing "Affixing" from the Navigator list box opens an Affixing window. 
This window allows a user to enter specifications regarding the placement 
of eyelets, transfer tapes, reinforcement patches, and other affixed items 
on the form. Choosing "Coating" from the Navigator list box opens a 
Coating window. This window allows a user to enter various coating 
(desensitized spots, spot carbons, etc.) and security (microprinting, 
simulated and artificial watermarks, etc.) features. 
According to one aspect of the present invention, choosing a product from 
the Products list dialog box automatically selects a Manufacturing 
Process: Limited, Custom, Stanfast, Subcontracted Unmakable, etc. The 
following table presents examples of which manufacturing processes are 
selected and available when specific products are chosen: 
______________________________________ 
Products: Manufacturing Process: 
______________________________________ 
Carbonless Sets Stanfast 
Continuous Singles 
Limited; Custom is available 
Labels Custom 
Mailer: Cont. Flat Glue 
Custom 
Mailer: Zipmailer 
Custom 
Mailer: Zipset Flat Glue 
Custom 
Rolls Custom 
Sheeted Singles Limited; Custom is available 
Standard Envelopes 
Stanfast 
Stanfast Sheets Stanfast 
Stanset Limited; Custom is available 
Zipset Limited; Custom is available 
Other Subcontracted Unmakable 
______________________________________ 
A user can open and access any one of the following items by choosing 
"Open" from the File menu: Quote, WIP, Template, Order, Exception In 
Basket, Exception List, Exception Detail, Pricing Results, Order Log, and 
Customer Search. Some of these items may be disabled based on security 
access, i.e., user ID and password. A quote, a WIP, and a template each 
describe a form order but are identified with different terms merely to 
provide a means of distinguishing their respective status's. For example, 
a quote is a priced order, a WIP is an order in the process of being 
priced, and a template is an archived order utilized to create new orders. 
Accordingly, the Open Quote, Open WIP, Open Template, and Open Order 
windows are substantially identical in appearance and functionality. Only 
the Open Quote window will be discussed herein in detail since it is 
representative of the Open WIP, Open Template, or Open Order windows. 
Choosing "Quote" from the File/Open menu or clicking on the quote tool 
button displays the Open Quote window. Access to Quotes may be limited by 
requiring different passcodes for files associated with different 
districts, regions, etc. Quotes, WIPs, and Templates are retrieved by 
entering Primary and Secondary Search Criteria (tracking number, 
production order number, customer address, etc.). Choosing "Exception In 
Basket" from the Open menu or clicking on the Exception In Basket toolbar 
button displays an Exception In Basket window. Exceptions, which are 
described in further detail herein, must be viewed and resolved by 
exception handlers. When exceptions are routed, the order entry system 10 
automatically sends an E-mail to the first/next Exception Handler in the 
routing sequence. This message alerts the Exception Handler to check the 
Exception In-Basket. The Exception Handler then processes the exceptions 
that are present. The exceptions are tracked by the Quote/WIP tracking 
number. After all exceptions have been accepted or rejected, the CSR will 
receive E-mail notification that the quote/WIP has been returned. Choosing 
"Exception List" from the Open menu displays an Exception List window for 
the active Quote/WIP/Order. If a Quote/WIP does not pass validation for 
any reason, all exceptions are automatically displayed to the CSR. The 
Exception List window indicates if the exceptions are for the CSR to 
resolve or if they need to be routed to another area. Any exceptions that 
can be resolved by the CSR must be resolved before any of the other 
exceptions can be routed. Choosing "Exception Detail" from the Open menu 
displays an Exception Detail window. This window is only available if an 
exception has been resolved. The Exception Detail window allows a user to 
view specific information related to an exception. This allows a user to 
research any information regarding a request (Exception handling location, 
exception originating office, status, ply, and date completed information, 
exceptions description, text description, description of the feature 
causing the exception, written description of the resolution to the 
problem, etc.). Choosing "Pricing Results" allows a user to view a 
detailed breakdown of pricing exceptions and pricing information. Access 
may be controlled by user ID and password. Choosing "Order Log" from the 
Open menu displays an Order Log Search Criteria window. In order to access 
the Order Log, a user must enter the appropriate search criteria into the 
Order Log Search Criteria window (mail code, date order entered, parent 
name/division name, customer name, purchase order number, form number, 
sales representative, shipment status, etc.). The Order Log window 
displays fields representing various information about the orders shown 
(date entered, tracking #, prod. order #, sales rep ID, sales rep name, 
parent name, division name, customer name, PO #, form #, form name, 
warehouse quantity, direct qty., order type, date desired, scheduled ship 
date, ship complete date, plant order status, change order, sell price, 
list price, diff %, direct amount, total amount, comments, etc.). To 
access the Order Log, a user must enter the appropriate search criteria 
into the Order Log Search Criteria window, as described above. Choosing 
"Customer Search" from the Open menu displays a Customer Search window. 
This window allows a user to search for specific customer information and 
return this information to the calling screen. The Customer Detail window 
allows a user to view detailed information about the customer selected in 
the Customer Search window, such as: parent name, division name, legal 
group number, etc. 
Choosing "Close" from the File menu closes the active window. Choosing 
"Save" from the File menu saves the active window. The quote can be saved 
as one of three types: Quote, Work In Progress (WIP), or Template. The 
save type designation is a choice a user makes while creating the quote. 
Choosing "Print" from the File menu prints current field information 
entered in the open window. Choosing "Print Setup" from the File menu 
provides a list of installed printers, sets the default printer, and 
provides access to other printing options for the printer selected. 
Choosing "Exit" from the File menu ends an order entry session. Clicking 
"OK" closes the Products window and opens a New Quote. Clicking "Cancel" 
closes the Products window. Clicking "Help" brings up the associated help 
topic for the window. Analogous "OK," "Cancel," and "Help" commands are 
available throughout the order entry system 10 windows. 
The Edit menu, see FIG. 8, includes commands to cut, copy, paste, insert, 
and delete text. Choosing "Cut" from the Edit menu removes selected text 
and graphics and puts them on a temporary storage area for cut or copied 
text, e.g., a clipboard. Choosing "Copy" from the Edit menu copies 
selected text to the clipboard. Choosing "Paste" from the Edit menu 
inserts a copy of the clipboard contents at the insertion point, replacing 
the selection (if any) with the text on the clipboard. Choosing "Insert" 
from the Edit menu when in the Customer Search window brings up a Customer 
Detail/linsert Prospect window where a new customer is added initially as 
a prospect. Choosing "Delete" from the Edit menu allows a user to delete 
selected text entered into window text fields. 
The Data menu, see FIG. 8, includes commands to sort and find data and show 
details. Some of these commands may be disabled based on security access 
(i.e., user ID and password). When in the Order Log, choosing "Search 
Criteria" from the Data menu displays an Order Log Search Criteria window 
and choosing "Sort" from the Data menu displays a Specify Sort Columns 
window. The sort process allows a user to sort by a specific column in the 
Order Log. When in the Order Log, choosing "Filter" from the Data menu 
displays a Specify Filter window. Order Log entries may be filtered based 
on specific needs. The filter feature is useful to quickly obtain a list 
of log entries based on some filtering criteria. The filter feature allows 
a user to locate and view a list of records that meet criteria for many 
fields. Some common filters might include: display an order with a 
specific tracking number; display all orders entered on a specific date, 
display all orders at a specific plant, display all orders scheduled on a 
specific date, etc. In most cases, filtering is a simple matter of 
defining the criteria in a mathematical equation. A common example is to 
find an order in the Order Log that is associated with a specific tracking 
number. The expression for this filter criteria is: Cust.sub.-- 
order.sub.-- id=tracking#. Once a filter criteria is written, a Verify 
button can be used to be sure the filter criteria is valid. Other 
mathematical expressions may need to be used to locate the needed 
information (Less than, Greater than, Less than or equal to, Greater than 
or equal to, etc.). When in the Order Log, choosing "Find" from the Data 
menu brings up a Search Order Log window. A user can go directly to the 
order's log entry by using the Search Order Log window. A user can 
logically delete a prospect record from a Customer Search window by using 
the "Cancel" function. Choosing "Restore" from the Data menu allows a user 
to restore a prospect to the record list in the Customer Search window. 
When the Order Log is open, choosing "Refresh" from the Data menu updates 
the Order Log data. Choosing "Detail" from the Data menu takes a user to 
the next level of detail available depending on the window that is 
currently open. 
The Options menu, see FIG. 8, includes commands to change, reopen, accept, 
reject, price, and place orders. In addition, this menu allows a user to 
enter or view a forms design request and make column settings to the Order 
Log. Some of these items may be disabled based on security access (i.e., 
user ID and password). When an order is open, choosing "Change Order" from 
the Options menu displays the Change Order window. The Change Order window 
allows a user indicate the reason for changing the order. It also enables 
a user define the criteria for customer acceptance. "Reason for Change" 
enables a user to indicate the reason for changing the order. Selections 
include: Data Entry Error, Sales Rep Error, Customer Request, Cancel 
Order, etc. Specifying the reason for change enables the "Cost" and 
"Schedule" sections in Customer Acceptance Criteria. The "Cost" section 
allows a user to indicate whether or not the customer accepts a change to 
the cost as a result of the order modifications. The "Schedule" section 
allows a user to indicate whether or not the customer accepts a change to 
the schedule as a result of the order modifications. Choosing "Reopen 
Order" from the Options menu enables a District Operations Manager (DOM) 
to reopen an order to make changes (typically, the CSR will not have 
security access to this menu option). 
Choosing "View Forms Design Activity" from the Options menu displays a 
Forms Design Activity window. The Forms Design Activity window allows a 
user to enter or view a design request. An Action Gram field within this 
window allows a user to enter the Action Gram number. Clicking a Search 
button allows a user to see if any forms design activity is already 
associated with the Action Gram. If activity exists, "Requested Date" and 
"Due Date", as well as the "Started" and "FD Activity ID" information is 
presented in the center display field. Clicking the Add button adds a 
design request. The Requested Column field displays the current date. This 
enables a Due Date field. where the due date for the design request is 
entered. The Started and Completed fields are populated when the forms 
designer starts and completes the form. The FD Activity ID # represents 
the number a user must copy onto the Action Gram. This number is sent to 
the designer along with samples, artwork, or mock-ups. This information 
helps tie hardcopy information to on-line documentation. A user can use 
the Delete button to remove a design request that has not been started (no 
Started date showing). A user can ask a designer to stop work on an 
iteration that has been started (started date is showing) but it cannot be 
deleted. A Forms Design Compare Results window appears when there is a 
mismatch between the forms design and order entry specifications. It may 
show that a specification appears in the forms design but not in order 
entry, or visa versa. In either case, validation and pricing cannot 
proceed until the mismatch is resolved. Depending on the nature of the 
mismatch, a user may either need to change the specifications in order 
entry or have the forms design modified. 
When changes are made to an order and a "Change Order" is sent to a plant 
for evaluation, a plant can choose to accept or reject the changes. 
Selecting "Accept" overwrites the old order. A change notice is printed at 
the plant and a new work ticket is generated. Selecting "Reject" deletes 
the "Change Order" from the system. 
Choosing "Compute Price" from the Options menu allows a user to request a 
list price for a Quote/WIP. The pricing process sends the quote through 
the validation and pricing engines. The list price is returned and 
displayed in the Pricing section of the Order Level Detail View. When 
initiating the pricing process, there is always the possibility of an 
exception. If this occurs, an Exception List will be displayed on the 
screen and no list price is returned. Selecting "Compute Price" when the 
Product is "Other" opens up a Subcontracted Pricing window. 
Choosing "Place Order" from the Options menu places an order. Placing the 
order causes the system to go through a validation process to ensure order 
completeness. If exceptions are found, those exceptions must be reviewed 
and handled before the order can be placed. 
Choosing "Set Order Log" from the Options menu displays an Order Log 
Profile window. The Order Log Profile allows a user to hide any columns 
from the Order Log. The Order Log Profile is user specific. The same CSR 
cannot set different profiles for different customers, but different CSRs 
in the same district, region, etc. can have different profiles depending 
on the needs of their Sales Reps and customers. To configure the Order Log 
Profile, simply select the columns to hide on the log and select the Save 
As Default button. To return and view a column previously hidden on the 
Order Log (without modifying the profile), de-select the columns to 
display and click the OK button. 
The Order-Level Features menu, see FIG. 8, allows a user to access specific 
feature windows to enter detailed order-level information. These features 
are found in the Shipping, Pricing, Administration, Instructions, and 
Product sections of Order Level View. Each of these windows can be opened 
from Order Level View by using the drop-down menu on the menu bar, a 
shortcut menu by clicking the right mouse button, or by clicking on the 
raised button on Order Level View. All of these windows have similar 
screen conventions that follow Windows.RTM. standards. Certain windows may 
be "view only" based on security. 
The Shipping section allows a user to specify the "Sold To" and "Shipping" 
information for a quote. Clicking on the raised Total Shipping 
Destinations button brings up a Bill to/Ship to Summary window. The Bill 
to/Ship to Summary window contains "Quantity," "Bill To," and "Ship To" 
information. Clicking an Add button brings up a Bill to/Ship to Detail 
window. In order to complete billing and shipping information, a user must 
identify the "Ship To" and "Bill To" addresses and other pertinent 
details. Once a user has completed the "Ship To" and "Bill To" information 
on the Bill to/Ship to Detail window, specific details are entered in a 
Details section of the window (quantity, delivery method, delivery point, 
customer P.O. number, requisition number, cost center, consecutive 
numbering start number, prefix, and suffix, destination specific "Ship to" 
instructions, information to print on the shipping label, etc.). Clicking 
the OK button on the Bill to/Ship to Detail window returns a user to the 
Bill to/Ship to Summary window. Clicking the OK button on the Bill to/Ship 
to Summary window enters the number of destinations into a Total Shipping 
Destinations field of the Shipping section on the Order Level View. 
Clicking on raised Sold To buttons brings up the Sold To Customer Address 
Search window. This window allows a user to select a single customer 
address and return the selected address to the Sold To field in the 
Shipping section. A Freight Terms drop-down list box allows a user to 
specify if the shipment is Prepaid, Prepay and Charge, or C.O.D. 
Typically, the default is Prepaid Charge. If there are no other customer 
requirements, Freight and Storage are based on the list price. If it is to 
be based on the sell price, a user must enter the sell price. A Desired 
Ship Date field allows a user to indicate when the plant is to ship the 
order. A Not Before checkbox is selected if a user does not want the order 
to be shipped before the specified date, even if it is completed sooner. A 
Commitment Number field allows a user to specify an agreed-to ship date. A 
number is assigned to verify the commitment. This field is entered by the 
plant. After the order is shipped, the actual quantity shipped is 
indicated. A Qty/Carton field indicates the number of forms per carton. 
The Pricing section of the Order Level Features menu allows a user to 
capture list, sell, and contractual prices. A Contract No. field allows a 
user to enter a contract number for non-automatic contractual pricing. An 
Order Qty. field allows a user to enter the total of the destination 
quantities. The order entry system 10 compares the List and Sell price and 
provides a differential figure in percent. Alternatively, the differential 
may be entered and the sell price calculated. An operational check may be 
provided to ensure the differential is acceptable. When pricing is 
initiated, and a list price is received, an expiration date, typically 30 
days from when the price was first calculated, is assigned by the system. 
In other words, the quote is valid until the expiration date. The Charges 
Incl. On field allows pricing to be assigned to one order in the case of 
multi-plant orders. For example, in the case of a continuous form with a 
blown-on label, the label order can be marked that the charges are 
included on the continuous form order, allowing the two to be 
cross-referenced. The order entry system also provides for order grouping. 
Clicking on the raised Misc. Charges button within the Pricing section of 
the Order Level Features menu brings up the Miscellaneous Charges window. 
This window allows a user to apply miscellaneous charges to an order. 
Clicking the Charge drop-down list arrow allows a user to select the 
charge code for Consulting, Forms Design, Excessive Iterations, Scanning, 
Rushes, Special Services, Testing, etc. A user can add or delete charges 
from the list by clicking the Add or Delete button. Depending on the 
charge selected, certain fields and function buttons are enabled. For 
example, selecting Forms Design enables Description, List Amount, Sell 
Amount, Per Order, Display on Invoice, and Charge District. A Description 
field describes the Charge. For example, if a user selects "Special 
Services" from the Charge drop-down list box, a user can enter a specific 
description such as "Presentation Materials." 
A List Amount field of the Pricing section allows a user to specify the 
list amount. A Sell Amount field allows a user to define the sell amount. 
Clicking the Per Order checkbox allows a user to designate a charge as Per 
Order. For example, Forms Design is a flat, order-level fee. If this is 
not selected, the charge will be calculated on a Per M (per thousand) 
basis. Clicking a Display on Invoice checkbox allows a user to present the 
charges on the invoice. Not selecting this checkbox incorporates the 
charges into the total list amount. Clicking a Charge District checkbox 
allows a user to charge a district to absorb the cost as a service to the 
customer. This also allows a user to document this action. A district 
charge code must then be entered. The system totals the Per Order and Per 
Thousand List and Sell amounts. 
The Administrative section allows a user to request folios, request proofs, 
and identify storage options. This window also displays sales commission 
split and account code information, tracking numbers, order numbers, and 
production numbers. The Administrative section displays the order type and 
allows the CSR to change it. The CSR can also turn a quote into a WIP. An 
"Action Gram" field allows a user to enter the Action Gram Form number. 
The Action Gram is a sequentially numbered form used by a sales rep to 
communicate with the CSR. A "Date" field allows a user to enter the date a 
user received the Action Gram. A "Doc IDNersion" field within the 
Administrative section is used to associate the forms design and the order 
entry document. Clicking on a raised Doc IDNersion button brings up the 
Associate Forms Design window. This window allows a user to associate the 
order graphics (or graphic form design file) with a quote or populate the 
quote with the information stored in the design file. Document ID and 
Version fields in a Form Design File section of the window allow a user to 
identify the specific document and version number. Clicking on an 
Associate button in the Options section ties the Quote/WIP and the design 
together, but does not change any data that may have been entered in the 
Quote/WIP. Clicking a Populate button fills in the available information 
on the Order- and Ply-Level windows. This will also overwrite information 
existing on the Quote/WIP. A Date Populated field indicates the date the 
forms design was populated or associated. 
Clicking on the raised Sales Rep # button in the administrative section 
brings up a Sales Split window. This window allows a user to identify the 
sales rep and specify the sales percentage for commission purposes. A user 
can either enter recipient's number, if known, or click on the Search 
button to locate and select a sales split recipient from a list. Clicking 
the Search button brings up a Sales Recipient Search window. This window 
allows a user to select a sales split recipient. A user can narrow the 
search by clicking either a District or a Corporate button in the Search 
Domain section. Clicking the OK button returns the selected sales split 
recipient information to the Sales Split window. The Sales Split window 
also requires a user to identify a Primary sales rep. The sales split 
values for all Sales Reps must total to 100%. Sales split values greater 
than 100% will not be validated. 
Clicking the raised Folios button in the administrative section brings up a 
Folios window. This window allows a user to specify who will receive 
samples when the order is completed. Clicking the Distribution drop-down 
list arrow presents four different options for distribution: Attach to 
Invoice, Customer, Sales Rep, and System Library. Quantity is always 
entered in multiples of 5. Clicking the Add button allows a user to assign 
other distributions. A user can assign up to four (4) distributions, but 
cannot repeat any of them. Clicking on the Delete button deletes a 
specified distribution. Selecting "Customer" requires a user to complete 
Quantity and Select Address fields within the administrative section. 
Clicking a Select Address drop-down list arrow allows a user to select the 
appropriate customer address. Address displays addresses for the Ship to, 
Bill to, and Sold to. 
Clicking on a Proofs button in the administrative section brings up a 
Proofs window. This window operates similarly to the Folios window. 
Clicking on a Proof Types drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify 
the type of proof, such as B&W Acetate, B&W, Color Key, Coloron, Dylux, 
Multilith, and PMT. Clicking on a Distribution drop-down list box allows a 
user to select either Customer or Sales Rep. Clicking a Grid button 
indicates a grid background should be printed on the proof. Clicking the 
Add button allows a user to assign other distributions. Clicking the 
Delete button deletes a specified distribution. 
Clicking on a raised Storage button in the administrative section brings up 
a Storage window. This window is used to define storage terms and specify 
requirements for orders shipping to warehouses. Clicking a Storage Order 
checkbox enables various fields and button selections to be completed 
(some of these may be enabled or disabled based on the customer profile). 
Goods may be invoiced at the time of release or at the time of storage by 
clicking either the Invoice at Release or Invoice at Storage button within 
the Administrative section. Clicking the Storage Charges drop-down list 
arrow allows a user to add storage charges as a separate line item to the 
invoice, include storage charges in the price of the form, or use a short 
storage option if the items are going to be stored in the warehouse for a 
short period of time. A user can specify the % Overrun to Storage. A HVCO 
(High Volume Storage) field is typically only enabled only per unique 
customer requirements and terms. Negotiated Freight and Storage and 
Storage Override Allowed fields are enabled only per unique customer 
requirements and terms. Full Carton Release and PIC/ button selections 
are enabled only per unique customer requirements and terms. Clicking the 
Packing Unit drop-down list arrow allows a user to select the desired 
packing unit. A FormPac section allows a user to specify FormPac 
information: Estimated Monthly Storage, Number of Months Supply, Product 
Types, Remarks, Forms Management Indicator, Max. Release Units, Form 
Functions, etc. 
After a quote is saved, a Tracking Number is assigned by the system. It is 
a unique, sequential number that will follow the quote through the order 
stage. It will also feed into the order log. This provides a means for 
sorting and filtering the Order Log in the same sequence as a Monthly 
Sales Statement for reconciliation. When a user Is processing a reorder, 
the Previous Order Number (the last order in the reorder chain) is 
displayed in this field. The Prev. Order No.: Reference checkbox is used 
to identify a reference to a previous order. For example, suppose Customer 
A requests the same kind of form as Customer B. Because there is something 
very unique about the construction of the form, Prev. Order No.: Reference 
allows a user to reference Customer A's order. The Order No. is filled in 
when the order is placed. It will remain blank during most of the order 
entry process. Clicking an Order Type drop-down list arrow allows a user 
to select the Order Type: (Quote, Template, or WIP) for logical grouping 
of a users work. An Account Code field allows a user to enter an account 
code used for a variety of business transactions. Examples include 
stopping automatic invoicing, placing special orders, accessing 
authorization, etc. 
The Instructions section allows a user to specify packaging instructions, 
as well as overrun and underrun information and other special 
instructions. Clicking either a raised Inner Packaging or Packaging button 
brings up a Packaging window. This window allows a user to specify inner 
packaging, packaging types, and palletizing. Selecting either a No 
Overruns or No Underruns checkbox specifies whether or not an overrun or 
underrun is allowed. 
Clicking on an Invoice Copies drop-down list arrow in the instructions 
section allows a user to specify the number of invoice copies required. 
Clicking an Invoice Coded, Special Coded, CSR FreeForm, or Invoice Free 
Form raised buttons brings up the Special Instructions window. Clicking a 
Coded Special Instructions drop-down list arrow within the Special 
Instructions window allows a user to select a commonly used coded special 
instruction such as CAR on Previous Order, Export Order, Full Cartons 
Only, Flag All Breaks, Back Printing-Tumble Style, Test Order, List 
Missing Numbers, Print the Byline, Print the Symbol, etc. A user can 
select multiple instructions from the list by simply clicking on the 
desired special notices. 
A "Sales Office Special Instructions" field allows a user to enter special 
sales instructions. Pressing the Add button allows a user to add a row. 
Entry of special instructions in this field will cause the Quote/WIP to be 
routed to the plant when pricing is attempted. The plant cannot modify the 
information contained in this field. Pressing the Delete button removes 
the selected instruction. A "Plant Special Instructions" field allows the 
plant to enter special instructions after reviewing Sales Office Special 
Instructions. The CSR cannot modify the information contained in this 
field. The plant uses the Add, Delete, and OK buttons in the same fashion 
as described in the Sales Office Special Instructions section. An Invoice 
section allows a user specify invoicing instructions. Clicking the Billing 
Unit drop-down list arrow allows a user to select one of the following: 
Per Eaches, Per Carton/Roll, Per Package, Per Pad/Book, or Per Inner 
Carton. The default unit is Per M (per thousand). 
The Product section captures product information from the Products dialog 
box when the quote was first created. A user can change product 
information and assign a form number and form name. These items can be 
used to identify the form for later retrieval. The total plies (including 
carbons) previously selected is entered into a Plies field. Clicking on 
the associated raised buttons opens the initial Product dialog box where 
ply information (quantity) may be changed. A Form number field allows a 
user to enter the form number. A Form Name field allows a user to enter 
the form name. If a user were creating a template, a user could enter 
"three-part carbonless" to identify the template by name. A Fold length 
field relates to fold length of continuous forms. Clicking a raised 
Writing Device button brings up a Writing Device window. This window 
allows a user to select a printer and specify one or more primary and 
secondary writing devices. 
If a product is "Other," a Subcontractor Name field allows a user to enter 
the name of the subcontractor with which the order is placed. Selecting 
"Compute Price" from the Options menu when the product is "Other," opens a 
Subcontracted Pricing window. An Associate Distributor checkbox is 
selected when the subcontractor and product is listed in the catalog with 
specifications and pricing information. The Subcontractor Price per 
thousand for the product that the subcontractor quoted, the per thousand 
markup percentage, and the flat (per order) markup in dollars may be 
entered within the Subcontractor Pricing window. Clicking OK resumes 
pricing. The Subcontractor Price, Markup %, and Markup (Flat) are used to 
calculate the marked-up price used as the List price for the subcontracted 
order. 
A Pre-Collated Set checkbox is provided in the product window for 
pre-collated carbonless sets. Clicking a raised Bindery button brings up a 
Bindery window. This window allows a user to specify bindery requirements 
(binding method, binding types, Folding Method, fold orientation, Face 
Out/Face In folding, binding color, stub location, cover printing, cover 
material, cover type, special binding instructions or requirements, 
quantity for padding, chipboard backing, Glue Edge, number of pages for a 
book, Left or Right glue application, number of plies booked, number of 
loose plies, etc. Depending on the binding method selected, certain fields 
and function buttons are enabled. For example, selecting Perfect Binding 
enables Pages per Book and Location (i.e., Left or Right glued). Selecting 
Comb binding enables Color, Pages per Book, and Location. Selecting 
Stitching enables Face Out, Cover Printed, and Chipboard. Selecting Spiral 
Binding enables Color, Pages per Book, and Location. If Folding were 
available, selecting this method would enable Folding Method, Orientation, 
and Face Out. 
The Ply-Level Features menu, see FIG. 8, allows a user to access specific 
features windows to enter information for each ply level of orders: Paper, 
Ink, Carbon, Fastening, Perforations, Punching, Ply Composition, 
Consecutive Numbers, MICR Fact Sheet, Printing, Non-Litho Printing, 
Affixing, and Coating. A Ply-Level View window is a high-level view of an 
order. Each ply-level feature is available as a section in this window. 
For each section, there are multiple lines determined by the number of 
plies specified in the Products window. Each feature from the Ply-Level 
Features menu allows a user to access a specific ply number. If 
information is the same for all plies, a user may apply this data to all 
papers using the Apply To All Paper and/or Apply To All Carbons features. 
The following sections describe each Ply-Level feature in detail. Each 
section contains a functional explanation of the features window, as well 
as field-level and button descriptions, navigation tips, and information 
on how ply-level information ties into the Ply-Level Detail window. 
Analogous Apply to All commands are available throughout the order entry 
system 10 menu commands. 
The Paper window allows a user to specify ply size and paper at a ply 
level. This information can be applied to all plies. If an envelope 
product is chosen, a user can select the envelope number, weight, color, 
and paper description from this window. If there is a forms design 
associated with the quote/WIP, the size will be populated by that design 
but the paper weight/color/description must be entered. A user can choose 
to view only those papers for the selected writing device(s) related to 
the quote/VIP. Selecting an Approved for Writing Device button allows a 
user to select from approved papers for the writing device(s). Selecting 
an All Papers button allows a user to view all paper combinations, 
regardless of the selected writing device(s). Choosing an envelope product 
type disables the Paper Display feature. When no writing device is chosen, 
an Approved for Writing Device button is disabled and the All Papers 
button is selected. When a writing device is selected for the quote/WIP, 
the system defaults to Approved for Writing Device. Selecting Envelope as 
the product type enables the Envelope drop-down list box. Clicking on the 
drop-down arrow allows a user to select any one of the available envelope 
sizes. Selecting an envelope number populates the Width and Length fields. 
Ply size is entered in the Paper window as well. Clicking a Weight 
drop-down arrow allows a user to select the appropriate paper weight. 
Clicking a Color drop-down arrow allows a user to select the desired paper 
color. A Description drop-down list box is populated after a user selects 
or changes both a color and weight. A user can click on the Other button 
and manually enter a paper description in the adjacent field. 
An Ink window allows a user to specify the ink for front and back faces of 
a ply. If there is a forms design associated with this quote/WIP, this 
window can be partially populated by that design. Clicking an appropriate 
drop-down list arrow allows a user to select an available system ink. 
Clicking the "Other" selection opens an Other FreeForm window. This window 
allows a user to enter a description of an ink not present on a system 
list. Selecting the "Other" ink option causes routing to determine if the 
request can be produced. The system ink Number field allows a user to 
enter a numbered ink as opposed to a named ink. A Group Name field 
identifies the Group Name for the selected Named Ink or Number. An 
orientation buttons allow a user to specify the ink(s) for either Front or 
Back side of the current ply. 
A Carbon window allows a user to select the type and orientation of a 
carbon on a ply-by-ply basis. If there is a forms design associated with a 
quote/WIP, this window can be populated by that design. Width and Length 
fields allow a user to specify carbon dimensions. Selecting a Formula 
drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify the carbon formula. 
Selecting a Formula type, enters a description in a Description drop-down 
list box. Clicking a Narrow Carbon checkbox allows a user to specify a 
narrow (or short) carbon at a specific location of a form. Clicking a 
location drop-down list arrow allows a user to choose the Narrow Carbon 
location: Right, Left, Top, Bottom. A Distance field allows a user to 
enter the distance between the paper ply and the narrow carbon from the 
specified Location. A KS Holes drop-down list box allows a user to 
indicate the marginal punching: None, Right, Left, Both. Selecting a 
Feather Edge button allows a user to specify a carbon-free "pull-out" 
strip edge to cleanly remove carbons. Clicking a Length drop-down list 
arrow allows a user to select the length of the feather edge. Clicking a 
Strip Carbon button indicates that the carbon coated tissue is to be 
produced with an uncoated strip within the sheet. Orientation buttons 
allow a user to specify the orientation of the carbon: Face Down or Face 
Up. Clicking a View Other button allows a user to view the "Other" carbon 
selections for the current ply. A user must specify "Other" as a carbon 
type to enable and select this button. 
A Fastening window allows a user to specify a type of fastening, as well as 
which plies of the order to fasten together. If there is a forms design 
associated with this quote/WIP, this window can be populated by that 
design. Clicking a Fastening Feature drop-down list arrow allows a user to 
specify a fastening feature. Fields are enabled/disabled based on the 
fastening feature selected. An Attached Ply field is used to indicate the 
ply to which a user is attaching. A Distance From Edge field is used to 
indicate the distance from the edge of the form in inches. Clicking a 
Location 1 drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify the location of 
the first fastening feature: Top, Bottom, Left, or Right. A Width 1 field 
is used to specify the width of the first stub. Clicking the Location 2 
drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify the location of second stub: 
Top, Bottom, Left, or Right. A Width 2 field is used to specify the width 
of the second stub. A Primary Stub checkbox indicates which stub, if there 
is more than one stub, is the primary. Clicking a Prongs drop-down list 
arrow allows a user to specify the number of prongs for crimping. Clicking 
a Staple Direction drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify the 
direction of the staple. Options include: Horizontal, Vertical, Left 
Diagonal, or Right Diagonal. Clicking an Add or a Delete button allows a 
user to specify another fastening feature or remove a specified fastening 
feature from the Fastening section. Clicking a View Other button allows a 
user to view the "Other" fastening selection for the ply. 
The Perforations window allows a user to select perforation types and 
location at a ply level. If there is a forms design associated with this 
quote/WIP, this window can be partially populated by that design. Clicking 
a Feature drop-down list arrow presents a list of perforation features, 
such as Letteredge, Standard, or Score. When Standard perforation is 
selected, a Type drop-down list box presents the following options: Fold, 
Full, or Partial. Clicking the Orientation drop-down list arrow presents 
orientation options for a perforation. Based on selections previously 
made, Starting and Ending distance fields are enabled or disabled. A user 
must enter information into the enabled fields. 
The Punching window allows a user to specify what punches are used and 
where they are to be located on the form. It also allows a user to view 
punches already defined for an order. In addition, the Punches window 
allows a user to specify which plies the punches apply to. If there is a 
forms design associated with the quote/WIP, this window can be populated 
by that design. Clicking a Punch Type drop-down list arrow presents a list 
of standard round-hole Punch Types to select such as: Round holes, Corner 
cut, Keyhole meeting, Keyhole extended, KS punch, Slit file holes, Slotted 
file holes, Pegboard, Cheshire, Kalamazoo, VISIrecord, McBee, Credit Card 
Carrier, Window, Mosier telematic, Round corners, 2 hole, 3 hole, and 5 
hole, etc. A user can define holes for pricing purposes without a forms 
design. A Location drop-down list box allows a user to select where the 
punches will be located. Options include: Top, Bottom, Left, and Right. A 
Distance: Center to Edge field is used to define the distance from the 
center of the hole to the edge of the paper. A Center to Center field is 
used to define the distance from the center of one hole to the center of 
another. A From Left field is used to define the "x" punch distance from 
the left. A From Top field is used to define the "y" punch distance from 
the top. Clicking an Add button adds another punch to the ply. Pressing a 
Delete button deletes a punch from a ply. Clicking a View Other button 
allows a user to view punches already defined for a current order. 
Choosing Ply Composition opens a Ply Composition window. This window allows 
a user to identify the face Change Complexity (in relation to a previous 
order, if one exists) and the individual plates that are used on a 
ply-by-ply basis. A Plate window, which works in concert with the Ply 
Composition window, allows a user to describe each plate used on the form. 
A Description field within the Plate window allows a user to describe the 
Plate. When the Forms Design populates the Plate window, the required 
fields will contain the specified values. Clicking an Add button allows a 
user to specify an additional plate. Clicking a Delete button allows a 
user to remove a specified plate from the Plate section. Clicking a Change 
Type drop-down list arrow allows a user to select the appropriate type of 
change. Options include: 1 Line Change, Camera Ready, Camera Ready w/1 
Line Change, Exact Reorder, and New. Selecting "New" enables the system to 
estimate the number of minutes involved in composing the form for pricing 
purposes. Selecting "1 Line Change" from the Change Type drop-down list 
enables a "One Line Change Description" field, allowing a user to enter a 
detailed description of the one line change. A "Quadrants Changed" field 
indicates which portion of the negative requires changes. This field is 
populated by a Forms Design. It is also enabled when Camera Ready is 
chosen from the Change Type drop-down list. Clicking Reverse Printing 
and/or Screening checkboxes indicates a reversed and/or screened area 
appears on the ply face. Top Lockup, Split Lockup, and Bottom Lockup 
fields allow a user to enter the space requirements for the lockup area of 
the plate. The lockup area is the non-printable section of the plate that 
is held (locked) by the press cylinder. Validation checks the lockup 
values and determines whether it is adequate for the product. Once the 
Plate window is completed, the Ply Composition window displays the plates 
used for the Front Face and Back Face in a Highlight plates used for this 
face box. 
The Consecutive Numbering window allows a user to specify the format and 
type of consecutive numbers to be described. If there is a forms design 
associated with a quote/WIP/template, this window can be partially 
populated by that design. Clicking on the Consecutive Numbering Locations 
drop-down list arrow allows a user to select the consecutive number name 
such as Regular, MICR, and Other. Clicking a Type drop-down list arrow 
allows a user to select one of two types of numbering: Press or Copysafe. 
Press numbers are printed on each ply of the form individually and great 
care must be taken to ensure the numbers match from ply to ply when the 
parts are collated. Copysafe (also known as "crash numbering") works like 
a typewriter with carbon or carbonless paper. The first ply gets the 
number imprinted on it in ink. The subsequent plies receive the number 
from the impression. This ensures the numbers always match on all plies. 
Clicking a Name drop-down list arrow allows a user specify the ink color 
for the consecutive number. Clicking the Format drop-down list arrow 
allows a user to specify Normal, Digital, or Split numbering format. A 
Number of Chars. field is used to specify the number of digits in the 
consecutive number. Distance From: Left and Top fields are used to 
indicate the location of the consecutive number on the form. Clicking an 
Orientation drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify the orientation 
of the consecutive number. Clicking a Machine Readable checkbox specifies 
the use of special numbers that are readable by a machine. Clicking a High 
Number Stacking drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify how the 
consecutive numbered forms are going to be stacked in the box. A user can 
specify high numbers on Top or Bottom. Clicking a Formula drop-down list 
arrow allows a user to select the mathematical formula (equation) used to 
determine the check digit. Check digits are used to verify the correct 
consecutive number. Clicking a Check Digit: Location drop-down list arrow 
allows a user to specify whether the check digit is to the Right or Left 
of the consecutive number. A Digits field is used to specify the number of 
digits in the check digit. Clicking a Separator drop-down list arrow 
allows a user to specify a separator between the consecutive number and 
check digit. Options include None, Space, and Dash. Book and Page fields 
are used to enter the Repeat Quantity, Starting Number, and Pages Per 
Book. Repeat Quantity is used indicate the repeat quantity. Starting 
Number is used to indicate the starting number for the book and page. 
Pages Per Book is used to indicate the number of pages in the book. 
Clicking an Add or Delete button allows a user to specify another Location 
to the Face or remove a number from the ply. 
Clicking a Zero Suppress button indicates leading zeros should be dropped. 
When a numbered form ships to multiple destinations and a specific 
starting number is not required for each location, clicking a Continue Up 
button allows a user to continue up the numbering sequence regardless of 
what occurs in the process. Clicking a Guarantee No Missing button ensures 
no missing documents (i.e., loss of numbers due to breaks, changing paper, 
waste, etc.) when forms are delivered to the customer. Face orientation 
buttons allow a user to specify consecutive number(s) for either the Front 
or Back side of the current ply. 
The MICR Fact Sheet window allows a user to enter manufacturing 
specifications for Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) printing. If 
there is a forms design associated with a quote/WIP, this window can be 
partially populated by that design. The MICR window is divided into two 
sections: MICR Repetitive and MICR Consecutive information. Orientation 
buttons allow a user to specify the MICR application for either the Front 
or Back side of the current ply. Clicking a MICR Repetitive checkbox 
indicates MICR Repetitive functions. Clicking a MICR Consecutive checkbox 
indicates MICR Consecutive Numbering. A Measurement Bar field located at 
the top of the window represents width of the form. From Left and From Top 
fields are used to indicate the location of the repetitive number on the 
form. Clicking a PMS#/Name drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify 
the ink color used for MICR repetitive numbering. Information in the MICR 
Consecutive section will be completed if the MICR Consecutive information 
in the Consecutive Numbering window is completed. All associated fields 
within this section are enabled for entry. Clicking a Type drop-down list 
arrow allows a user to specify Press or Copysafe. A Number of Chars. field 
is used to specify the number of digits in the consecutive number. 
Clicking a Guarantee No Missing button ensures no missing documents (i.e., 
loss of numbers due to breaks, changing paper, waste, etc.) when forms are 
delivered to the customer. Clicking a Check Digit drop-down list arrow 
allows a user to select the mathematical formula (equation) used to 
determine the check digit. 
The Printing window enables a user to establish printing specifications 
such as embossing, pantograph, and prismatic methods. If there is a forms 
design associated with a quote/WIP, this window can be partially populated 
by that design. An Available Print Types field allows a user to specify 
print types such as Bar Codes, Embossing, High Resolution, Microprinting, 
Pantograph, Printing Other, Prismatic, and Security Shield. Selecting 
Embossing enables the fields within the Emboss section. Selecting 
Pantograph enables the fields within the Pantograph section. Selecting 
Prismatic enables the fields within the Prismatic section. A Description 
field is used to enter a free-form description of the desired embossing. 
Clicking a Type drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify a pantograph 
type. Clicking a Custom checkbox indicates custom application. A PMS 
Number field is used to specify the desired PMS Numbered Ink for the 
Pantograph. Clicking a Named Ink drop-down list arrow allows a user to 
specify the Named Ink for the Pantograph. A Prismatic section allows a 
user to indicate the ink sequence, as well as specify the Divider Width of 
the Prismatic band as it flows from one color to the next. A user can 
select printing for either the Front or Back Face of the ply. Clicking a 
View Other button allows a user to view the "Other" print type selections 
for the current ply. 
The Non-Litho Printing window enables a user to establish non-litho 
printing specifications such as titles, stock phrases, outline phrases, 
distinguishing figures, and the type of ink. If there is a forms design 
associated with a quote/WIP, this window can be partially populated by 
that design. Clicking a Select Title drop-down list arrow allows a user to 
select a stock title, such as "Acknowledgment Copy." If a Custom Title 
selection is chosen, then the Custom Title fields will be enabled, 
allowing a user to enter up to two lines for a custom title. A user can 
specify the orientation of the printing. Options include Horizontal and 
Vertical. Clicking a Number of Lines drop-down list arrow allows a user to 
specify the number of lines required for the custom title. A font size 
must be selected for a custom title. A Stock Phrases field and a Select 
Outline Phrase fields allow a user to select stock and outline phrases and 
their respective orientations from a drop-down list. If the use of 
different paper colors alone does not meet the form separation 
requirements, a user can use Distinguishing Figures. A user can specify an 
ink for the Selected Title, Stock Phrase, Outline Phrase, and 
Distinguishing Figure. A user has the choice of selecting either a 
Non-Litho Named Ink or PMS Numbered Ink. A user can select non-litho 
printing for either the Front or Back Face of the ply. 
The Affixing window enables a user to establish affixing specifications 
such as eyelet, transfer tape, reinforcement patch, and other methods. If 
there is a forms design associated with a quote/WIP, this window can be 
partially populated by that design. Clicking an Eyelet drop-down list 
arrow allows a user to specify the type and diameter size of eyelet. 
Clicking a Transfer Tape drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify the 
type and size of transfer tape. Clicking a Reinforcement Patch drop-down 
list arrow allows a user to specify the type and size of reinforcement 
patch. Clicking an Affixing drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify 
the type of affixing method. Options may include: Avery Standard, Envelope 
Cut, Letterhead Cut, Other Affixing, Overall Label, Remoist Strip, etc. An 
orientation buttons allow a user to specify the affixing for either the 
Front or Back side of the current ply. 
The Coating window allows a user to view, add, edit, and delete Security 
and Coating features to an order. If there is a forms design associated 
with a quote/WIP, this window can be partially populated by that design. 
Clicking a Coating drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify the type 
of coating material to be used on the ply. Clicking an Add button adds 
another instance of coating to the ply. Clicking a Delete button removes a 
specified Coating from the ply. Clicking a View Other button allows a user 
to view the "Other" coating selection for the ply. Clicking a Security 
drop-down list arrow allows a user to specify the required security 
feature. A Description field allows a user to better define the selected 
Security feature. Clicking an Add button adds another instance of security 
to the ply. Clicking a Delete button removes a specified Security feature 
from the field. An Orientation buttons allow a user to specify the coating 
for either the Front or Back side of the current ply. 
The Utilities menu, see FIG. 8, contains commands to change the logon user 
password and view roles. A Change Password command allows a user to change 
the current password being used. A user can view the user roles by 
selecting a View Roles command. The Window menu, see FIG. 8, contains 
commands to arrange the system windows on the screen to meet unique 
display requirements. It also contains a command to display the toolbar. A 
Tile command arranges the windows so that an equal portion of each window 
is on the screen. A Layer command arranges the system windows in 
horizontal strips, one above the other. A Cascade command arranges the 
windows on the screen in an overlapping diagonal arrangement. A Show 
Toolbar command allows a user to display helpful buttons to execute 
commands. The Help menu, see FIG. 8, contains items for quickly getting 
on-line help or information about the order entry system 10. 
The forms design process is used to create a design for a customer form. 
FIG. 8 illustrates two significant aspects of the forms design process, as 
embodied in the order entry system 10 of the present invention. The 
process is typically initiated when the CSR sends samples, mock-ups, 
artwork, etc. to a forms designer and enters the appropriate data in the 
View Form Design Activity window described in detail above with reference 
to the Options menu. The designer creates a graphic form design file 
corresponding to the desired form design using suitable form design 
software, e.g., ProDesigner.RTM. for Windows available from the F3 
Software Corporation, Burlington, Mass. As is described in further detail 
herein with reference to FIG. 2, the graphic form design file is saved in 
an appropriate order entry server 13 and indexed in the forms design 
repository 18, see FIG. 1, so that it is accessible to the CSR. It may be 
preferable for a forms designer at the user interfaces 28, 29 to perform a 
portion of the form design activity, e.g., production of the artwork 
related to the form design. It is contemplated by the present invention 
that all or part of a specific graphic form design file may originate from 
a previously archived graphic form design file stored, for example, in the 
order entry server 13. 
Referring again to FIG. 8, the order entry system 10 enables the CSR to 
associate a graphic form design file with a corresponding set of order 
specifications e.g., a quote or WIP, and then populate the order 
specifications with the information stored in the design file. An 
Associate Form Design window available under the Order Level Features menu 
enables a user to select "Associate" and tie the order specifications with 
the corresponding graphics without changing any data within the order 
specifications. The Associate Form Design window also enables a user to 
select "Populate" to fill in information on the Order and Ply Level 
screens of the order specifications, if none has been previously added, 
and overwrite information existing in the order specifications if it is 
inconsistent with the form design graphics. A Form Design Populate Results 
window is displayed upon population. A Default Values portion of the 
Results window displays fields that were not populated by the Forms 
Design. This serves as a notice that these field values may need to be 
reviewed by the CSR. The second half of the Results window displays 
warning messages. These are items that may have populated and caused 
discrepancies within the form. 
Referring now to FIG. 2, the structure and function of the order entry 
system 10 of the present invention is illustrated in detail. The forms 
order entry system 10 comprises the first computer system 12, the printing 
station computer system 14, and the second computer system 16. The first 
computer system 12 includes user interfaces 21, 22, 23 and is programmed 
to capture form design data representative of a forms order 36 entered at 
one or more of the user interfaces 21, 22, 23. The second computer system 
16 is remote from, and in communication with, the first computer system 12 
and the printing station computer system 14 and is programmed to: (i) 
generate a price corresponding to the form design data as a function of a 
set of pricing rules; (ii) validate the forms order 36 by comparing the 
form design data with a set of validation rules; and, (iii) transmit a 
validated and priced order to the printing station computer system 14. The 
forms order 36 may comprise a modified existing forms order or an original 
forms order. 
The price generated by the second computer system 16 comprises a list price 
corresponding to the form design data. The form design data comprises 
order specifications 32 designated within the first computer system 12 and 
a graphic form design file 34 designated within the first computer system 
12. The second computer system 16 is further programmed to associate and 
populate the order specifications 32 from the graphic form design file 34 
and generate a form design populate report. The form design populate 
report is indicative of non-populated portions of the order specifications 
32 and are indicative of discrepancies between the graphic form design 
file 34 and the order specifications 32. 
FIG. 2 further illustrates that form design files 38 corresponding to the 
forms order 36 entered at the user interfaces 21, 22, 23 are stored in the 
first server 13. The form design repository 18 is remote from, and in 
communication with, the first computer system 12. The second computer 
system 16 is remote from, and in communication with, the first computer 
system 12 and the form design repository 18. The second computer system 16 
is programmed to (i) create an index of form design files 40 corresponding 
to the form design files 38 stored in the first server 13 and (ii) store 
the index of form design files 40 in the form design repository 18. As is 
illustrated in FIG. 2, the first computer system 12 includes a least one 
additional server 13 coupled to a second plurality of user interfaces 21, 
22, 23. Form design files 38 corresponding to a forms order 36 entered at 
one of the second plurality of user interfaces 21, 22, 23 are stored in 
the additional server 13 and the index of form design files 40 created by 
the second computer system 16 corresponds to the form design files 38 
stored in the first server 13 and the second server 13. Accordingly, where 
a plurality of order entry servers 13 are provided in the first computer 
system 12, form design files 38 are stored in the order entry server 13 
corresponding to the user interfaces 21, 22, 23 at which the order was 
entered and the index 40 for accessing the form design files 38 is held in 
a central location. In this manner, data transfer across the network 20 is 
minimized because the form design files 38 are stored proximate the user 
interfaces 21, 22, 23 where they are most likely to be accessed in the 
future. 
Referring now to FIGS. 2, 3 and 5, forms order validation 200 is described 
in detail. The second computer system 16, which is typically remote from 
and in communication with a user interface 21, 22, 23 at which an order is 
entered, includes the corporate server 17 and a validation engine 42 
resident therein. The validation engine 42 operates in accordance with a 
set of validation rules which are integral to order validation 200. In 
order validation 200, the order specifications 32 and the graphic form 
design file 34 are associated and the order specifications 32 are 
populated from the graphic form design file 34, see step 202. Upon 
population, the second computer system generates form design populate 
report, see step 204. If portions of the order specifications 32 have not 
been populated by the graphic form design file 34, the order entry system 
10 enables a user to list or print the non-populated portions and return 
to order entry 100 to complete the non populated portions, see steps 206 
and 208. Similarly, if discrepancies exist between the order 
specifications 32 and the graphic form design file 34, the order entry 
system 10 enables a user to list or print the discrepancies and return to 
order entry 100 to correct the discrepancies, see steps 206 and 208. In 
general, form design data representative of the forms order 36 is captured 
if there are no non-populated portions or discrepancies, see step 210. 
However, it is contemplated by the present invention that the order entry 
system 10 may be programmed such that some discrepancies and some 
non-populated portions will be sufficiently minor in nature to permit the 
capture of form design data. 
The second computer system 16 is programmed to generate manufacturing steps 
based on form design data representative of an entered forms order 36, see 
step 212, and select an appropriate manufacturing plant or printing 
station computer system 14 based on the manufacturing steps and the form 
design data, see step 214. The form design data defines the appearance and 
construction of the ordered form, i.e., its components and appearance. The 
manufacturing steps correspond to, and typically describe, a specific 
manufacturing process for creating the ordered form. Typically, the 
manufacturing process includes initialization of printing machinery and 
the subsequent printing steps necessary to produce a form. 
Following generation of the manufacturing steps, the second computer system 
16 determines whether the ordered form is manufacturable and usable by 
comparing the form design data to a set of validation rules, see steps 
216, 218. If the ordered form is determined to be manufacturable and 
usable, no manufacturability or usability exceptions are generated and a 
validated manufacturing plan is transmitted to the selected printing 
station after order pricing, see steps 226, 300, and 400. 
Referring specifically to FIG. 2, the printing station computer system 14 
includes the plant server 15, user interfaces 24, 25, 26, a digital press 
44, and a printer 46. In accordance with one embodiment of the present 
invention, the manufacturing steps are transmitted to the digital press 44 
in digital format. Alternatively, data indicative of the manufacturing 
steps is reproduced at the printer 46 in a printed format. 
If the ordered form is determined to be non-manufacturable or non-usable, 
an exceptioned manufacturing plan is generated, see step 220. The 
exceptioned manufacturing plan includes one or more manufacturability or 
usability exceptions that must be resolved prior to printing. Accordingly, 
the manufacturability exceptions are routed to one or more exception 
handling locations 48 within the order entry system 10, see step 222. The 
exception handling locations typically correspond to a purchasing 
department, an engineering department, a manufacturing plant, a pricing 
department, a customer accounting department, etc. Typically, the 
exceptions are first routed to the CSR to permit modification of the order 
entry 100 prior to further routing to exception handling specialists at 
the exception handling locations 48 throughout the system 12. The 
exception handlers generate resolutions and the resolutions are routed to 
the CSR to enable the CSR to modify the order entry 100, see step 224. 
The validation rules comprise a set of rules and values for determining 
whether all the information necessary for manufacturing an ordered form is 
present and correct in the form design data. Exceptions are generated and 
routed where the conditions of a rule are violated. These validation rules 
fall into two classes, the general validation rules and the specific 
product validation rules. The rules within each of these classes are 
described in detail below. 
General Validation Rules 
According to one embodiment of the present invention, the follow rules, 
i.e., the general validation rules, are applied to every order regardless 
of the product ordered: Form Length, Form Width, Ply, Primary Writing 
Device, Quantity, Polywrap, Transfer Tape, Bursting, Reinforcement Patch, 
Check Press Perfs, Overrun, Packaging, Press Printing Units, Calculate 
Impressions, Determine Number Wide, Determine Possible Plants, Paper, 
Pantographs, Carbon, Lockup, Barcode, MICR, Home Plant Assignment, 
Security Features, Press Selection, Product Code, Ink, Non-Litho Printing, 
Folios, Ship List Quantity, Proofs, Administrative, Coded Invoice 
Instructions, Release I Exclusions, Invalid Combinations, and Grouping. 
Other general validation rules, e.g., Secondary Equipment, Check Press 
Punches, Blockouts, are applied in special circumstances. 
Form Length. If the order is for a continuous form, all lengths must be the 
same. Similarly, if the order is for a form using stubs, all stub lengths 
must be the same. If they are not all the same, an exception is generated 
in the manner described above. Preferably, fold lengths are also checked 
to ensure that they are above a predetermined minimum fold length, below a 
predetermined maximum fold length, and an even multiple of the form 
length. 
Form Width. The order entry system 10 checks the form width to ensure that 
it is not below a minimum form width or above a maximum form width. An 
exception is generated if the form width is outside the maximum/minimum 
range. 
Ply. The system 12 checks the number of plyies and carbons to ensure that 
they are not below a minimum number of plies/carbons or above a maximum 
number of plies/carbons. An exception is generated if the form width is 
outside the maximum/minimum range. 
Primary Writing Device. The system 12 requires that some selection be made 
for the primary writing device be selected. The available selections are: 
No Device Specified, Primary, and Secondary. Front-first or back-first 
imaging and the device type, manufacturer, model, and throw are also 
identified. If no selection is made, the CSR is prompted to specify 
primary writing device. The system 12 determines the specifications for 
the device selected and uses the type of the selected device, e.g., impact 
or non-impact, to validate the specifications. 
For impact printers, if there is no carbon on the form ordered, the number 
of plies must be equal to or less than the maximum number of plies. If 
there is carbon on the order, the number of plies must be equal to or less 
than the maximum number of plies less the number of carbons. The length of 
the form must be equal to or less than a predetermined maximum form length 
and equal to or greater than the selected writing device's minimum form 
length. The order entry system 10 checks the basis Weight for each paper 
on the ordered form to ensure that it is equal to or less than a 
predetermined maximum value for the selected writing device. Other values 
and specifications checked by the system 12 for compatibility with the 
selected impact printers include: weight of the last copy of the form, 
paper weight, paper caliper, paper width, and printer throw (the throw 
must be evenly divisible into the form length). 
For non-impact printers, the width, length, and basis weight of the form 
are checked, by the order entry system 10, to ensure these values are 
compatible with the selected writing device. Further, the order entry 
system 10 checks the print method (direct thermal, xerographic, thermal 
transfer, ion deposition, etc.) for the selected printer to determine if a 
compatible paper type has been selected. Also, the order entry system 10 
checks the fuse method for the selected printer to determine whether a 
compatible ink has been selected. For example, if the fuse method is heat, 
pressure, or heat and pressure, heat resistant ink must be used. If there 
are horizontal or vertical perforations on the form, the order entry 
system check to ensure the selected printer is compatible for horizontal 
or vertical perforations. The system 12 checks for punches on each ply of 
the Form. If there are punches, predetermined criteria must be met (e.g., 
less than 5 punches, round, 1/4" diameter, at least 1/2" from the trailing 
edge of the form, etc.). As is the case for impact printers, the system 12 
checks the throw to ensure that it is evenly divisible into the Form 
Length. 
Secondary Equipment. Preferably, appropriate rules are processed for the 
specific secondary equipment selected. For example, separate rules may be 
applied if a scanner, a MICR reader, or a burster are selected. 
Quantity. The system compares the ordered quantity to predetermined maximum 
and minimum quantities. 
Polywrap. If there is polywrap, the quantity per package must be entered. 
If the quantity is not entered, or selected from a list, an exception is 
set. If the quantity per pack is not one of a set of predetermined 
standard quantities, an exception is set. If there are to be labels on the 
product, the order entry system 10 displays a request for the necessary 
label information. 
Transfer Tape. The order entry system 10 checks the order for transfer 
tape. If there is transfer tape, the system 12 checks to see if the 
selected tape is available for the ordered product and checks each ply for 
the location of the tape. The acceptable location values are front and 
back. For each ply that has transfer tape, the system 12 adds one to the 
total number of plies on the order and reevaluates to determine if the 
maximum number of plies has been exceeded. If there is transfer tape on 
more than one ply in the set, all tapes must be on the front or on the 
back of the plies. The orientation of the tape must be parallel to the 
form's KS holes. Certain features (Carbon, Carbonless impression area, 
Perforations, Punches, Printing, etc.) must fall within 1/4" of either 
side of the tape. The system 12 checks the size of tape specified on the 
order to ensure that it is compatible with the remainder of the order. 
Bursting. If the order includes carbon, the order entry system 10 compares 
the form width on the order with preset minimum and maximum widths, 
compares the form length on the order with preset minimum and maximum 
lengths, and compares the weight of the papers and carbons on the order 
with preset minimum and maximum weights. Further, the system 12 checks for 
horizontal perforations located less than 1" from a fold perf. 
Reinforcement Patch. The order entry system 10 checks the order to ensure 
that the form quantity is equal to or greater than a minimum number of 
features for the form, that the basis weight of the paper complies with 
predetermined minimum and maximum values, and that the form width and the 
form length comply with the predetermined minimum and maximum values. 
Check Press Perfs. The order entry system 10 ensures that, if diagonal, 
horizontal, vertical, or letteredge perforations are selected, they are 
compatible with the form design and manufacturable. 
Press Punches. The order entry system 10 determines whether punches, if 
selected for the ordered form, are available for the current product. If a 
three-hole punch is selected, the following specifications must be met: 
(i) Form Size: at least one dimension of the form must be 81/2; (ii) 
Number of punches: 3, (iii) Size: 1/4" ROUND; (iv) Location: Parallel to 
the 81/2" dimension, and 3/8" from the edge of the form; (v) Distance from 
the edge of the form (edge that is perpendicular to the 81/2" dimension): 
11/4", 23/4", 51/2". Similarly, if a five-hole punch is selected, the 
following specifications must be met: (i) Form Size: 81/2.times.11; (ii) 
Number of punches: 5; (iii) Size: 1/2" ROUND; (iv) Location: Left side 
only, 3/8" from left edge of form; (v) Location: Distance from top of 
form: 11/4", 41/8", 51/2", 67/8", 93/4". Similar requirements are set for 
a seven-hole punch. 
Packaging. The packaging rules are preferably not applied to orders for 
standard envelopes, roll products, or laser packs. Further, the packaging 
rules are not processed for any of the following features: remoist strip, 
transfer tape, eyelet, reinforcement patch, coating, staple, zipline glue, 
flexifast glue, spot paste, cross web glue, kraft wrap, mailable carton, 
banding, chipboard, inserts, inner cartons, stitching, KS removal, 
bursting, booking, tape binding, comb binding, spiral binding, perfect 
binding, spot coating, and desensitized area. The packaging rules include 
separate components for unique features (A), standard packaging (B), type 
of order (new, reorder, etc.) (C), stanfast envelopes (D), laser pack 
option (E), and customer specified packaging (F). The functionality of 
each of these components is represented as follows, where a form to be 
ordered is referred to as a proposal: 
A. UNIQUE FEATURES 
A.1. The order entry system 10 will check the FEATURE TYPE: KAGING. 
1.1.1. Only one of the FEATURE LIST elements may be selected: 
STANDARD 
LASER K 
SPECIAL 
ROLLS 
OTHER 
1.1.2. If more than one of the above has been selected, set exception for 
the CSR: 
MESSAGE: #G1120 SELECTED KAGING TYPES ARE EXCLUSIVE 
If OTHER is selected: Discontinue validation, Set exception for Plant: 
MESSAGE: #G1130 APPROVE KAGING TYPE. 
A.2. The order entry system 10 will check the FEATURE TYPE: INNER 
KAGING. 
1.2.1. Only one of the FEATURE LIST elements may be selected: 
POLYWRAP 
KRAFT WRAP 
BANDING 
1.2.2. If more than one of the above has been selected, set exception for 
the CSR: 
MESSAGE: #G1220 SELECTED KAGING TYPES ARE EXCLUSIVE 
A.3. The order entry system 10 will check the FEATURE TYPE: BINDERY. 
1.3.1. Only one of the FEATURE LIST elements may be selected: 
FOLDING 
PADDING 
STITCHING 
BURSTING 
BOOKING 
TAPE BINDING 
COMB 
SPIRAL BINDING 
PERFECT BINDING 
1.3.2. If more than one of the above has been selected, set exception for 
the CSR: 
MESSAGE: #G1320 SELECTED KAGING TYPES ARE EXCLUSIVE 
1.4. If any exceptions are generated in Section A. UNIQUE FEATURES, 
discontinue processing the rules for KAGING. 
B. STANDARD KING 
1.50 CALCULATE STANDARD KING 
1.50.1. The order entry system 10 will refer to the structures for PAPER 
and CARBON to SUM the caliper for all the papers and carbons in the form 
set. 
1.50.1.1. If any paper or carbon in the set does not have a CALIPER, set 
exception for Eng: 
MESSAGE #G1502 (WGT, COL, TYPE) NEEDS CALIPER 
1.50.2. If the Proposal has any features that are listed in the structure: 
FEATURES CALIPER, the order entry system 10 will add the caliper for that 
feature to the SUM. 
1.50.3 This rule is to be used only when one of the following FEATURES are 
on the proposal: 
1.50.3.1. AFFIX LABEL 
1.50.3.2. EYELET 
1.50.3.3. TAPE and/or TRANSFER TAPE 
1.50.3.4. EMBOSSING 
1.50.3.5. COMBINATION OF FEATURES 
In the following calculations, the order entry system 10 will treat a fold 
length as a form. 
1.50.3.1. AFFIX LABEL 
1.50.3.1.1. The order entry system 10 will determine if any of the area for 
the label(s) on one form overlays any area of the label(s) on the 
succeeding form when the forms are folded. 
1.50.3.1.2. If no area of the label overlays another label, use 1/2 the 
caliper of the label. 
1.50.3.1.3. If any area of the label overlays another label, use the full 
caliper of the label. 
1.50.3.1.4. If there is more than one label of different calipers on the 
same form, use the largest of the calipers. 
1.50.3..2. EYELET 
1.50.3.2.1. The order entry system 10 will determine if any area of the 
EYELET on one form overlays the area of an EYELET on the succeeding form 
when the forms are folded. 
1.50.3.2.2. If no area of the EYELET overlays another EYELET, use 1/2 the 
caliper of the EYELET. 
1.50.3.2.3. If any area of the EYELET overlays another EYELET, use the full 
caliper of the label. 
1.50.3.3. TAPE and/or TRANSFER TAPE 
1.50.3.3.1. The order entry system 10 will determine if any area of the 
TAPE or TRANSFER TAPE on one form overlays the area of the TAPE or 
TRANSFER TAPE on the succeeding form when the forms are folded. 
1.50.3.3.2. If no area of the TAPE overlays another tape, use 1/2 the 
caliper of the tape. 
1.50.3.3.3. If any area of the TAPE overlays another TAPE, use the full 
caliper of the TAPE. 
1.50.3.4. EMBOSSING 
1.50.3.4.1. If there is EMBOSSING on the order, add 30 to the Paper 
Caliper. 
1.50.3.5. COMBINATION OF FEATURES 
1.50.3.5.1. If there is a combination of more than one different FEATURE on 
the proposal, use the caliper of the FEATURE with the highest caliper 
only, and delete the caliper for the other features. 
The order entry system 10 will then select the proper column for 
determining STANDARD KING. The options are: 
______________________________________ 
COLUMN PRODUCT 
______________________________________ 
CUSTOM CONTINUOUS Custom Continuous 
Limited Custom Continuous 
**** 
SINGLES-NO PERF All products where Ply = 1 
or except: ROLLS 
SINGLES-PERFORATED 
StanFast Envelopes 
**** 
ZIPSET Custom Zipset 
Limited Zipset 
______________________________________ 
1.50.5 The order entry system 10 will then refer to the KING 
CHART--TOTAL SET CALIPER, and the appropriate column as selected above. 
If the exact TOTAL SET CALIPER is not in the list, use the next higher 
TOTAL SET CALIPER. 
1.50.6. If the ORDER SPECS-FLDLENGTH is larger than ORDER SPECS-FRMLENGTH, 
determine the factor. (1, 2, 3, etc.) 
1.50.6.1. Multiply the NUMBER OF FORMS/STACK by the factor. 
1.50.7. If the ORDER SPECS-FLDLENGTH is smaller than ORDER SPECS-FRMLENGTH, 
determine the factor. (1, 2, 3, etc). 
1.50.7.1. Divide the NUMBER OF FORMS/STACK by the factor. 
1.50.7.2. Update ORDER SPECS-KING-STD QTY. 
1.50.8.. If the FACTOR in 1.50.7. is not 1: 
1.50.8.1. If the FACTOR is 2, round the STD QTY to the nearest multiple of 
4. 
1.50.8.2. If the FACTOR is 3, round the STD QTY to the nearest multiple of 
6. 
1.50.8 Update ORDER SPECS: STANDARD=(QTY) PER K 
1.50.9. If the TOTAL Order Quantity is less than the quantity per pack, 
change the STANDARD QUANTITY PER K to the TOTAL ORDER QUANTITY 
1.51 CALCULATE K HEIGHT 
1.51.1. The pack height obtained in rule 1.50 is for a 12" high pack. 
1.51.1.1. Select FRMWIDTH and FRMLENGTH from the Data File: K HEIGHT. 
1.51.1.2. If the FRMWIDTH or FRMLENGTH is not in file, use the next higher 
FRMWIDTH and/or FRMLENGTH. 
1.51.1.3 If the FRMWIDTH or FRMLENGTH is larger than the largest size on 
the chart, set exception for the Plant:: 
MESSAGE #G1511 LARGE FORM--DETERMINE K HEIGHT 
MESSAGE #G81014 THIS ORDER MUST BE PRICED MANUALLY 
1.51.1.4 Update ORDER SPECS-KING-STD HEIGHT=Height of carton 
1.51.1.5. If ORDER SPECS-KING-STD HEIGHT is not 12", calculate the 
number of sets in the STD HEIGHT. 
1.51.2. If the order has any packaging type that is less than a full 
carton, the order entry system 10 will determine the height of the package 
and the number of packages per carton. 
1.51.2.1 See Data File: KAGING--TYPE for the types of packages that may 
be less than a full carton. 
a. If any of these types are specified, the quantity per package must also 
be specified. The order entry system 10 will then calculate the height of 
the package--based on the quantity per 12" pack; and the number of 
packages that will fit into 12". 
1.51.2.3. If the height of one package is greater than KAGING-MAXK, 
set a flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #G1512 K HEIGHT EXCEEDS SPECS 
1.51.2.4. The number of packages per 12" stack must be rounded down to the 
next whole number of packs. 
1.51.2.5. Update ORDER SPECS: 
Number of sets/pack 
Number of packs/carton 
Number of sets/carton 
1.51.3 The order entry system 10 will then determine if more than one stack 
of forms or packages may be put into a carton. 
1.51.3.5. The Datafile (KING.XLS-HEIGHT) shows the number of stacks for 
each carton size. If there is more than 1, multiply the number of 
sets/carton by the number of stacks. 
1.51.3.5. If there is more than 1 stack, multiply the number of 
packs/carton by the number of stacks. 
C. TYPE OF ORDER (NEW, REORDER, ETC) 
1.2. The order entry system 10 will check to see if the Proposal is for a 
New order, Reorder, or Reference Order. 
1.2.1. Skip to the appropriate rule, depending on the type of previous 
order: 
REORDER Skip to rule: 1.3. 
REFERENCE Skip to rule: 1.3. 
NEW ORDER Skip to rule: 1.4. 
REORDER 
1.3.1. The order entry system 10 will compare the Proposal with the 
specifications on the previous order. 
Product 
Type of product 
Form Width 
Form length 
Fold length 
Ply 
Basis weight of any paper 
Number of carbons 
Method of fastening 
Location of perforations (horizontal and vertical) 
Affix Label 
Material 
Location 
Transfer Tape 
Reinforcement Patch 
1.3.2. If any of the elements listed above is different from the previous 
order, skip to RULE: 1.4.--NEW ORDER. 
1.3.2.1. If the Sales Rep has not specified a quantity per pack or carton, 
update ORDER SPECS with the quantity/pack or carton from the previous 
order. 
1.3.2.2. If the quantity per pack or carton is within the K QUANTITY 
VARIANCE of the calculated quantity, update ORDER SPECS: STANDARD KING. 
1.3.2.3. If the quantity per pack or carton is not within the K QUANTITY 
VARIANCE, update ORDER SPECS: SPECIAL KING. 
1.4. NEW ORDER 
1.4.1. If a TYPE has been entered, check the Data File: KAGING to see if 
the type is available for the Product. If not, set flag and return to 
Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G1410 KAGING NOT AVAILABLE FOR THIS PROD. 
1.4.2. If no KAGING TYPE has been selected, default to STANDARD. 
1.4.3. MORE THAN ONE TYPE OF KING If more than one type of packing is 
specified, the quantity per carton/pack must be specified for the smallest 
unit of packaging. All other units must be a multiple of this unit. If 
not, set flag and return Proposal to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G1340 CTN QTY NOTA MULTIPLE OF K QTY 
D. STANFAST ENVELOPES 
All packaging must be in multiples of 500. If not, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #G23500 APPROVE QTY PER KAGE 
E. LASER K OPTION 
1.6 The order entry system 10 will calculate LASERPAK 
1.6.1 If any of the following data has been entered, exception to CSR: 
KAGING (other than LASER K, including: Quantity per Pack) 
INNER KAGING: (any) 
TRANSFER TAPE 
EYELET 
REINFORCEMENT PATCH 
REMOIST STRIP 
BINDERY (ANY) 
MESSAGE: #G1610 (*******) NOT ALLOWED FOR LASERK 
1.6.2. The LASERPAK Packaging will be used for the following: 
______________________________________ 
BASIS WT. QUANTITY 
______________________________________ 
20 2500 
24 2000 
______________________________________ 
If the Basis Weight of the Paper is any other than 20# or 24#, exception 
to the Plant: 
MESSAGE: #G1111 FURNISH QUANTITY FOR LASER K 
1.6.3. Update MFG PLAN: LASERK 
Update MFG PLAN: QTY per CARTON 
Update MFG PLAN: CARTON HEIGHT=10" 
F. CUSTOMER SPECIFIED 
1.7. This rule is to be processed only if the CSR has specified the number 
of sets per Carton, or has specified the Carton Height. 
1.7.1. Prior to processing this rule calculate STANDARD KING, rule 
#1.50. 
1.7.1. If the quantity/carton entered by the CSR=STANDARD QTY/CTN, skip the 
balance of this rule. 
1.7.2. If the quantity/carton entered by the CSR is greater than STANDARD 
QTY/CTN, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE #G23730 APPROVE QTY PER CARTON 
1.7.4 If the quantity/carton entered by the CSR is less than STANDARD 
QTY/CTN, calculate the height if the carton. Note: STANDARD QTY/CTN is for 
a 12" carton. 
1.7.4.1. Update the MFG PLAN: Carton Height=XX 
1.7.5. If the CSR has entered the Carton Height: 
1.7.5.1. If the entered Carton Height is greater than the height of a 
Standard Carton, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE #G23751 APPROVE CARTON HEIGHT 
1.7.5.2. If the entered Carton Height is less than the height of a Standard 
Carton, update the Mfg. Plan: Carton Height=XX 
1.7.5.3. Calculate the number of sets/carton for the entered carton height. 
NOTE: STANDARD QTY/CTN is for a 12" carton. 
1. Update the Mfg. Plan: QTY/CTN=XX 
Overrun. The functionality of the Overrun rule may be described as follows: 
1.1. The order entry system 10 will check the proposal to see if NO OVERRUN 
or NO UNDERRUN is specified. If either of these items is specified on the 
proposal, update ORDER SPECS-QUANTITY=Proposal Quantity 
1.1.1. Skip the balance of Rule 
1.2. If the proposal quantity is up to and including 100000: 
1.2.1. Add 10% to the proposal quantity. 
1.3. If the proposal quantity is greater than 100000 but less than 1000000: 
1.3.1. Add 5% to the proposal quantity 
1.4. If the proposal quantity is greater than 1,000,000: 
1.4.1. Add 2% to the proposal quantity 
1.5. Round the new quantity to the nearest multiple of SETS/CARTON. 
1.5.1. If the rounding results in a quantity that is less than the Proposal 
Quantity, do not round 
1.5.2. If the amount of change due to rounding is greater than 30% of the 
Proposal Quantity, do not round. 
1.5.3. If the proposal quantity, plus the overrun is less than a full 
carton, do not round. 
1.6. Update ORDER SPECS-QUANTITY to the new quantity. 
Press Printing Units. The functionality of the Press Printing Units rule 
may be illustrated as follows: 
25. PRESS PRINTING UNITS 
25.1. For each ply: 
25.1.1. Add the number of inks on the front 
25.1.2. Add the number of inks on the back 
25.1.3. If there is a picture-frame border, and the vertical leg of the 
border is more than 1/2 the form length, or if the border is solid, and 
more than 1/8" thick, set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE G25002 PICTURE FRAME BORDER 
25.1.5. If there is a desensitized spot, and the desensitized area is 
greater than 1/2 the area of the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE: G25001 LARGE DESENSITIZED AREA 
25.2. Select the ply with the greatest total of front and back inks, 
excluding Non-litho printing. 
ORDER SPECS-FRONTUNITS=Total number of front units 
ORDER SPECS-BACKUNITS=Total number of back units 
25.3. For each ply, if INK=PRISMATIC then ORDER SPECS-PRESS 
FEATURES-PRISM=Number of COLORS in the PRISMATIC PRINTING. 
Calculate Impressions. The functionality of the Calculate Impressions rule 
may be illustrated as follows: 
26. CALCULATE IMPRESSIONS 
26.1. The order entry system 10 will calculate number of 1-WIDE 
IMPRESSIONS. This will be used for the feed to pricing and for determining 
the Number Wide. 
26.1.1. If the NUMBER AROUND had been entered by the Plant, go directly to: 
26.3. 
26.2. Select FORM LENGTH from ORDER SPECS. 
26.2.1. Select IMPRESSION FILE--FRM LENGTH and PRS LENGTH. 
26.2.2. If the FRM LENGTH and the PRS LENGTH are not found, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #G26001 ENTER NUMBER AROUND CYLINDER 
26.3. The order entry system 10 will calculate the Number of 1-wide 
impressions: Divide the Proposal Quantity by the Number around 
26.3.1. Round up to the next whole number 
26.4. Update Order Specs: # AROUND 
26.5. Update Order Specs: 1-WIDE IMPS=(quotient from 26.3) 
Determine Number Wide. The functionality of the Determine Number Wide rule 
may be illustrated as follows: 
27. Determine Number Wide: 
Assigned Variables: 
ORG=ORIGINAL NUMBER WIDE 
CUR=CURRENT NUMBER WIDE (Cannot be &lt;1) 
FILE=STRUCTURE: NO WIDE: STANSET, SINGLES 
27.1. Whenever CUR=1, then NUMBER WIDE=1. Skip remaining edits. 
27.2. If PROPOSAL: LENGTH=STRUCTURE: IMPRESSION FILE-FLD LENGTH, 
ORG=STRUCTURE: IMPRESSION FILE-MAXWIDE 
27.3. IF ORG=0 THEN ORD=FILE-WIDE 
27.4. CUR=ORG 
27.5. If PROPOSAL-PRESS NOS-REG=1 then subtract FILE-IMPS-REG from CUR 
27.6. IF PROPOSAL-PRESS NOS-REG=2 then subtract FILE-IMPS-DOUBLE from ORG. 
If result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result 
27.7. IF PROPOSAL-PRESS NOS-MICR=1 then subtract FILE-IMPS-MICR from ORG. 
If result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.8. If PROPOSAL-PRESS PUNCHES&lt;=3 then subtract FILE-IMPS-PCH #1 from ORG. 
If result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.9. If PROPOSAL-PRESS PUNCHES&gt;3 and &lt;5 then subtract FILE-IMPS-PCH #2 
from ORG. If result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.10. If PROPOSAL-PRESS PUNCHES&gt;5 then subtract FILE-IMPS-PCH #3 from ORG. 
If result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.11. If PROPOSAL-NOS-MICR&gt;0 subtract FILE-IMPS-MICR from ORG. If 
result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.12. If PROPOSAL-PUNCH=CORNER CUT then subtract FILE-CORCUT from ORG. If 
result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result 
27.13. If PROPOSAL-HORIZ PERFS&gt;1 then subtract FILE-HORIZ from ORG. If 
result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.13. If PROPOSAL-PERFS-HIT SKIP&gt;1 then subtract FILE-HIT-SKIP form ORG. 
If result&lt;CUR then CUR=result. 
27.14. If PROPOSAL-PERFS=LITHO then subtract FILE-LITHO from ORG. If 
result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.15. If PROPOSAL-PERFS=DIAGONAL then subtract FILE-DIAG from ORG. If 
result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.16. If 1-WIDE IMPRESSIONS&lt;FILE-IMPS then subtract FILE-QTY from ORG. If 
Result&lt;CUR then CUR=Result. 
27.17. If not found, set flag for Plant: MESSAGE G27041 ASSIGN NUMBER WIDE 
27.18. ORDER SPECS-PRESS-WIDE=CUR 
Determine Possible Plants. The functionality of the Determine Possible 
Plants rule may be illustrated as follows: 
28. DETERMINE POSSIBLE PLANTS 
28.1. The order entry system 10 will compare the specifications in the 
ORDER SPECS FILE with the specifications in the Data File: PLANT SPECS for 
each plant. 
28.1.1. If any false condition (N, or value in ORDER SPECS exceeds value in 
PLANT SPECS) is encountered, eliminate that plant from the list of 
possible plants. 
28.2. The order entry system 10 will maintain a list of the possible plants 
for the proposal. 
Paper. The functionality of the Paper rule may be illustrated as follows: 
For each ply, compare the PROPOSAL data with the values in the PAPER FILE. 
1.1. The order entry system 10 will check the BASIS WGT., COLOR and TYPE 
against the PAPER FILE. 
1.1.1. If the paper is found, go to the next edit; 
1.1.3. If any paper is not found, set a flag: PURCHASING/ENGINEERING 
MESSAGE #G34001 NEW PAPER. 
1.2. If the paper is found, but the flag: CBNTST is on, set a flag: 
ENGINEERING 
MESSAGE #G34002 CARBON TEST REQUIRED. 
1.3. If the paper is found, but the flag: TEMP is on, set a flag: 
PURCHASING/ENGINEERING 
MESSAGE #G34001 NEW PAPER. 
Blockouts. The functionality of the Blockouts rule may be illustrated as 
follows: 
35. BLOCKOUTS 
35.1. Data Entry will display a list of the Blockouts that are available. 
Blockouts may be selected only from the list. 
35.2. If the area of the blockout exceeds 50% of the total area of the 
form, update ORDER SPECS-PRESS-FRONTUNITS or ORDER 
SPECS-PRESS-BACKUNITS=+1. 
Pantographs. The functionality of the Pantographs rule may be illustrated 
as follows: 
36. PANTOGRAPHS 
36.1. Pantographs may be selected only from the Data File: Pantographs. 
36.2. If a pantograph is selected, the order entry system 10 will request 
the INK NUMBER, the % of screen, and the angle (if not standard). 
36.3 If any ink is selected that is not VOID-1, set flag for review by 
Engineering 
MESSAGE #VL011 VOID PANTO INK 
Carbon. The functionality of the Carbon rule may be illustrated as follows: 
41. CARBON 
If there is no carbon on this PROPOSAL, skip this edit. 
For each carbon, compare the PROPOSAL data with the values in the CARBON 
FILE. 
41.1. The order entry system 10 will check the CARBON FORMULAS against the 
CARBON FILE. 
41.1.1. If the carbon is found, go to the next edit; 
41.1.2. If any carbon is not found, set a flag: 
PURCHASING/ENGINEERING--NEW CARBON. 
MESSAGE #G41003 NEW CARBON 
41.2. The order entry system 10 will check the number of carbon plies on 
the order. 
41.2.1. If the number of plies is greater than PRODUCT-MAX CBN, set 
exception flag: 
A. If the PRODUCT=LIMITED, exception to CSR: 
MESSAGE #G41210 TOO MANY CARBONS FOR (product type) 
B. If the PRODUCT=CUSTOM, exception to plant: 
MESSAGE #G41211 NUMBER OF CARBONS EXCEEDS SPEC 
41.41. If the carbon is found, but the flag: CBNTST is on, set a flag: 
ENGINEERING-CARBON TEST REQUIRED. 
MESSAGE #G41002 CARBON TEST REQUIRED 
41.3. If CARBON is last in the set, set flag 
MESSAGE #G41004 CARBON ON BOTTOM 
41.4. If the carbon is found, but the flag: TEMP is on, set a flag: 
PURCHASING/ENGINEERING--NEW CARBON. 
MESSAGE #G41003 NEW CARBON 
41.5. FEATURES 
41.5.1. If the carbon is narrow, there must be a location. The valid 
locations are: 
RIGHT 
LEFT 
else exception to CSR: 
MESSAGE #G41510 NARROW LOCATION REQUIRED 
41.5.2. One carbon may not have FEATHEREDGE and NARROW; else exception to 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #G41520 BOTH FEATHEREDGE AND NARROW NOT ALLOWED 
Lockup. The functionality of the Lockup rule may be illustrated as follows: 
47. LOCKUP 
47.1. The order entry system 10 will check to determine if there is 
sufficient lockup on the forms. 
47.1.1. Refer to Data File: PRODUCTS to obtain the minimum lockup required. 
47.2. For each color of printing there must be a clear area (NO PRINTING) 
across the form width, equal to or greater than PRODUCTS-LOCKUP. 
47.2.2. This area may be at the top, bottom, or within the form. 
47.2.3. If the clear area is at the top and bottom of the form, the length 
of the clear area may be split between the top and the bottom. 
47.2.4. If there is sufficient LOCKUP, skip the balance of rule #47. 
47.3. If there is not sufficient area for LOCKUP on any plate on the 
proposal, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #G47144 INSUFFICIENT LOCKUP 
Barcode. The functionality of the Barcode rule may be illustrated as 
follows: 
48. BARCODE 
48.1. If the order is an Exact Reorder, or a Reorder with Change--and there 
are not copy changes, skip this rule. 
48.2. NEW ORDERS, REORDER WITH (COPY) CHANGE: 
If there is BARCODE on the PROPOSAL, display the BARCODE SPEC SHEET. 
48.3. Set a flag for ENGINEERING REVIEW. 
MESSAGE #G48009 
MICR. A form may have MICR repetitive and/or MICR consecutive numbers. In 
either event, any proposal that specifies MICR must be processed through 
this validation. The functionality of the MICR rule may be illustrated as 
follows: 
49. MICR 
49.1. ORDER TYPE 
49.1.2. The order entry system 10 will check the REORDER TYPE, and execute 
the validation rules depending on the TYPE: 
49.1.2.1. EXACT REORDER: Rule #49.3. PAPER 
49.1.2.2. REORDER W/CHANGE: All rules 
49.1.2.3. NEW ORDER: All rules 
49.1.2.4. REFERENCE: All rules 
49.1.3. The following rules apply to MICR Printing on any part that is 
machine read: 
49.1.4. Other parts in the set may have MICR Numbers, but those plies do 
not have to conform to the rules below. 
49.2. FORM SIZE: 
49.2.1. Minimum form length: 23/4" 
If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G49848 FORM SIZE--MICR 
49.3. PAPER 
49.3. Ply #1. 
49.3.1. Any paper with MICR must be approved for MICR. See Data File: 
PAPER-MICR 
49.3.2. Minimum Basis Wgt: 20 # 
49.3.3. If any paper is not OK for MICR, set flag for review by ENGR. 
MESSAGE #G49039 APPROVE PAPER FOR MICR 
49.4. INK 
49.4.1. Ink for MICR printing must be approved for MICR. See Data File: 
INK-MICR 
49.4.2. If any INK is not OK for MICR, set flag for review by ENGR 
MESSAGE #G49040 APPROVE INK FOR MICR 
49.5. CLEAR BAND 
49.5.1. An area, 5/8" deep, and extending 1/4" to the left edge of the form 
must be free of all other MICR ink. 
49.5.1.1. Printing in other inks--not MICR--may appear in this clear band. 
If any other ink is in this area, the system will check the Data File: 
INK-MICR to assure that the ink is not approved for MICR. 
49.5.2. If not true, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G49849 MICR CLEAR BAND NOT CLEAR 
49.6. MICR AREA 
49.6.1. All MICR printing must be located within an area 1/2" deep, and 
parallel to the bottom edge of the form. 
49.6.1.1. The bottom edge of the form may be defined as: 
The edge of the form 
A full horizontal perf immediately below the MICR Band area (for checks 
with a bottom stub) 
49.6.2. The bottom edge of the MICR characters must be 3/16" from and 
parallel to the bottom of the form. 
49.6.3. If the above is not true, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G49850 MICR PRINTING OUTSIDE MICR AREA 
49.7. CONSTRUCTION 
49.7.0. If the Product is SHEETED SINGLES, skip this rule. 
49.7.1. The form must have a full vertical perf (regular or letter edge), 
or a slit mark to the right of the MICR area. 
49.7.2. If there is no Vertical Perf or SLIT specified for the right side, 
set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G49851 KS REMOVAL REQUIRED ON RIGHT 
Home Plant Assignment. The functionality of the Home Plant Assignment rule 
may be illustrated as follows (references to specific plant codes are 
included merely for illustrative purposes): 
50. HOME PLANT ASSIGNMENT 
50.1. The order entry system 10 will compare the Customer Data on the order 
with the Data file: ORDER PLANT ASSIGNMENT. 
1. If all of the following data on the Order match the data in the ORDER 
PLANT ASSIGNMENT file, the HOME PLANT=the PLANT in the ORDER PLANT 
ASSIGNMENT file: 
Parent Number for the SOLD-TO 
SOLD-TO number 
SHIP-TO number 
FORM NAME 
FORM WIDTH 
FORM LENGTH 
50.1.2. Skip balance of rule 50. 
50.2. The order entry system 10 will check to see if the Home Plant had 
been assigned by MFG, ENGR or PURCH. 
50.2.1. If the Home Plant had been assigned by any Corporate Involvement 
function (MFG, ENGR, PURCH), skip the balance of Rule #50. 
50.3. The order entry system 10 will select the Home Plant from the Data 
File: PLANT-DISTRICT 
50.3.1. If a HOME PLANT cannot be selected set flag for review by MFG. 
MESSAGE #P50174 PLANT ASSIGNMENT 
50.3.2. Skip the balance of Rule #50. 
There may be exceptions to the HOME PLANT that are peculiar to certain 
products. If so, these exceptions will be noted below. These rules should 
be invoked only if the HOME PLANT has been determined by Rule #50.3. If 
the HOME PLANT has been determined by any other rule, skip Rule #50.4 
50.4. REVISIONS to HOME PLANT ASSIGNMENT by PRODUCT: NOTE: REGION is the 
1.sup.st digit of the SALES REP MAIL CODE 
50.4.1. Carbonless Sets 
50.4.2. Continuous Singles Custom 
50.4.2.1. If the paper=Thermobond: 
50.4.2.1.1. If the Form Length=41/4", Home Plant=DPC 
50.4.2.1.2. If the Form Length=51/2", and 
If the Region=R, T, V, X: Home Plant=DPC 
If the Region=Y, Z: Home Plant=FAY 
50.4.2.2. If the APPLICATION=KV: 
50.4.2.2.1. If the Region=R, T, V: Home Plant=SAL 
50.4.2.2.2. If the Region=X, Y, Z: Home Plant=KIR 
50.4.2.3. If the APPLICATION=OID: Home Plant=DPC 
50.4.2.4. If the APPLICATION=Tally Rolls: Home Plant=KIR 
50.4.3. Continuous Singles Limited 
50.4.4. Labels 
______________________________________ 
50.4.5. Mailer: Continuous Flat Glue 
50.4.5.1. 
FORM LENGTH REGION DISTRICT 
Home Plant 
______________________________________ 
4 ALL FAY 
5 ALL FAY 
5 2/3 ALL SAL 
6 ALL FAY 
7 1/3 ALL FAY 
8 ALL FAY 
10 ALL FAY 
14 ALL PTV 
17 ALL FAY 
______________________________________ 
50.4.6. Mailer: Zipmailer 
50.4.6.1. 
FORM LENGTH REGION Home Plant 
______________________________________ 
4 2/3 ALL MID 
6 ALL FAY 
All others except: 5 1/2 & 11 
SPG 
______________________________________ 
50.4.7. Mailer: Zipset Flat Glue 
50.4.8. Rolls 
50.4.9. Sheeted Singles Custom 
50.4.9.1. If the Form Length=11", and there are MICR Consecutive Numbers, 
Home Plant=YRK 
50.4.9.2. If the APPLICATION=Teller Receipt: Home Plant=YRK 
50.4.10 Sheeted Singles Limited 
50.4.11. Standard Envelopes 
50.4.12. Stanfast Sheets 
50.4.13. Stanset Custom 
50.4.13.1. If the APPLICATION=KV: Home Plant=KIR 
50.4.14. Stanset Limited with MICR 
50.4.15. Stanset Limited without MICR 
50.4.16. Zipset Custom 
50.4.16.1. If the APPLICATION=Teller Receipt: Home Plant=YRK 
50.4.16.2 If the APPLICATION=Guest Checks 
______________________________________ 
REGION Home Plant 
______________________________________ 
X,Y,Z KIR 
R,T,V RMO 
______________________________________ 
50.4.17. Zipset Limited 
50.5 GROUPED ORDERS 
50.5.1. NOTE: This rule should be invoked only if the HOME PLANT has been 
determined by Rule #50.3. and GROUP is NOT equal to NONE. If the HOME 
PLANT has been determined by any other rule, skip Rule #50.5 
50.5.2. If the HOME PLANT=PTV, SHV or MUR, make no changes and skip the 
balance of Rule 50.5 
50.5.3. If the PRODUCT=ZIPSET, change HOME PLANT to YRK 
50.5.4. This rule should be invoked only of the MARKET=FN: 
50.5.4..1 If the PRODUCT=ZIPSET, change the HOME PLANT to RMO 
50.5.4.1. If the PRODUCT=STANSET, change the HOME PLANT to FAY 
50.5.5. This rule should be invoked for all other valid groups: 
50.5.5.1. If the PRODUCT=ZIPSET, change the HOME PLANT to YRK 
50.5.5.2. If the PRODUCT=STANSET, and the HOME PLANT=SPG or KIR, change the 
HOME PLANT to FAY. 
50.5.5.3. If the PRODUCE=STANSET, and the HOME PLANT=SAL, change the HOME 
PLANT to MID. 
50.5.5.4. If the PRODUCT=CONTINUOUS SINGLES, change the HOME PLANT to DAY. 
Security Features. The functionality of the Security Features rule may be 
illustrated as follows: 
51. SECURITY FEATURES 
51.0. Data Entry will present a list of the Security Features that are 
available for the selected Product. Depending on the selection(s), the 
following Validation rules will apply: 
______________________________________ 
CHEMICAL VOID 51.01. 
VOID PANTOGRAPH 51.02. 
WARNING BAND 51.03. 
COPYBAN + 51.04. 
SIMULATED WATERMARK 51.05. 
HIGH RESOLUTION BORDER 
51.06. 
MICROPRINTING 51.08. 
SECURITY SHIELD 51.09. 
DUAL IMAGE NUMBERS 51.10. 
ARTIFICIAL WATERMARK 51.11. 
PRISMATIC PRINTING 51.12. 
EMBOSSING 51.13 
______________________________________ 
51.01. CHEMICAL VOID 
51.1.1. Data Entry will request the Ply Number. 
51.1.2. When papers are selected for the designated ply, Data Entry will 
display only those papers that are marked Y for: SAFBASE 
51.1.2.1. If a paper has already been selected for the PLY with CHEMICAL 
VOID, the paper must be marked Y for SAFBASE. If not, set flag for review 
by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #VL PAPER NOT APPROVED FOR CHEMICAL VOID (SALES--NORMAL) 
51.02. VOID PANTOGRAPH 
51.02.1. Data Entry will request the Ply Number. 
51.02.2. When papers are selected for the designated ply, Data Entry will 
display only those papers that are included in PAPER GROUP: B3 (Safety 
Papers) 
51.02.2.1. If a paper has already been selected for the PLY with VOID 
PANTOGRAPH, the paper must be included in PAPER GROUP: B3 (Safety Papers). 
If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #VL51201 PAPER NOT APPROVED FOR PANTO 
51.02.3 If the INK-VOID flag is not on set a flag for ENGINEERING REVIEW. 
MESSAGE #VL011 
51.02.4. If the PROPOSAL is a reorder: 
51.02.4.1. There must be a reference number 
51.02.4.2. If not, notify the Sales Rep that a reference number is required 
before the PROPOSAL can become an order; 
MESSAGE #VL809 
51.02.4.3. Add to PLANT SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: "PLY #(X), CUSTOM VOID PANTO 
REFERENCE NO: (XXXXXXX)". 
51.02.5. If the PROPOSAL is a new order: 
51.02.5.1. Send a message to the Sales Rep indicating that he must send 
copy for the Custom Void Panto to the producing plant as soon as it is 
known. The order cannot be scheduled until this copy is received. 
Message #VL810 
51.03. WARNING BAND 
This rule has been deleted per Validation Team. 
There are no Paper Restrictions for WARNING BAND. 
51.04. COPYBAN+ 
51.4.1. Data entry will display a list of the Panto Patterns that are 
available for this feature. 
51.4.2. Data Entry will request the Ply Number. 
51.4.3. INK: 
51.4.3.1. Data Entry will display the inks that have: COPYBAN=Y for 
selection. 
51.4.3.2. If the desired ink cannot be selected from this list, Data Entry 
will display all inks that have: COPYBAN=(blank) 
51.4.3.2.1. If one of these inks is selected, set a flag for review by the 
Plant. 
Also note: it requires approx 3-4 weeks to qualify an ink. 
51.05. SIMULATED WATERMARK 
51.5.1. If SIMULATED WATERMARK is selected, the INK must be SIMULATED 
WATERMARK. 
51.5.2. Update ORDER SPECS: NON-LITHO=+1 
51.06. HIGH RESOLUTION BORDER 
51.06.1. Data Entry will require an INK color if HIGH RESOLUTION BORDER is 
selected. 
51.08. MICROPRINTING 
51.08.1. If MICROPRINTING is selected, there must be a callout on F3 for 
MICROPRINTING. 
51.08.2. If there is a callout for MICROPRINTING on F3, MICROPRINTING must 
be selected. If not, set flag for message to the Sales Rep. 
51.09. SECURITY SHIELD 
51.09.1. If Security Shield is selected, the WRITING DEVICE-TYPE must be: 
IMT. If not, set flag for the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #VL SECURITY SHIELD NOT ALLOWED ON THIS PRINTER 
51.09.2. Update ORDER SPECS: SECOPS-SHIELD=1 
51.09.3 If the PROPOSAL has SECURITY SHIELD, add SECURITY SHIELD to the MFG 
PLAN, and set flag for review by the Home Plant. 
MESSAGE #G51093 SECURITY SHIELD 
51.09.4. If the PROPOSAL has SECURITY SHIELD, the ink must have the flag 
set for SECURITY SHIELD. If not, set exception for Engineering: 
MESSAGE #G51094 APPROVE INK FOR SECURITY SHIELD 
51.10. DUAL IMAGE NUMBERS 
51.10.1 If DUAL IMAGE NUMBERS is selected, Data Entry will restrict the 
Paper Selections to papers with Basis Wgt of 26# or less. 
51.10.2. Update ORDER SPECS: PRESS FEATURES-NUMBER COLOR=DUAL IMAGE. 
51.10.2. Update ORDER SPECS: PRESS FEATURES-NUMBERS=+1 
51.11. ARTIFICIAL WATERMARK 
51.11.1. If ARTIFICIAL WATERMARK is selected, the INK must be ARTIFICIAL 
WATERMARK. 
51.11.2. Update ORDER SPECS: PRESS-BACKUNITS=+1 
51.12 PRISMATIC PRINTING 
51.12.1. If there is PRISMATIC PRINTING, the order entry system 10 will 
request the following information: 
51.12.1.1. Number of Colors of Ink 
Up to 3 Ink colors are allowed. If there are more than 3, set exception for 
CSR: 
NOTE: The same ink color may be used twice. In this case, it is counted as 
two inks. 
MESSAGE #G51121 MAX: 3 COLORS ALLOWED FOR PRISMATIC 
51.12.1.2. Sequence of Colors 
O/E will show the sequence of the colors. No edits are required. 
51.12.1.3. Width of each Color Band 
The width of each color band must be entered. This width must be shown in 
whole numbers and fractions (e.g. 13/8"). If there is not a dimension for 
each ink color in the Prismatic Area, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G51123 WIDTH OF PRISMATIC BAND REQUIRED 
51.12.1.4. Total width of Prismatic Printing. 
The total combined widths of all the color bands may not exceed the total 
width of the form. Minus 1". If it does, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G51124 PRISMATIC BAND TOO WIDE 
51.13 EMBOSSING 
If the Proposal has EMBOSSING, set flag for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL208 APPROVE EMBOSSING 
Press Selection. The functionality of the Press Selection rule may be 
illustrated as follows: 
53. DETERMINE POSSIBLE PRESSES: 
53.1. FOR EACH ORDER: 
Compare ORDER SPECS DATA with PLANT SPECS-PRESS FILE (06-17-1). Save the 
PLANT and PRESS Number for any line items that match: 
53.1.1. Select only those presses for the specified product. 
53.1.2. ORDER SPECS-FLDLENGTH=PLANT SPECS-PRESS-FLDLENGTH 
53.1.3. ORDER SPECS-PRESS-DELIVERY=PLANT SPECS-SELECTED PRESS-DELIVERY 
53.2. FOR EACH PLY: 
53.2.1. ORDER SPECS-PRESS FEATURES-UNITS=&lt;PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED PRESS) 
PRESS FEATURES-UNITS 
53.2.2. ORDER SPECS-PRESS FEATURES-NUMBER-1=PLANT SPECS (SELECTED PRESS) 
PRESS SPECS-NUMBER-1 
53.2.2.1. ORDER SPECS-PRESS FEATURES-NUMBER-2=PLANT SPECS (SELECTED PRESS) 
PRESS SPECS-NUMBER-2 
53.2.3. ORDER SPECS-PRESS FEATURES NO-TYPE=PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED PRESS) 
PRESS FEATURES-NO-TYPE 
53.2.4. ORDER SPECS-WIDTH*WIDE=&lt;PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED PRESS) PRESS-WEB 
53.2.5. ORDER SPECS-PRESS-PUNCH-1=PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED PRESS) 
PRESS-PUNCH-1 
53.2.5.1. ORDER SPECS-PRESS-PUNCH-2=PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED PRESS) 
PRESS-PUNCH-2 
53.2.6. ORDER SPECS-PRESS FEATURES-HEATSET=PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED PRESS) 
PRESS FEATURES-DRYER. 
53.2.7. ORDER SPECS-PRESS FEATURES-SPOT=PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED PRESS) PRESS 
FEATURES-SPOT. 
53.2.8. ORDER SPECS-PRESS FEATURES-TITLES=PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED PRESS) 
PRESS FEATURES-RUBBER 
53.2.9. ORDER SPECS-PRESS FEATURES (UNITS/UNITS)=PLANT SPECS-(SELECTED 
PRESS) PRESS FEATURES (UNITS/UNITS) 
The plant can be determined from the first two digits of the press number. 
Refer to: STRUCTURE: PLANTS for a list. 
53.3. For each PLANT selected, check the Secondary Operations for that 
plant: SECONDARY OPS. If the PROPOSAL has any secondary operation that is 
not available at the selected plant(s) delete all presses for that 
plant(s) from the selected list of presses. 
53.4 If any selected plant=SHV go to Rule No. 32 
53.5 If any selected plant=MUR go to Rule No. 33 
If no plants are found, set flag: MSG #45 
Product Code. The functionality of the Product Code rule may be illustrated 
as follows: 
54. PRODUCT CODE 
54.1. A 5-digit Product Code will be assigned by Validation to each 
proposal at the time of PLACE ORDER. 
54.2. Whenever the criteria is met to assign the product code, skip the 
balance of the edits. 
54.2.1. If any digit cannot be assigned, either because the feature is not 
detectable or it is not in the current product release, mark the Product 
Code: (x)0000, and skip the balance of the rules. Add COMMENT to the 
Order: 
MESSAGE #C54210 ASSIGN PRODUCT CODE 
54.2.2. If the CSR has selected a product from the Order Detail window, use 
the associated Product Code, and skip the balance of this rule. 
54.3. Whenever changes are made to a PROPOSAL or to an ORDER, the PRODUCT 
CODE EDIT must be re-done so that the current PROPOSAL/ORDER has the 
correct code. 
54.4 The first digit (0-9) of the PRODUCT CODE will be entered by the CSR. 
If this digit has not been entered, set flag for the CSR: 
MESSAGE: G54400 PRODUCT CODE (1 DIGIT) REQUIRED 
54.5. The 2.sup.nd, 3.sup.rd, 4.sup.th, and 5.sup.th digits of the Product 
Code will be assigned according to the characteristics of the form so as 
to identify the form in a convenient manner. 
Ink. The functionality of the Ink rule may be illustrated as follows: 
55. INK 
For each ply, compare the PROPOSAL-INK with the INK FILE. 
55.1. If any ink is not found, set a flag for ENGINEERING REVIEW. 
55.2. If the PROPOSAL has match ink: 
55.2.1. If the PROPOSAL is a reorder: 
55.2.1.1. There must be a reference order number. 
55.2.1.2. If not, notify the Sales Rep that a reference number, or a new 
INK SAMPLE is required before the PROPOSAL can become an order. 
MESSAGE #G55816 MATCH INK SAMPLE REQUIRED 
55.2.1.3. Add to PLANT SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS: "PLY #(X), MATCH INK REFERENCE 
NO. (XXXXXXX). 
55.2.2. If the PROPOSAL is a new order: 
55.2.2.1. Send a message to the Sales Rep indicating that he must send a 
sample to the producing plant as soon as it is known. The order cannot be 
scheduled until this sample is received. 
MESSAGE #C55816 MATCH INK SAMPLE REQUIRED 
55.3. If the order is not Camera Ready, and there is at least one plate, 
then at least one ink must be entered. If not, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G55512 INK MUST BE ENTERED 
55.5. If any INK requires a DRYER, add DRYER to the ORDER SPECS FILE and 
set a flag for review by the Home Plant. 
MESSAGE #G55120 DRYER REQUIRED 
55.5.5. If any INK is marked HEATSET, add HEATSET to the ORDER SPECS FILE. 
55.7. If the Proposal has COPY BAN+, check the ink file for inks with the 
same COLOR. 
55.7.1. If there is no ink with the same COLOR, and OK for COPY BAN set 
flag, and send a message to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G55803 Ink not available for COPY BAN+ 
55.7.2. If there is an ink with the same COLOR, and OK for COPY BAN+, add a 
message for the Plant to the SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS on the PROPOSAL. 
MESSAGE #G55501 MUST USE COPY BAN+ 
55.7.3. Add: COPY BAN to the ORDER SPECS FILE 
55.11. If the Proposal has a VOID PANTO, check the ink file for inks with 
the same COLOR. 
55.11.1. If there is no ink with the same COLOR, and OK for VOID PANTO, set 
flag, and send a message to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G55821 INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR VOID PANTO 
55.11.2. If there is an ink with the same COLOR, and OK for VOID PANTO, add 
a message for the Plant to the SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS on the PROPOSAL. 
MESSAGE #C55511 MUST USE VOID PANTO INK 
55.11.3. Add: VOID PANTO to the ORDER SPECS FILE 
55.12. SOY INK. If Soy Base Ink is selected for any ink, the order entry 
system 10 will check the particular ink to see if it is available in SOY 
BASE. 
55.12.1. If the Soy Base Ink opt is not on, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G55121 SOY BASE INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR (Ink Name) 
55.12.2. For each ink that is selected as SOY, the order entry system 10 
will add a comment to the Order: 
MESSAGE #C55122 USE SOY BASE INK FOR (Ink Name) 
55.13 HEAT RESISTANT INK (Customer Specified) 
55.13.1. If the Customer (CSR) has entered HR INK, the order entry system 
10 will check to see if the HR Ink opt if on for the ink. 
55.13.2. If the HR ink opt is not on, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G55132 HEAT RESISTANT INK NOT AVAILABLE 
55.13.3. If the HR opt is on, add comment to the order: 
MESSAGE #C55133 MUST USE HEAT RESISTANT INK 
Non-Litho Printing. The functionality of the Non-Litho Printing rule may be 
illustrated as follows: 
56. NON-LITHO PRINTING 
56.0. The order entry system 10 will display the selections for non-litho 
printing that are available for this product, along with the sizes (type 
sizes) for each. If none of them are selected, skip rule #56. 
56.0.1. The F3 file must show the location of the NON-LITHO printing, but 
not the text, except for back printing. 
56.0.2. If any of these non-litho features are selected, Data Entry will 
also ask for the form is "Y-Wired". 
If one or more of these features are on the Proposal, go to the appropriate 
rule(s): 
TITLES Rule: 56.1. 
DISTINGUISHING FIGURES Rule: 56.2. 
STOCK PHRASES Rule: 56.3. 
CONSEC. NUMBER INK Rule: 56.5. 
GENERAL EDITS Rule: 56.8. 
56.1. TITLES 
56.1.1. If there are TITLES on the Proposal, Data Entry will request: 
PLY NUMBER 
FRONT 
BACK 
INK (Selected from List) 
STOCK (Selected from List) 
CUSTOM (Input text) 
56.1.2. The location for the Titles must be shown on F3. 
56.1.2.1. The location of the titles on all plies must be the same. If not, 
the order entry system 10 will check the Data File to see if STAGGERED 
TITLES are allowed on this product. 
56.1.2.1.1. If Staggered Titles are allowed, add message to the Order File: 
MESSAGE #C56001 STAGGERED TITLES 
56.1.2.1.2. If Staggered Titles are not allowed, set flag for review by the 
Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #G56003 STAGGERED TITLES NOT ALLOWED 
56.1.3. If any other printing or rules appear within the title, set flag 
for SALES REP: 
MESSAGE #G56002 TITLES CANNOT BE REGISTERED 
56.1.4. If Custom Titles had been selected, Data Entry will request the 
text for the Titles. The maximum length for the title is: 5" (approx. 60 
Characters) 
56.1.4.1. Up to two lines are allowed for the Title, but if two lines are 
input, they must be adjacent, and the total depth may not exceed 1/4". 
56.1.4.2. If only one line is used for the Title, the type may be 10 point 
type to 18 point type. If the type size is not within this range, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G56142 TYPE SIZE OUT OF RANGE FOR TITLE 
56.1.4.3. If two lines are used for the Title, only 10 point type may be 
used. If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G56143 2-LINE TITLE MUST BE 10 POINT TYPE 
56.1.5. Update ORDER SPECS 
PRESS-RUBBER-UNITS=Add 1. 
PRESS-RUBBER-INK=Selected Title Ink 
PRESS-RUBBER-STAGGER=YES (if selected) 
56.1.6. Only one TITLE (Stock or Custom) is allowed per form, except: 
56.1.6.1. If the form is "Y-Wired", one title is allowed on each side 
(right or left) of the form. 
56.1.6.2. If the form length is greater than 11", two TITLES per form are 
allowed. 
56.2. DISTINGUISHING FIGURES 
If there are DISTINGUISHING FIGURES on the Proposal, Data Entry will 
request: 
PLY NUMBER 
TEXT FRONT: 
TEXT BACK: 
INK (Selected from List) 
56.2.1. The location for the Distinguishing Figure must be shown on F3. 
56.2.2. Data Entry will allow only one Distinguishing Figure per ply 
except: 
56.2.2.1. If the form is "Y-Wired", one Distinguishing Figure is allowed on 
each side (right or left) of the form. 
56.1.6.2. If the form length is greater than 11", two Distinguishing 
Figures per form are allowed. 
56.2.3. Update Order Specs: 
PRESS-RUBBER-UNITS: 
FRONT=Add 1. or 
BACK=Add 1. 
PRESS-RUBBER-INK=Selected Distinguishing Figure Ink 
56.3. STOCK PHRASES 
If there are STOCK PHRASES on the Proposal, Data Entry will request: 
PLY NUMBER 
FRONT: 
BACK: 
INK (Selected from List) 
TEXT (Selected from List) 
SIZE (Selected from List) 
56.3.1. Update ORDER SPECS 
PRESS-RUBBER-UNITS: 
FRONT:=Add 1. or 
BACK:=Add 1. 
PRESS-RUBBER-INK=Selected Title Ink 
56.3.2. Data Entry will allow only one STOCK PHRASE per ply except: 
56.3.2.1. If the form is "Y-wired", one stock phrase is allowed on each 
side (right or left) of the form. 
56.3.6.2. If the form length is greater than 11", two STOCK PHRASES per 
form are allowed. 
56.5. CONSECUTIVE NUMBER INK. If there are PRESS CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS, check 
the FEATURE: INK, Cons nos ink opt to see if the ink is available for 
Consecutive Numbers. If not, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE #G56510 APPROVE CONSEC. NUMBER INK 
56.8. GENERAL EDITS 
56.8.1. If more than one of the above features appears on any one ply of 
the proposal, set flag for review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #G56804 ALL NON-LITHO AREAS MUST BE SAME COLOR 
56.8.2. If there is more than one of the above features on any one ply, the 
areas for the different features may not overlap. If they do, set flag for 
review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #G56805 NON-LITHO AREAS OVERLAP 
56.8.3. If there is more than one of the above features on any one ply, all 
the features must be on the same face. If not, set exception for the 
Plant. 
MESSAGE #G56806 NON-LITHO INKS: FRONT AND BACK 
Folios. After the Product Code has been determined, the order entry system 
10 will check to see if any FOLIOS are to be furnished for this Proposal. 
The functionality of this rule may be illustrated as follows: 
75. FOLIOS 
75.1. If the PRODUCT CODE is not in the FOLIO DISTRIB file, skip this edit. 
75.2. If the PRODUCT CODE is found, and there is an entry in FOLIO 
DISTRIB--CODE, and an entry in the FOLIO DISTRIB--QUANTITY, add to the 
PROPOSAL: (QUANTITY) FOLIOS FOR CODE (X) 
Ship List Quantity. The functionality of this rule may be illustrated as 
follows: 
76. SHIP LIST QUANTITY 
76.1. If there is more than one destination on the PROPOSAL, add the 
quantities for all the destinations. 
76.2. If the total quantity for all destinations does not match the 
PROPOSAL QUANTITY, set a flag to send a message to the SALES Rep: 
"PROPOSAL QUANTITY DOES NOT MATCH DESTINATION QUANTITIES. THIS PROPOSAL 
CANNOT BECOME AN ORDER UNTIL THIS IS CORRECTED." 
76.3. If one or more destinations are to a Warehouse (other than D21) the 
order entry system 10 will add the quantity for each storage destination 
and compare this sum with the "total quantity stored" on the STORAGE 
SCREEN. 
If the quantities do not agree, set a flag and send a message to the Sales 
Rep. 
Proofs. The functionality of this rule may be illustrated as follows: 
77. PROOFS 
77.1 Check each PROPOSAL to see if a Proof is required. If the PROPOSAL 
does not indicate a PROOF, skip this edit. 
77.2 If the PROPOSAL indicates that a proof is required, compare the 
PROPOSAL data with the values in PROOFS. 
77.3. If the TYPE OF PROOF requested is found for the PRODUCT, update the 
MFG Plan: PROOF=Type of Proof. 
77.4 If the TYPE OF PROOF requested is not found for the PRODUCT, set 
exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G77141 (type of proof PROOF NOT AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRODUCT 
Administrative. The functionality of this rule may be illustrated as 
follows: 
78. ADMINISTRATIVE 
INDEX OF RULES THAT RUN EVERY TIME VALIDATION RUNS: 
78.1. Overrun, Underrun, Numbers 
78.3. WAREHOUSE 
78.5. EXPORT 
78.8. VIA INSTRUCTIONS 
78.9. SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 
78.10.1 SHIP-TO 
78.13 SIZE 
78.14 ACCOUNT CODE 
78.15 CREDIT CHECK 
78.16 CONTRACT PRICING 
INDEX OF RULES THAT RUN ONLY WHEN "PLACE ORDER" IS SELECTED: 
78.2. COST CENTER 
78.4. STARTING CONSEC. NUMBER 
78.6. P.O. NUMBER 
78.7. FORM NUMBER 
78.10.2 SOLD-TO NUMBER 
78.10.3 BILL-TO NUMBER 
78.12 SALES REP EMPLOYEE NUMBER 
78.17 DIFFERENTIAL 
78.1. Overrun, Underrun, Numbers 
The rules relating to Overrun, Underrun and Missing/Guaranteed Numbers vary 
by product, and will be treated in the rules for each product. 
78.2. COST CENTER 
78.2.1. If the order is for Storage, the order entry system 10 will check 
the PRISM Profile: If Cost Center Required=Y 
If there is a direct shipment (warehouse=null), there must be an entry in 
COST CENTER. 
If there is a warehouse shipment, and the storage invoice timing=invoice at 
storage, there must be an entry in COST CENTER. 
If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78801 COST CENTER REQUIRED 
78.3. WAREHOUSE 
78.3.1. Check that each Warehouse destination must have a valid warehouse 
code or be D21. If not, send a message to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G78802 WAREHOUSE REQUIRED 
78.3.2. If any destination is a warehouse (other than D21) the order entry 
system 10 will check the STORAGE Screen to make sure that the following 
entries have been made: 
INV STOR or INV REL 
INCL IN PRICE or ADD-ON 
If these fields have not been entered, set a flag and return the proposal 
to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G78818 INV STORAGE CHGS: AT TIME OF STG OR REL? INCL IN PRICE? 
78.3.3. If the proposal is marked for STORAGE, there must be a valid 
warehouse other than D21. If not, return the proposal to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G78802 WAREHOUSE REQUIRED 
78.4. STARTING CONSEC. NUMBER 
78.4.1 If Consecutive Numbers have been selected, and CONTINUE UP has not 
been selected, there must be a starting number for each and every 
destination. If not. Set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78804 STARTING CONSEC NO. 
78.4.2. If "CONTINUE UP" has been selected by Order Entry, check the Order 
for Number of Destinations. If the Number of Destinations is greater than 
one, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78420 MUST ENTER STARTING CONSEC NO. 
NOTE: The check for the number of digits in a consecutive number is in the 
Validation for each product. 
78.5. EXPORT 
78.5.1. If the proposal is for EXPORT, set a flag for review by World 
Trade. EXPORT is defined as any address that has F FOR as a zip code in 
CADD (Ship-to or Sold-to) 
MESSAGE #G78511 ORDER MUST BE MANUALLY PRICED 
MESSAGE #G78990 EXPORT 
78.5.2. The order entry system 10 will check for the Coded Special 
Instruction: "EXPORT ORDER". If it is not selected, set exception for the 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78520 SELECT SPECIAL INSTRUCTION: EXPORT 
78.6. P.O. NUMBER 
78.6.1. If there is no entry in the Purchase Order Field, set a flag and 
return the proposal to the Sales Rep. 
78.6.2. The requirements for a Purchase Order may be modified at a later 
time, based on the current policies. 
MESSAGE #G78806 P.O. NUMBER REQUIRED 
78.7. FORM NUMBER 
78.7.1. If no form number has been entered on the Proposal, set a flag and 
return the Proposal to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #G78808 FORM NUMBER REQUIRED 
78.8. VIA INSTRUCTIONS 
78.8.1. If there is any entry in the VIA instructions, set a flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #G78142 REVIEW VIA INST. 
78.9. SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 
78.9.1 If there is any entry in the SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS, other than the 
coded SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS, set a flag for review by the Plant/Center. 
MESSAGE #G78143 REVIEW SPECIAL INST. 
78.10. SHIP-TO/SOLD-TO 
78.10.1. SHIP-TO Customer Number 
78.10.1.1. If the SHIP-TO number is BLANK, set exception for CSR and skip 
to 78.10.2: 
MESSAGE #G78101 SHIP-TO NUMBER REQUIRED 
78.10.1.2. If the authorized for ship-to flag="N" and 
the authorized for bill-to flag="N" and 
the authorized for sold-to flag="N" 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78105 SHIP-TO NUMBER HAS BEEN DELETED 
78.10.1.3. If the authorized for ship-to flag=N, then set exception for 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78106 SHIP-TO NUMBER HAS BEEN TRANSFERRED 
78.10.2. SOLD-TO Customer Number 
78.10.2.1. If the SOLD-TO number is BLANK, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78102 SOLD-TO NUMBER REQUIRED 
78.10.2.2. If the authorized for ship-to flag="N" and 
the authorized for bill-to flag="N" and 
the authorized for sold-to flag="N" 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78107 SOLD-TO NUMBER HAS BEEN DELETED 
78.10.2.3. If the authorized for ship-to flag=N, then set exception for 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78108 SOLD-TO NUMBER HAS BEEN TRANSFERRED 
78.10.3 BILL-TO NUMBER 
78.10.3.1. If the BILL-TO number is BLANK, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78103 BILL-TO NUMBER REQUIRED 
78.10.3.2. If the authorized for ship-to flag="N" and 
the authorized for bill-to flag="N" and 
the authorized for sold-to flag="N" 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78109 BILL-TO NUMBER HAS BEEN DELETED 
78.10.3.3. If the authorized for BILL-to flag=N, then set exception for 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78110 BILL-TO NUMBER HAS BEEN TRANSFERRED 
78.12 SALES REP EMPLOYEE NUMBER 
78.12.1. The order entry system 10 will check to make sure there is at 
least one valid Sales Employee Number on the Proposal. If not, return the 
proposal to the Sales Rep before it can become an order. 
MESSAGE #G78822 SLS REP EMPLOYEE NUMBER 
78.13 SIZE 
78.13.1. The order entry system 10 will check to make sure that a form size 
(width and length) has been entered. 
NOTE: If there is an F3 file, the size will be obtained from the F3. 
If not, return the proposal to the Sales Rep before it can be routed. 
MESSAGE #G78842 FORM SIZE REQUIRED 
78.14 ACCOUNT CODE 
78.14.1 If the Parent Number for the SHIP-TO number is: 830370, there must 
be an entry (9-digit) in Account Code field. If not, exception to CSR: 
MESSAGE #78144 ACCOUNT CODE REQUIRED 
78.15 CREDIT CHECK 
78.15.1. The order entry system 10 will check the CUSTOMER ADDRESS file to 
see if there is an indicator in the STATUS field. If not, skip this rule. 
78.15.2 If the STATUS=A or B, set exception for Customer Accounting 
MESSAGE #G78153 CREDIT CHECK REQUIRED FOR CUSTOMER 
78.16 CONTRACT PRICING 
78.16.1. If the CSR has entered a Contract Number (O/E) the order entry 
system 10 will check the CADD--Sold-to Number to see if there is a 
contract number in the field, and that the contract number matches the 
contract number that was entered. 
78.16.2. If there is no contract number in file, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78162 NO CONTRACT IN FILE FOR THIS CUSTOMER 
78.16.3. If there is a contract number in file, but it does not match the 
contract number entered by the CSR, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G78163 INVALID CONTRACT NUMBER 
78.17 DIFFERENTIAL 
78.17.1. This rule is to be run only at PLACE ORDER Time, and after Pricing 
has been completed. 
78.17.2. If there is not a LIST PRICE and a SELL PRICE on the order, do not 
process this rule. 
78.17.3. For all products except Stanfast 
78.17.3.1. If the total List Price is equal to or greater than $5,000, and 
the differential is equal to or greater than 25%, set exception for the 
DSM: 
MESSAGE #G78173 OFF LIST APPROVAL REQUIRED 
78.17.3.2. If the total List Price is equal to or greater than $5,000, and 
the differential is equal to or greater than 40%, set exception for the 
GSM: 
MESSAGE #G78174 OFF LIST APPROVAL REQUIRED 
78.17.4. For StanFast Products (SHEETS, ENVELOPES, SETS) 
78.17.4 If the total list price is equal to or greater than $1,000, and the 
differential is equal to or greater than 30%, set exception for the GSM: 
MESSAGE #G78174 OFF LIST APPROVAL REQUIRED 
Coded Invoice Instructions. The functionality of this rule may be 
illustrated as follows: 
80. CODED INVOICE INSTRUCTIONS 
80.1. This rule will be processed only when PLACE ORDER is selected. 
80.2. If any of the following CODED INVOICE INSTRUCTIONS have been 
selected, the order entry system 10 will assure that the corresponding 
UNIT OF MEASURE has also been selected for the order. 
80.3. For each Invoice Instruction, the order may have any one of the 
associated FEATURE LIST elements. 
______________________________________ 
INVOICE INSTRUCTION 
FEATURE LIST 
Per Carton Standard, Laser Pack, Special 
______________________________________ 
80.3.1. If not true, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G80310 CARTON KAGING REQUIRED FOR INVOICING 
Per each (no requirement) 
Per Inner Carton Inner Carton 
80.3.2. If not true, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G80320 INNER CARTON KAGING REQUIRED FOR INVOICING 
Per Package Polywrap, Kraft Wrap, Mailable Carton, 
Banding 
80.3.3. If not true, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G80330 KAGING TYPE REQUIRED FOR INVOICING 
Per Pad/Book Padding, Stitching, Booking, Tape Binding, 
Comb Binding, Spiral Binding, Perfect Binding 
80.3.4. If not true, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G80340 BINDING TYPE REQUIRED FOR INVOICING 
Per Roll Rolls 
80.3.5. If not true, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G80350 ROLL KAGING REQUIRED FOR INVOICING. 
Release Exclusions. The purpose of this rule is to detect any Product, 
Feature, or attribute that is not available in a specific order entry 
system software release. The functionality of this rule may be illustrated 
as follows (any rules not expressly illustrated below have been described 
elsewhere in the specification): 
81. RELEASE I EXCLUSIONS 
81.01.1. If there is an exception for PAPER--Exception Message #G34001, the 
order entry system 10 will route the exception for paper. 
81.01.2. If it determined that the order or quote is out of scope for 
Release I, no other routing will occur. 
81.01.3 PRODUCTS 
81.01.3.1 Only the following PRODUCTS and Manufacturing Processes are 
allowed in Release I: Custom Stanset, Limited Custom Stanset, Custom 
Zipset, Limited Custom Zipset, Continuous Singles, Limited Continuous 
Singles, Sheeted Singles, Limited Sheeted Singles, StanFast Sheets, 
StanFast Sets, StanFast Envelopes 
81.01.3.2. If any other Product or Manufacturing Process is selected, set 
exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G81013 THIS ORDER MUST BE PRICED MANUALLY 
81.01.3.3. Go to Home Plant Assignment, and discontinue any other 
Validation Rules. 
81.01.4 Non-Priceable 
81.01.4.1. If any FEATURE is marked "Non-Priceable", set exception for the 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #G81014 THIS ORDER MUST BE PRICED MANUALLY 
81.01.4.2. Go to Home Plant Assignment, and discontinue any other 
Validation Rules. 
81.05.1. OCR 
If the SWD Type=SCANNER, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #G81051 OCR ORDER NOT ALLOWED IN RELEASE I 
Invalid Combinations. The purpose of this rule is to detect invalid 
combinations of Feature Attributes that may not have been detected in the 
individual rules. The functionality of this rule may be illustrated as 
follows: 
82. INVALID COMBINATIONS 
82.0.1 CODED SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 
82.0.1.1. If UNION BUG is selected, set exception for Mfg Hqtrs to assign 
Plant 
MESSAGE #G82011 ASSIGN TO UNION PLANT 
82.0.1.2. All Coded Special Instructions are not allowed on all Products/ 
Mfg Processes. Refer to the attached table to verify the availability of 
Coded Instructions by Product. An X indicates that the Instruction is not 
allowed. 
82.0.1.3. If any Coded Special Instruction is selected and not allowed, set 
exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #G82013 (Selected Instruction) NOT AVAILABLE FOR: (Product/Mfg 
Process) 
82.21. PRESS PERFS 
82.21.1. DIAGONAL 
Diagonal Perf may not have attributes: Full, Split, Partial, Fold, 
Hit-skip, Horizontal, Vertical 
If any of the above are present, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: G82211 DIAGONAL PERF MAY NOT HAVE (attribute) 
82.41. CARBON 
82.41.1. HOTSPOT 
If the selected carbon is HOTSPOT, it must have KS holes on at least one 
side. If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: G82411 HOTSPOT CARBON MUST HAVE KS HOLES ON AT LEAST ONE SIDE. 
82.41.2. FEATHEREDGE 
82.41.2.1. If FEATHEREDGE has been selected, the carbon may not be narrow. 
If it is, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE: G82412 FEATHEREDGE CARBON MAY NOT BE NARROW 
82.41.2.2. If the Carbon is narrow, FEATHEREDGE may not be selected. If it 
is, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE: G82413 NARROW CARBON MAY NOT HAVE FEATHEREDGE 
Grouping. The functionality of this rule may be illustrated as follows: 
83. GROUPING 
83.1. If the CSR has selected GROUPING, the order entry system 10 will 
check the file: GROUPING to see if this order is for a legitimate group. 
83.1.1. The following fields on the Order must match any one row in the 
GROUPING TABLE: Product Type, Market, Width, Length 
83.1.2. If all of the fields on the order do not match one row in the 
table, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P83120 ORDER NOT ELIGIBLE FOR GROUPING 
83.1.3. Skip the balance of this rule. 
83.2.1. Compare today's date with the IN-BY DATE in the GROUPING TABLE. Use 
the first instance where the current date is equal to or earlier than the 
IN-BY DATE. 
83.2.3. If there is a "date desired" on the order, and it does not 
correspond with the OUT-BY date, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P83230 GROUPING CANNOT MEET THE DESIRED DATE 
83.2.3. If today's date is equal to or earlier that an IN-BY DATE, add 
comment to the order: 
MESSAGE #C83210 GROUPED ORDER - SHIP BY (OUT-BY DATE) 
83.2.4. If today's date is later than the last IN-BY DATE in the GROUP 
TABLE, set exception for MFG HQTRS: 
MESSAGE #P83240 UPDATE GROUP TABLE: IN-BY, OUT-BY 
Specific Product Validation Rules 
After the general validation rules have been checked, the order entry 
system 10 processes validation rules for the specific product to be 
ordered. For the purposes of describing and defining the present 
invention, it should be understood that a form or product comprises any of 
a variety of printed products, including, but not limited to those 
identified herein. For example, the order entry system 10 is programmed to 
process specific validation rules corresponding to the following products: 
Stanset (continuous form product having narrow unprocessed carbons) 
Limited Stanset (continuous form embodying characteristics falling within a 
limited selection of papers, inks, and other features) 
Limited Stanset with MICR ink Zipset (individual form sheets bound together 
by paste or glue at a stub that fastens the form sheets together into a 
complete unit) 
Limited Zipset (characteristics fall within a limited selection of papers, 
inks, and other features) 
Continuous Singles (continuous sheets that are processed on pin-fed 
printers) 
Limited Continuous Singles 
Limited Continuous Singles with MICR ink 
Sheeted Singles (continuous single ply forms that can be made with special 
xerographic bond or plain paper) 
Limited Sheeted Singles 
Stanfast.RTM. (cut sheet products, flat forms, cut forms, or singles with 
no stub, marginal punching, or perforated edges) 
Stanfast.RTM. Sets 
Stanfast.RTM. Envelopes (non-continuous envelopes with logos, names, 
addresses imprinted thereon) 
A detailed description of the specific rules applied to each product 
follows. 
Stanset Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Stanset products: Check 
Collator/Secondary Operations, Punches, Affix Label, KS Removal, Check 
Consecutive Numbers, Check Press Perfs, Check Press Punches, Press 
Delivery, Home Plant Assignment, and Calcite Sets/Ctn. The functionality 
of each of these rules may be illustrated as follows (any rules not 
expressly illustrated below have been described elsewhere in the 
specification): 
7. Check Collator/Secondary Operations. 
7.1. FASTENING NAME--PLY 
7.1.1. The order entry system 10 will compare the Proposal with the file: 
FASTENING to determine the type of fastening is available for the Proposal 
PLY. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07111 FASTENING NOT AVAILABLE 
7.1.2. Update ORDER SPECS: FASTENING NAME 
7.2. FASTENING LOCATION 
7.2.1. The order entry system 10 will compare the Proposal with the file: 
FASTENING-NAME to determine if the location of the Fastening is available. 
7.2.2. If the location is available, update ORDER SPECS: FASTENING LOCATION 
7.2.2.1. If the location is not available for the FASTENING-NAME, set flag 
for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07222 GLUE LOCATION EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.3. CARBON 
7.3.1. If there is no carbon on the Proposal, skip Rule 7.3. 
7.3.2. The order entry system 10 will check the file: FASTENING SPECS-NAME 
for the following edits: 
7.3.2.1. Each carbon--other than HOTSPOT--must be narrow on the glued side 
(GLUE LOCATION) by NARGLUE. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07129 NARROW ON GLUED SIDE 
7.3.2.2. The width of each carbon must be at least 3/4" narrower than the 
form above it. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07322 NARROW OPPOSITE SIDE 
7.3.2.3. The width of each carbon must be equal to or greater than MINCBN. 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07323 CARBON WIDTH 
1. If the Carbon is HOTSPOT, it must have KS holes on the on the glued 
side. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07330 CBN MUST HAVE HOLES ON GLUED SIDE 
7.4. PAPER 
7.4.1. The order entry system 10 will check the file: GLUE SPECS-NAME for 
the following edits: 
7.4.1.2. The basis weight for the top paper (Ply #1) must be equal to or 
greater than MINTOP. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07412 PAPER WEIGHT EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.4.1.4. If there are KS holes on only one side, the minimum Form Width 
must be equal to or greater than MINNARROW. If not, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07414 FORM WIDTH EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.4.1.6. The minimum width for at least one part must be equal to or 
greater than MINWIDTH. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07414 FORM WIDTH EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.4.1.7. If the width of any part is less than the width of the widest part 
in the set, the narrow part must have KS Holes on at least one side. If 
not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07417 NO KS HOLES ON NARROW PLY 
7.5 PLY 
7.5.1. The order entry system 10 will check the file: GLUE SPECS-NAME for 
the following edits: 
7.5.1.1. If there is one or more HOTSPOT carbons, each HOTSPOT carbon is 
counted as a PLY in determining the PLY 
7.5.1.2. The PLY must be equal to or less than MAXPLY. If not, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07512 PLY EXCEEDS SPECS. 
7.5.1.3. If the last paper in the set=DRYGUM, and it is glued, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07513 SLIP SHEET REQUIRED? 
7.5.2. Update ORDER SPECS: PLY 
7.7. PERFORATIONS 
7.7.1. If there are horizontal perforations through all parts and carbons, 
use the following edits. If the horizontal perforations are for individual 
plies, see Rule #21 PRESS PERFS. 
7.7.1.1. If the distance between the horizontal perfs is a multiple of the 
form length, update ORDER SPECS-COLLATING-H-PERF=1 (one perf unit.) 
7.7.1.2. If the distance between the horizontal perfs is not an even 
multiple of the form length, set exception for the plant. 
MESSAGE #P07712 HORIZ. PERF LOCATION 
7.7.2. LETTEREDGE 
7.7.2.1. If the perf type is LETTEREDGE, and If the PLY is greater than 3, 
set flag for review by Engineering. 
MESSAGE #P07864 APPROVE LETTEREDGE PERFS. 
7.7.2.2. If the total Basis Weight (sum of all papers) of the set is 
greater than 50#, set flag for review by Engineering. 
MESSAGE #P07864 APPROVE LETTEREDGE PERFS. 
7.8 For this product, all parts must be glued or crimped. If not, set flag 
for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07001 LOOSE TS IN SET 
7.9. Go to the appropriate rule, depending on the FASTENING--NAME: 
TEMPORARY go to Rule: 7.21 
PERMANENT go to Rule: 7.31 
FLEXIFAST go to Rule: 7.41 
ZIPOUT go to Rule: 7.51 
7.21. TEMPORARY FASTENING 
7.21.1. The order entry system 10 will check to see that the type of 
TEMPORARY FASTENING is available for this product. 
7.21.2. Go to the appropriate Rule, depending on the TEMPORARY FASTENING 
NAME: 
STANDARD go to Rule: 7.22 
SPECIAL go to Rule: 7.23 
ZIPLINE go to Rule: 7.24 
OTHER Set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07212 OTHER TEMPORARY FASTENING 
Skip the balance of Rule 
7.22. TEMPORARY FASTENING--STANDARD 
7.22.1. The order entry system 10 will check the number of prongs and the 
crimp location. If any of the following are not true, change the STANDARD 
to SPECIAL and go to Rule: 7.23. 
7.22.2. Must be 4 prongs 
7.22.3. If the FORM LENGTH=41/4" or 81/2" the crimps must be spaced: 
3"-21/2"-3", in repetitive cycles. 
7.22.4. All other lengths: crimps must be spaced at 3" 
7.22.5. The MARGIN must be equal to or greater than GLUE 
SPECS--NAME--MARGIN 
7.22.6. Update ORDER SPECS: FASTENING--SCRIMP-STANDARD 
7.22.7. Skip balance of Rule 7. 
7.23. TEMPORARY FASTENING--SPECIAL 
7.23.1. The location of Crimps and the number of Crimps/Folded Length will 
be selected from a table provided to Data Entry. 
7.23.2. If OTHER is selected--configuration not on table--set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07232 SPECIAL FASTENING 
7.23.3. If there is Carbon in the Set, the MARGIN must be equal to or 
greater than GLUE SPECS--NAME--MARGIN. If not, set exception for the 
Plant: 
MESSAGE #P07233 MARGIN TOO NARROW 
7.23.3.1. If there is not carbon in the set, the MARGIN must be at least 
3/8" wide. If not, set exception for the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07233 MARGIN TOO NARROW 
7.23.4. Update ORDER SPECS: FASTENING--SCRIMP-SPECIAL 
7.23.5. Skip balance of Rule 7. 
7.24 TEMPORARY FASTENING--ZIPLINE 
7.24.1. The order entry system 10 will check each of the following edits. 
If any are not true, set flag for review by the Plant. 
7.24.1.1. Each carbon must be glued to the back of the preceding copy. 
7.24.1.2. The glue line must be 5/8" from the left side of the form. 
7.24.1.3. The carbon must be at least 11/32" but no more than 1/2" narrow 
on the glued side. 
7.24.1.4. The order entry system 10 will compare each paper with the File: 
ZIPLINE PAPERS to see if the papers are available for this feature. If 
not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07241 APPROVE ZIPLINE PAPER 
7.24.1.5. If any paper in the set is CARBONLESS, then cannot have Zipline 
Glue. Set flag an return order to Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P07002 CANNOT HAVE CBNLESS WITH ZIPLINE 
7.24.2. The Proposal must have Crimping. After the above Rules are 
completed, go to Rule 7.22. 
7.31. PERMANENT FASTENING 
7.31.1. The order entry system 10 will check to see that the type of 
PERMANENT FASTENING is available for this product. 
7.31.2. Go to the appropriate Rule, depending on the PERMANENT FASTENING 
NAME: 
ONE SIDE Copies and Carbons glued one side. Go to Rule:7.32. 
BOTH SIDES Copies and/or Carbons glued both sides. Go to Rule 7.36. 
Y WIRED Go to Rule 7.37. 
7.32. ONE SIDE 
7.32.1. The order entry system 10 will check to see if this type of 
fastening is available for the product. If not, set flag for review by the 
Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07321 FASTENING NOT AVAILABLE 
7.32.2. The width of the Stub must be at least as wide as: GLUE 
SPECS--NAME--MINSTUB. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07322 GLUE: MINIMUM STUB 
7.32.3. The total set weight (all copies and carbons) must be equal to or 
less than GLUE SPECS--MAXSET. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07327 GLUE: MAX SET WEIGHT 
7.32.6. All copies and their respective carbons must be glued on the same 
side. If not, a Construction Diagram is required. Set exception to CSR: 
MESSAGE: #P07326 CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM REQUIRED. 
7.36. BOTH SIDES 
SAME AS 7.32.1 thru 7.32.3. 
7.36.8. Carbons may not be glued on both sides. If not, set flag for review 
by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P07368 CARBON GLUED BOTH SIDES 
7.37. Y WIRED 
7.37.1. Set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07371 Y-WIRE CONSTRUCTION 
7.41. FLEXIFAST 
7.41.6. If the PLY is 3 or greater, the last two copies must be glued 
together. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07416 FLEXIFAST CONSTRUCTION 
7.41.7. All Carbons must be 7# or 8# Basis weight. If not, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07416 FLEXIFAST CONSTRUCTION 
7.41.8 If there are HOT SPOT carbons, the number of HOT SPOT Carbons must 
be added to the number of copies in determining the maximum number of 
plies allowed. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07416 FLEXIFAST CONSTRUCTION 
7.51 ZIPOUT 
7.51.1. If ZIPOUT is selected, a Construction Diagram is required. Update 
ORDER SPECS: Construction Diagram Required. 
9. Punches. The order entry system 10 will check the proposal to see if 
there are any punches. The following edits are to be used only if the 
punches are through all parts and carbons. If there are no punches, or if 
any punches are not through all parts and carbons, skip this rule (see 
below: PRESS PUNCHES). 
9.1. The order entry system 10 will compare the TYPE of punches on the 
PROPOSAL with the Data File: PUNCHES--TYPE 
9.1.1. For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES--PRODUCT--TYPE--COLLATOR 
(06-28-1) 
9.1.2. If found, update ORDER SPECS--COLLATING--PUNCH-1=X (One punch unit 
required). If not found, set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P09120 PUNCH TYPE NOT AVAIL 
9.2 The order entry system 10 will compare the SIZE of punches on the 
PROPOSAL with the Data File: PUNCHES--SIZE 
9.2.1. For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES--PRODUCT--SIZE--COLLATOR 
(06-28-1) 
9.2.2. If found, update ORDER SPECS--COLLATING--PUNCH-1=X (One punch unit 
required). If not found set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P09922 PUNCH SIZE NOT AVAIL 
9.3. If there is more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
horizontal plane then the distance between the first and second horizontal 
planes must be equal to 1/2 FOLD LENGTH. If not, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P09300 PUNCHES--HORIZONTAL LOCATION 
9.4. If there is more than one punch, and they are not in the same vertical 
plane, then each vertical plane must be at least PUNCHES--CCVERT apart. If 
not, update ORDER SPECS--COLLATING--PUNCH-2=X (two punch units required.) 
10. Affix Label. 
10.1. The order entry system 10 will check the Proposal to see if AFFIX 
LABEL is indicated. If not, skip Rule #10. 
10.2. The following must be available: 
10.2.1. A window on the form F3 file indicating "AFFIX LABEL". This window 
is to show the size and location of the label. 
10.2.1.1. If there is more than one AFFIXED LABEL on a copy, all the 
"WINDOWS" must be indicated on the F3 file. 
10.2.2. A separate F3 file showing the label itself, with the appropriate 
text if applicable. 
10.2.2.1. If there is more than one AFFIXED LABEL, and they are not the 
same, a separate F3 file must be available for each LABEL. 
10.2.3. Form #6347--AFFIX LABEL SPEC SHEET. 
If any of the above is not available, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #843 SPECS FOR AFFIXED LABEL 
10.3. The order entry system 10 will compare the label specifications on 
the proposal with the specifications in the Data File: LABEL AFFIX. 
10.3.1. Select LABEL AFFIX ID: LAB001 
10.3.1.1. If the label is circular, skip to rule #10.3.7. 
10.3.2. If the width of the label is less than MINWIDTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL195 AFFIX LABEL--WIDTH 
10.3.3. If the width of the label is greater than MAXWIDTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL195 AFFIX LABEL--WIDTH 
10.3.4. If the depth of the label is less than MINDEPTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL196 AFFIX LABEL--DEPTH 
10.3.5. If the depth of the label is greater than MAXDEPTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL196 AFFIX LABEL--DEPTH 
10.3.6. If the ration of width to length is greater than RATIO, set flag 
for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL198 AFFIX LABEL--RATIO 
10.3.6.1. Skip Rule #10.3.7. and 10.3.8. 
10.3.7. If the label diameter is less than MINDIAM, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL197 AFFIX LABEL--DIAMETER 
10.3.8. If the label diameter is greater than MAXDIAM, set flag for review 
by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL197 AFFIX LABEL--DIAMETER 
10.3.9. If the edge of the label is less than MINEDGE from the edge of the 
form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.10. If the edge of the label is less than MINPERF from any perforation 
on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.11. If the edge of the label is less than MINPERF from any file hole 
on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.12. If the edge of the label is less than MINSE from any other 
label on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.13. If the basis weight of the form to which the label is affixed is 
less than MINWGT, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL200 AFFIX LABEL--PAPER WGT 
10.3.14. If the form width (not the label) is less than MINFORMWID, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL201 AFFIX LABEL--FORM WIDTH 
10.3.15. If the fonn width (not the label) is greater than MAXFORMWID, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL201 AFFIX LABEL--FORM WIDTH 
10.3.16. If the form length (not the label) is less than MINFORMLEN, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL202 AFFIX LABEL--FORM LENGTH 
10.3.17. If the form length (not the label) is greater than the MAXFORMLEN, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL202 AFFIX LABEL--FORM LENGTH 
10.3.18. If the fold length for the form (not the label) is less than 
MINFLDLEN, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL203 AFFIX LABEL--FOLD LENGTH 
10.4. Update ORDER SPECS--SECOPS--AFFIX=X 
10.5. The order entry system 10 will cross reference the Proposal for the 
Forms with the Proposal for the Labels. 
10.5.1. Update ORDER SPECS--AFFIX LABEL REF (reference code or name.) 
19. KS Removal 
19.1. The order entry system 10 will check the Proposal for KS REMOVAL 
feature. If this feature is not on the Proposal, skip rule 19. 
19.2. The order entry system 10 will compare the TOTAL BASIS WEIGHT of all 
papers and carbons on the Proposal with the Data File: KS REMOVAL--MAXSET. 
If the total set weight is greater than MAXSET, set flag for review by the 
Plant. 
MESSAGE #P19200 SET WGT. EXCEEDS KS--REMOVAL 
19.3. The order entry system 10 will compare the location of the KS REMOVAL 
stub on the Proposal with the Data File: KS REMOVAL--MINSTUB. If the KS 
REMOVAL stub is less than MINSUB, set a flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P19300 APPROVE KS REMOVAL 
19.4. If the Proposal is marked for KS REMOVAL on both sides, the order 
entry system 10 will set a flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P19400 KS--REMOVAL: BOTH SIDES 
19.5. Update Order Specs: SECONDARY OPS: KS--REMOVAL 
20. Check Consecutive Numbers 
20.1. The order entry system 10 will check the Proposal to see if there are 
consecutive numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip rule 20. 
20.2. If there are consecutive numbers, check the Proposal to see if the 
Consecutive Numbers are marked: 
PRESS See rule: 20.3 
COPYSAFE See rule: 20.4 
PRESS NUMBERS 
20.3. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: PRESS is on for: 
20.3.1 NAME If PRESS not on, set flag for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20410 PRESS NOS NOT AVAILABLE 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSENOS file 
that have PRESS turned on. 
20.3.2. FRMLEN If the form length is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20146 PRESS NOS-FORM LENGTH 
20.3.3. TYPE FACE If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE # P20147 PRESS NOS--TYPE FACE 
20.3.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The order entry system 10 will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the 
minimum number of digits required in the Consecutive Number. 
The number of digits in the consecutive number must be =&lt;MAX CHAR. If not, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20148 TOO MANY DIGITS IN CONSEC NOS 
20.3.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20149 PRESS NOS--SIZE 
The order entry system 10 will check the Proposal to see how many 
consecutive numbers are on one form: 
than One Number See Rule 20.3.5.1 
Two Numbers See Rule 20.3.5.2. 
More two See Rule 20.3.5.3. 
20.3.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.3.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.3.5.1.2. The order entry system 10 will check the location of the 
Consecutive Number: 
Distance from the top of the form must be =&lt;MINTOP 
Distance from the left edge must be =&lt;MINLEFT. 
Distance from the right edge must be =&lt;MINRIGHT. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 and ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS FEATURES=NUMBERS--TYPE 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20150 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS 
20.3.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.3.5.2.1. The order entry system 10 will check the distance between the 
Consecutive numbers: 
HORIZONTAL SEATION=0, or &gt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
HORIZONTAL SEATION&gt;0 AND &lt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
VERTICAL-SEATION=0, or &gt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
VERTICAL-SEATION&gt;0 and &lt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.3. If the PROPOSAL has more than one size, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20151 MORE THAN ONE STARTING NUMBER 
20.3.5.2.6. If any of the above edits cause 2 UNITS, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20157 TWO NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED 
20.3.5.3. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers on any ply, Set flag 
for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20152 MORE THAN 2 CONSEC. NUMBERS 
COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4. Check the ply on the Proposal. If the ply is &gt;6 set flag for the 
Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20828 MAXIMUM 6 PLY FOR COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.0. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: COLLATOR is on for: 
20.4.1. NAME If COLLATOR is not on, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20153 COPYSAFE NOS NOT AVAILABLE 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have COLLATOR turned on. 
20.4.2. FRMLEN If the form length is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20154 COPYSAFE NOS--FORM LENGTH 
20.4.3. TYPE FACT If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20155 COPYSAFE NOS--TYPE FACE 
20.4.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The order entry system 10 will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the 
minimum number of digits required in the Consecutive Number. 
The number of digits in the consecutive number must be =&lt;MAXCHAR. If not, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20148 TOO MANY DIGITS IN CONSEC NOS 
20.4.4.1. The number of digits in the consecutive number must be at least 
5. If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20829 MINIMUM 5 DIGITS IN COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected name, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20156 COPYSAFE NOS--SIZE 
The order entry system 10 will check the Proposal to see how many 
consecutive number are on one form: 
One Number See Rule: 20.4.5.1. 
Two Numbers See Rule: 20.4.5.2. 
More than two See Rule: 20.4.5.3. 
20.4.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.4.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.4.5.1.2. The order entry system 10 will check the location of the 
Consecutive Number: 
Distance from the top of the form must be =&lt;MINTOP 
Distance from the left edge must be =&lt;MINLEFT. 
Distance from the right edge must be =&lt;MINRIGHT. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 and ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR FEATURES=NUMBERS--TYPE 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20150 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS 
20.4.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.4.5.2.1. The order entry system 10 will check the distance between the 
Consecutive numbers: 
HORIZONTAL SEATION=0, or &gt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
HORIZONTAL SEATION&gt;0 AND &lt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 
Units VERTICAL-SEATION=0, or &gt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 
Unit VERTICAL-SEATION&gt;0 and &lt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 
Units 
20.4.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one size, ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20151 MORE THAN ONE STARTING NUMBER 
20.4.5.2.6. If any of the above edits cause 2 UNITS, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20157 TWO NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED 
20.4.5.4. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers on any ply, Set flag 
for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20152 MORE THAN 2 CONSEC. NUMBERS 
MICR NUMBERS 
20.5. If there are MICR NUMBERS (Repetitive and/or Consecutive) see Rule 
#49. 
MOD CHECK DIGIT 
20.6. Data entry will request if the Consecutive Numbers have a Check 
Digit. 
20.6.1. The there is no check digit, skip rule #20.6. 
20.6.2. If there is a check digit, Data Entry will request the following: 
20.6.2.1. Identification of the Modulous System (Data Entry will display a 
list of the MOD Check Digits that are available) 
20.6.2.2. Data Entry will request: "Is this form an exact reorder of the 
previous order, and the MOD Check Digit calculation the same as the 
previous order? 
20.6.2.2.1. If the response is YES, skip the balance of rule 20.6. 
20.6.2.2.2. If the response is NO, continue to the next edit 20.6.2.3. 
20.6.2.3. Data Entry will request a sample calculation. This will be a 
free-form field with sufficient room to show the calculations. 
20.6.2.4. The sample calculation must be printed as part of the ORDER FORM 
at the plant. 
21. Check Press Perfs. The functionality of this rule is discussed above in 
the description of the general validation rules. 
22. Check Press Punches. The functionality of this rule is discussed above 
in the description of the general validation rules. 
31. Press Delivery. 
31.1. Update ORDER SPECS: PRESS DELIVERY=ROLLS 
50. Home Plant Assignment. The functionality of this rule is discussed 
above in the description of the general validation rules 
99. Calculate Sets/Ctn 
99.1. Use the data file: K CHART to determine which column to use for 
selecting the Sets/Carton.) 
99.2. Add up the caliper for each paper in the set. 
99.2.1. If the caliper for any paper=0 (or blank), set flag and send 
message for review by Engineering. 
MESSAGE #VL ENTER PAPER CALIPER 
99.3. Add up the caliper for each carbon in the set. 
99.3.1. If the caliper for any carbon=0 (or blank), set flag and send 
message for review by Engineering 
MESSAGE #VL ENTER CARBON CALIPER 
99.4 If the Proposal has any feature listed in the Data File: 
CALIPERS--SPECIAL, add the appropriate amount to the TOTAL CALIPER. 
99.5. Select the QUANTITY/K from the Data File: K CALIPERS, using 
Column A. 
99.6. If the Form Size (Width X Length) exceeds 185 sq. in., use 84% of the 
QUANTITY/K (10" K). Round the quantity to the nearest multiple of 
10. 
Limited Stanset Validation Rules (no MICR) 
The following rules are processed for Limited Stanset products without MICR 
ink: 1. Check Form Length; 2. Check Form Width; 6. Quantity; 7. 
Collator/Secondary Operations; 10. Affix Label; 19. KS Removal; 20. 
Consecutive Numbers; 21. Check Press Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 31. 
Press Delivery; 34. Paper Specs; 41. Carbon; 47. Lockup; 55. Ink; and, 56. 
Non-Litho Printing. The respective functionalities of these rules may be 
described as follows (any rules not expressly illustrated below have been 
described elsewhere in the specification): 
1. CHECK FORM LENGTH 
1.1. Only the following LENGTHS (in inches) are available for this product: 
31/2, 32/3, 41/4, 51/2, 7, 8, 81/2, 11. 
If any other length is entered, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P01001 LENGTH NOT AVAILABLE ON LIMITED 
2. CHECK FORM WIDTH 
2.1. Only the following WIDTHS (in inches) are available for this product: 
81/2, 9, 91/2, 97/8, 105/8, 113/4, 12, 135/8, 147/8. 
If any other width is entered, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P02001 WIDTH NOT AVAILABLE ON LIMITED 
6. QUANTITY 
6.1. MAXIMUM QUANTITY 
6.1.1. If the FORM LENGTH is less than 7", and the Quantity is greater than 
500,000 set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P06110 QUANTITY EXCEEDS SPECS OVER 500,000 FOR LESS THAN 7" LENGTH 
6.1.2. If the FORM LENGTH IS 7" or greater, and the Quantity is greater 
than 250,000, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P06112 QUANTITY EXCEEDS SPECS OVER 250,000 FOR GREATER THAN 7" 
LENGTH 
6.2. MINIMUM QUANTITY 
6.2.1. If the FORM LENGTH is less than 7", the Minimum Quantity=the 
quantity of one carton, but not less than 5,000 forms. If false, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P06210 MIN QUANTITY=(QTY/CTN) LESS THAN 5,000 FOR LESS THAN 7" 
LENGTH. 
6.2.2. If the FORM LENGTH is 7" or greater, the Minimum Quantity=the 
quantity of one carton, but not less than 2,500 forms. If false, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P06220 MIN QUANTITY=(QTY/CTN) LESS THAN 2,500 FOR GREATER THAN 7" 
LENGTH 
7. CHECK COLLATOR/SECONDARY OPERATIONS 
7.1. FASTENING NAME--PLY 
7.1.1. The system will compare the Proposal with the file: FASTENING to 
determine the type of fastening is available for the Proposal PLY. If not, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07007 FASTENING NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.2. FASTENING LOCATION 
7.2.1. Crimp is permitted through all copies and carbons. If any other 
requirement is specified, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07008 CRIMP SPEC EXCEEDS LIMITED 
7.2.2. The Crimp may be located at: LEFT, RIGHT, or BOTH sides. If any 
other location is specified, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07220 CRIMP SPEC EXCEEDS LIMITED 
7.2.2.1. If the location is available, update ORDER SPECS: FASTENING 
LOCATION 
7.2.3. Line glue is permitted on one side only--right or left. If any other 
location is specified, set exception for SCR: 
MESSAGE #P07230 GLUE ONE SIDE ONLY FOR LIMITED 
7.2.3.1. Up to two glue lines are available. One line must be less than 
1/4" from the edge of the paper; the other, if there is a second one, can 
only glue carbons to the preceding paper. If false, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07231 GLUE LOCATION EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.2.3.2. If there is no carbon, the second glue line can glue two papers 
together. If any other construction is specified, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07231 GLUE LOCATION EXCEEDS LIMITED 
7.3. CARBON 
7.3.1. The system will check the Data File: CARBON to see if the carbon is 
available for this product. If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07311 CARBON NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.3.2. Each carbon must be at least 3/4" narrower than the preceding paper. 
If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07320 CARBON SIZE NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.4. PAPER 
7.4.1. The system will check the file: GLUE SPECS--NAME for the following 
edits: 
7.4.1.2. The basis weight for the top paper (Ply #1) must be equal to or 
greater than MINTOP. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07132 PAPER WEIGHT EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.4.1.4. All papers must be the same width. If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07013 NARROW COPIES NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.5 PLY 
7.5.1.2. The maximum PLY allowed for this product =6. If not, set flag for 
review by the CSR. 
MESSAGE#P07015 PLY EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.5.2. Update ORDER SPECS: PLY 
7.6. LENGTHS 
7.6.1. The system will check the file: FRMLEN to see if the Length is 
available for this product. If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07610 LENGTH NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
7.7. PERFORATIONS 
7.7.1. If there are horizontal perforations through all parts and carbons, 
use the following edits. If the horizontal perforations are for individual 
plies, see Rule #21 PRESS PERFS. 
7.7.1.1. If the distance between the horizontal perfs is the same as one of 
the valid Form Lengths, and an even multiple of the form length, update 
ORDER SPECS-COLLATING-H-PERF=1 (one perf unit.) 
7.7.1.2. If the distance between the horizontal perfs is not the same as 
one of the valid Form Lengths, and an even multiple of the form length, 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE P07713 HORIZ. PERF LOCATION NOT ALLOWED 
7.7.2. LETTEREDGE 
7.7.2.1. If the perf type is LETTEREDGE, and it is on any ply except the 
first ply in the set, set flag for review by CSR. 
MESSAGE #P07721 LETTEREDGE PERF NOT ALLOWED ON INTERNAL PLIES. 
7.8 For this product, all parts must be glued or crimped. If not, set flag 
for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07800 LOOSE TS NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
7.9. Go to the appropriate rule, depending on the FASTENING-NAME: 
7.9.1 If the FASTENING TYPE=CRIMP, go to Rule: 7.21 
7.9.2. If the FASTENING TYPE=GLUE, go to Rule: 7.31 
7.9.3. If the FASTENING TYPE=anything else, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07007 FASTENING NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.21. CRIMP 
7.21.1. Only STANDARD Crimp is allowed: 
7.21.2. The default is 4 prongs. If anything else is specified, go to 7.23. 
7.21.3. If the FORM LENGTH=41/4" or 81/2" the crimps must be spaced: 
3"-21/2"-3", in repetitive cycles. This is the default. Anything else is 
specified, go to 7.23. 
7.21.4. All other lengths: crimps must be spaced at 3". This is the 
default. Anything else is specified, go to 7.23. 
7.21.5. The MARGIN must be equal to or greater than GLUE 
SPECS--NAME--MARGIN. If not true, go to 7.23. 
7.21.6. Update ORDER SPECS: FASTENING--SCRIMP--STANDARD 
7.21.7. Skip balance of Rule 7. 
7.23 If any of the above are not true, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: #P07235 CRIMP OUT OF SPEC FOR LIMITED 
7.31. PERMANENT FASTENING 
7.31.1. If copies and carbons are glued at one side, go to rule 7.32. 
7.31.2. If copies and carbons are glued at both sides, set exception for 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07312 GLUE ON BOTH SIDES NOT AVAIL. ON LIMITED 
7.32. ONE SIDE 
7.32.1. The width of the Stub must be at least as wide as: GLUE 
SPECS--NAME--MINSTUB. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07324 STUB EXCEEDS MINIMUM 
7.32.2. The total set weight (all copies and carbons) must be equal to or 
less than GLUE SPECS--MAXSET. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07325 SET EXCEEDS MAX. FOR LIMITED 
20. CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip edit 20. 
20.2. If there are consecutive numbers, check the Proposal to see if the 
Consecutive Numbers are marked: 
PRESS See rule: 20.3 
COPYSAFE See rule: 20.4 
PRESS NUMBERS 
20.3. If the ply is 1, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20006 CHANGE PRODUCT TO LIMITED SINGLES 
20.3.1 If the ply is greater than 1, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20311 PRESS NUMBERS NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4. Check the ply on the Proposal. If the ply is &gt;6 set flag for the 
Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20828 MAXIMUM 6 PLY FOR COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.0. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: COLLATOR is on for: 
20.4.1. NAME If COLLATOR is notion, set flag for review by CSR 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have COLLATOR turned on. 
20.4.2. FRMLEN If the form length is not available for the selected NAME, 
set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20421 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
20.4.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the minimum number 
of digits required in the Consecutive Number. The number of digits in the 
consecutive number must be =&lt;MAXCHAR. If not, set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20442 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRQD. 
20.4.4.1. The number of digits in the consecutive number must be at least 
5. If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20829 MINIMUM 5 DIGITS IN COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive number are 
on one form: 
One Number See Rule: 20.4.5.1. 
Two Numbers See Rule 20.4.5.2. 
More than two See Rule: 20.4.5.3. 
20.4.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.4.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.4.5.1.2. The system will check the location of the Consecutive Number: 
Distance from the top of the form must be =&lt;MINTOP 
Distance from the left edge must be =&lt;MINLEFT. 
Distance from the right edge must be =&lt;MINRIGHT. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 and ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR FEATURES=NUMBERS--TYPE 
If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20007 LOCATION OF CONS NOS NOT ALLOWED 
20.4.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.4.5.2.0. Two Consecutive Numbers are allowed only on the following Form 
Lengths: 
7" 
81/2" 
11" 
If the Form Length is not one of the above, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20008 TWO CONS. NOS NOT ALLOWED FOR THIS LENGTH 
20.4.5.2.1. The system will check the distance between the Consecutive 
numbers: 
If the HORIZONTAL SEATION=0, or &gt;MINHORIZ, set ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS =1 Unit 
If the HORIZONTAL SEATION&gt;0 AND &lt;MINHORIZ, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
If the VERTICAL--SEATION=0, or &gt;MINVERT, ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
If the VERTICAL-SEATION&gt;0 and &lt;MINVERT, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one size, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, set exception 
for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.4. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers on any ply, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
MICR NUMBERS 
20.5. If there are MICR NUMBERS (Repetitive and/or Consecutive) see Rule 
#49. 
MOD CHECK DIGIT 
20.6. Data entry will request if the Consecutive Numbers have a Check 
Digit. 
20.6.1. The there is no check digit, skip rule #20.6. 
20.6.2. If there is a check digit, Data Entry will request the following: 
20.6.2.1. Identification of the Modulous System (Data Entry will display a 
list of the MOD Check Digits that are available) 
20.6.2.2. Data Entry will request: "Is this form an exact reorder of the 
previous order, and the MOD Check Digit calculation the same as the 
previous order? 
20.6.2.2.1. If the response is YES, skip the balance of rule 20.6. 
20.6.2.2.2. If the response is NO, continue to the next edit: 20.6.2.3. 
20.6.2.3. Data Entry will request a sample calculation. This will be a 
free-form field with sufficient room to show the calculations. 
20.6.2.4. Set exception for Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20624 MOD CHECK DIGIT CALCULATION 
20.6.2.4. The sample calculation must be printed as part of the ORDER FORM 
at the plant. 
21. CHECK PRESS PERFS 
21.1. DIAGONAL 
21.1.1. If the PROPOSAL has Diagonal Perfs, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21005 DIAGONAL NOT PERMITTED ON LIMITED 
21.2. HORIZONTAL 
21.2.0. If there are no Horizontal Perfs on the order, skip rule 21.2. 
21.2.1. For each ply: 
21.2.1.1. If the HORIZ PERFS are on all PLIES, including Carbons if any, 
and in the same location on each PLY, see RULE 7.7: COLLATOR PERFS 
21.2.2. If there is more than one type of Horizontal Perf on the proposal, 
each TYPE must be checked. 
21.2.2.1. If the distance between HORIZ PERFS is an even multiple of ORDER 
SPECS--PRSLENGTH, update ORDER SPECS--PRESS FEATURES--HORIZ=1 
21.2.2.2. If the distance between HORIZ PERFS is not an even multiple of 
ORDER SPECS--PRSLENGTH, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21006 PERFS NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
21.2.2.3. Update ORDER SPECS--PRESS 
FEATURES--PERF-TH=PROPOSAL--PERFS--HORIZONTAL--TYPE. 
21.3. VERTICAL 
21.3.0 If there are no Vertical Perfs on the Proposal, skip rule 21.3. 
21.3.1. For each ply: 
21.3.2. If there is more than one type of VERT PERF on the proposal, each 
TYPE must be checked. 
21.3.3. If there is more than one PERF, the distance between the perfs must 
be equal to or greater than PERFORATIONS--V--PERF NAME--MINDIST. If not, 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21010 VERT. PERFS OUT OF SPEC FOR LIMITED 
21.3.4. If there is more than one PERF, the number of perfs must be equal 
to or less than PERFORATIONS--V--PERF NAME--MAXNO. If not, set exception 
for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21010 VERT. PERFS OUT OF SPEC FOR LIMITED 
21.3.5. ORDER SPECS--PRESS 
FEATURES--PERF-TV=PROPOSAL--PERFS--VERTICAL--TYPE. 
21.4. LETTEREDGE PERFS 
21.4.1. If the Perf TYPE=LETTEREDGE, and the Perf orientation is HORIZONTAL 
go to Rule #7.7--COLLATOR OPERATIONS--PERFS. 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
If there are any carbons, and there are any punches through all parts and 
carbons, see: SECONDARY OPERATIONS above. 
22.1. Select: PROPOSAL DATA--PUNCHES 
22.1.1. BLANK--proceed to next edit 
22.2. PROPOSAL DATA: PUNCHES--TYPE 
For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES AVAIL 
22.2.1. If not found, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22410 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.2.2. If Found, but the Product Flag is not on, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22420 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.3. PROPOSAL DATA: PUNCHES--SIZE 
For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES AVAIL--PRODUCT--SIZE 
22.3.1. If size not turned on, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22430 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.4. If the Form Length=11", up to 5 holes are allowed in the same 
horizontal plane. If the distance (C to C) for the holes is 13/8", this 
counts as one punch. 
2.4.1. If the distance (C to C) between any of the holes is not 13/8", each 
hole must be treated as one punch. In that case, the minimum C to C 
distance between the holes is: 23/4". If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22431 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.5. If the Form Length is less than 11" up to 3 punches, all in the same 
horizontal plane are allowed. If there are more than 3, set exception for 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22432 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.5.1. The distance between the holes (C to C) must be 23/4" or 41/4". If 
not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22005 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED. 
22.6.3. If there are more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
vertical plane, then each vertical plane must be at least 23/4" apart. If 
not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22005 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.6.3.1. Punches are allowed if they are all in the same vertical plane up 
to the following limits: 
______________________________________ 
FORM LENGTH MAX. # 
______________________________________ 
Less than 7" 2 
7" to 81/2" 3 
Greater than 81/2" 
5 
If not, set exception for CSR: 
______________________________________ 
MESSAGE #P22005 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
31. PRESS DELIVERY 
31.1. Update ORDER SPECS: PRESS DELIVERY=ROLLS 
34. PAPER SPECS 
For each ply, compare the PROPOSAL data with the values in the PAPER FILE. 
1.1. The system will check the BASIS WGT., COLOR and TYPE against the PAPER 
GROUP: LTD STANSET W/O MICR 
1.1.1. If the paper is found, go to the next edit; 
1.1.2. If the paper is not found, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P34001 PAPER NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
41. CARBON 
If there is no carbon on this PROPOSAL, skip this edit. 
41.1. The system will check the CARBON FORMULAS for each Carbon against the 
CARBON FILE. 
41.1.1. If the carbon is found, go to the next edit; 
41.1.2. If any carbon is not found, set a flag for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P41001 CARBON NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
47. LOCKUP 
47.1. Use the rules in GENERAL to determine lockup. If successful, process 
RULE 47.3. for this product: 
47.3. If there is not sufficient area for LOCKUP on any plate on the 
proposal, add one unit to the total number of printing units. 
47.3.1. If the LOCKUP causes a 2-unit front plate to become a 3-unit front, 
and there is no back printing on the ply, 3-units are acceptable (even 
though the limit is 2-units front). Otherwise, set flag for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P47144 INSUFFICIENT LOCKUP 
55. INK 
For each ply, compare the PROPOSAL--INK with the LIMITED INK FILE. 
55.1. If any ink is not found, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P55001 INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
55.2. If HEAT RESISTANT ink was selected, or if any ink had been changed to 
HEAT RESISTANT by Rule #4 (Primary Writing Device) set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P55200 INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
55.2.1. If the PROPOSAL has match ink set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P55210 INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
55.11. If the Proposal has a VOID PANTO, check the ink file for inks with 
the same COLOR 
55.11.1. If invalid ink is selected for Void Panto, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P55111 INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
56. NON-LITHO PRINTING 
56.1. TITLES 
56.1.1. If there are TITLES on the Proposal, Data Entry will request: 
PLY NUMBER 
FRONT 
BACK 
56.1.1.1. INK 
56.1.1.1.1. Only PMS 199 or WARM RED is allowed for titles. If any other 
ink is selected, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P56001 INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR TITLES 
56.2. DISTINGUISHING FIGURES 
If there are DISTINGUISHING FIGURES on the Proposal, Data Entry will 
request: 
PLY NUMBER 
TEXT FRONT: 
TEXT BACK: 
INK Only PMS 199 or WARM RED is allowed. If any other ink is selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P56002 INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR DIST. FIGS. 
56.2.1. The location for the Distinguishing Figure must be shown on F3. 
56.2.2. Data Entry will allow only one Distinguishing Figure per ply 
56.2.3. Update Order Specs: 
PRESS--RUBBER--UNITS: 
FRONT=Add 1. or 
BACK =Add 1. 
PRESS-RUBBER-INK=Selected Distinguishing Figure Ink 
56.3. STOCK PHRASES 
If there are STOCK PHRASES on the Proposal, Data Entry will request: 
PLY NUMBER 
FRONT: 
BACK: 
56.3.1. INK Only PMS 199 or WARM RED is allowed. If any other ink is 
selected, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE#P56003 INK NOT AVAILABLE FOR STOCK PHRASE 
56.3.1. Update ORDER SPECS 
PRESS-RUBBER-UNITS: 
FRONT:=Add 1. or 
BACK:=Add 1. 
PRESS-RUBBER-INK=Selected Title Ink 
56.3.2. Data Entry will allow only one STOCK PHRASE per ply. 
56.4. LIMITED AREA PRINTING 
Limited area printing is not allowed. If there is a limited area on the 
face of back of any ply, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE P56004 LIMITED AREA NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
Limited Stanset Validation Rules (with MICR) 
The following rules are processed for Limited Stanset products with MICR 
ink: 1. Check Form Length; 2. Check Form Width; 3. Check Ply; 6. Quantity; 
7. Collator/Secondary Operations; 20. Consecutive Numbers; 21. Check Press 
Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 31. Press Delivery; 34. Paper Specs; 41. 
Carbon; 47. Lockup; 49. MICR; 50. Home Plant Assignment; and 56. Non-Litho 
Printing. The respective functionalities of these rules may be described 
as follows (any rules not expressly illustrated below have been described 
elsewhere in the specification): 
1. CHECK FORM LENGTH: 
1.1. Only the following Lengths are available: 31/2, 32/3, 41/4, 51/2, 7, 
81/2, 11. 
1.2. If the FORM LENGTH is any other than these, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P01001 LENGTH NOT AVAILABLE ON LIMITED 
2. CHECK FORM WIDTH 
2.1. Only the following Widths are available: 81/2, 91/2, 97/8, 105/8, 
113/4, 12, 135/8, 147/8, 151/2 
2.2. If the FORM WIDTH is any other than these, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P02001 WIDTH NOT AVAILABLE ON LIMITED 
3. CHECK PLY 
3.1. The maximum ply for this product=4. If the ply is greater than 4, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: #P03100 PLY EXCEEDS LIMITED SPECS 
6. QUANTITY 
6.1. Maximum quantity. 
6.1.1. If the order quantity is greater than 10000, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P06001 QUANTITY EXCEEDS SPECS 
7. CHECK COLLATOR/SECONDARY OPERATIONS 
7.1. FASTENING NAME--PLY 
7.1.1. Only CRIMP is allowed. If any other fastening is selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07007 FASTENING NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.2. FASTENING LOCATION 
7.2.1. Crimp is permitted through all copies and carbons. If any other 
requirement is specified, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07008 CRIMP SPEC EXCEEDS LIMITED 
7.2.2. The Crimp may be located at: LEFT, RIGHT, or BOTH sides. If any 
other location is specified, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07008 CRIMP SPEC EXCEEDS LIMITED 
7.2.2.1. If the location is available, update ORDER SPECS: FASTENING 
LOCATION 
7.3. CARBON 
7.3.1. Only 812 Carbon is allowed. If any other Carbon is selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07011 CARBON NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.3.2. Each carbon must be 3/4" narrower than the paper. If not, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07012 CARBON SIZE NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.4. PAPER 
7.4.1. The system will check the file: GLUE SPECS--NAME for the following 
edits: 
7.4.1.2. The basis weight for the top paper (Ply #1) must be equal to or 
greater than MINTOP. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07132 PAPER WEIGHT EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.4.1.4. All papers must be the same width, with KS holes on both sides. If 
not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07013 NARROW COPIES NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
7.7. PERFORATIONS 
7.7.1. If there are horizontal perforations through all parts and carbons, 
use the following edits. If the horizontal perforations are for individual 
plies, see Rule #21 PRESS PERFS. 
7.7.1.1. If the distance between the horizontal perfs is the same as one of 
the valid Form Lengths, and an even multiple of the form length, update 
ORDER SPECS-COLLATING-H-PERF=1 (one perf unit.) 
7.7.1.2. If the distance between the horizontal perfs is not the same as 
one of the valid Form Lengths, and an even multiple of the form length, 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07017 HORIZ. PERF LOCATION NOT ALLOWED 
7.7.2. LETTEREDGE 
7.7.2.1. If the perf type is LETTEREDGE, set flag for review by CSR 
MESSAGE #P07018 LETTEREDGE PERF NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
7.8 For this product, all parts must be crimped. If not, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07019 LOOSE TS NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
7.21. CRIMP 
7.21.1. Only STANDARD Crimp is allowed. If any other selection is made, set 
exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE: #P07211 APPROVE CRIMP SPECS 
7.21.5. The MARGIN must be equal to or greater than GLUE 
SPECS--NAME--MARGIN. If not true, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: #P07215 CRIMP OUT OF SPEC FOR LIMITED 
7.21.6. Update ORDER SPECS: FASTENING--SCRIMP--STANDARD 
7.21.7. Skip balance of Rule 7. 
7.23 If any of the above are not true, set exception for CSR: 
20. CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip edit 20. 
20.2. If there are consecutive numbers, check the Proposal to see if the 
Consecutive Numbers are marked: 
PRESS See rule: 20.3 
COPYSAFE See rule: 20.4 
PRESS NUMBERS 
20.3. Press Numbering is not available on this product. If PRESS Numbering 
is selected, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20303 PRESS NUMBERS NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4. Check the ply on the Proposal. If the ply is &gt;4 set flag for the 
Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20830 MAXIMUM 4 PLY FOR COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.0. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: SECONDARY is on for: 
20.4.1. NAME If SECONDARY is not on, set flag for review by CSR 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have SECONDARY turned on. 
20.4.2. FRMLEN If the form length is not available for the selected NAME, 
set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
20.4.3. TYPE FACE If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
20.4.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the minimum number 
of digits required in the Consecutive Number. The number of digits in the 
consecutive number must be =&lt;MAXCHAR. If not, set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
20.4.4.1. The number of digits in the consecutive number must be at least 
5. If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20829 MINIMUM 5 DIGITS IN COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected name, 
set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20156 COPYSAFE NOS--SIZE 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive number are 
on one form: 
One Number See Rule: 20.4.5.1. 
Two Numbers See Rule: 20.4.5.2. 
More than two See Rule: 20.4.5.3. 
20.4.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.4.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.4.5.1.2. Update MFG. PLAN--CONS. NOS. on NALE 
20.4.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.4.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, excluding MICR, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, excluding 
MICR, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.4. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers, excluding MICR on 
any ply, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
MICR NUMBERS 
20.5. If there are MICR NUMBERS (Repetitive and/or Consecutive) see Rule 
#49. 
MOD CHECK DIGIT 
20.6. Data entry will request if the Consecutive Numbers have a Check 
Digit. 
20.6.1. The there is no check digit, skip rule #20.6. 
20.6.2. If there is a check digit, Data Entry will request the following: 
20.6.2.1. Identification of the Modulous System (Data Entry will display a 
list of the MOD Check Digits that are available) 
20.6.2.2. Data Entry will request: "Is this form an exact reorder of the 
previous order, and the MOD Check Digit calculation the same as the 
previous order? 
20.6.2.2.1. If the response is YES, skip the balance of rule 20.6. 
20.6.2.2.2. If the response is NO, continue to the next edit: 20.6.2.3. 
20.6.2.3. Data Entry will request a sample calculation. This will be a 
free-form field with sufficient room to show the calculations. 
20.6.2.4. The sample calculation must be printed as part of the ORDER FORM 
at the plant. 
21. CHECK PRESS PERFS 
21.1. DIAGONAL 
21.1.1. Diagonal Perfs are not allowed. If Diagonal is selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21002 PERFS NOT AVAIL FOR PRODUCT 
21.2. HORIZONTAL 
21.2.0. If there are no Horizontal Perfs on the order, skip rule 21.2. 
21.2.0.1. If the HORIZ PERFS are on all PLIES, including Carbons if any, 
and in the same location on each PLY, see RULE 7.7: COLLATOR PERFS 
21.2.1. For each ply: 
21.2.1.1. If the form length=7", one Horizontal perf is allowed. If the 
form length is anything else, and a Horizontal Perf is selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: #P21006 PERF NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
21.2.2. If there is more than one type of Horizontal Perf on the proposal, 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: #P21006 PERF NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
21.3. VERTICAL 
21.3.0 If there are no Vertical Perfs on the Proposal, skip rule 21.3. 
21.3.1.1. If the VERT PERFS are on all PLIES, and in the same location on 
each PLY, see Rule 7.7: COLLATOR PERFS 
21.3.1. For each ply: 
21.3.1.1. If there is more than one type of VERT PERF on the proposal, each 
TYPE must be checked. 
21.3.1.2 Up to 2 vertical perfs are allowed. They must be located no more 
than 5/8" from the edge of the form. 
21.3.1.2.1. If the form length is 31/2", one additional vertical perf is 
allowed anywhere on the form. 
21.3.1.3. If the number or location of the perfs exceeds these specs, set 
exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21313 VERT PERFS NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED. 
21.4. LETTEREDGE PERFS 
21.4.1. Letteredge Perfs are not allowed on this product. If selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: #P21410 LETTEREDGE PERF NOT ALLOWED. 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
If there are any carbons, and there are any punches through all parts and 
carbons, see: SECONDARY OPERATIONS above. 
22.1. If there are no punches, skip rule 22. 
22.2. If the FORM LENGTH is not 7" set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: #P22200 PUNCHES NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
22.3. One 2-hole punch is allowed. If any other punches are selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22005 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.4. The punch may be at the TOP, BOTTOM, or LEFT SIDE of the form. If any 
other location is selected, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22400PUNCH LOCATION NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
34. PAPER SPECS 
For each ply, compare the PROPOSAL data with the values in the PAPER GROUP: 
LTD STANSET--MICR. 
1.1. If the paper is found, go to the next edit; 
1.2. If the paper type is OTHER, set flag for exception to CSR. MESSAGE 
#P34120 PAPER NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED WITH MICR 
1.3. If any paper is not found, set a flag for exception to CSR MESSAGE 
#P34130 PAPER NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED WITH MICR 
49. MICR 
49.1.3. The following rules apply to MICR Printing on part one only. 
49.1.4. Other parts in the set may have MICR Numbers, but those plies do 
not have to conform to the rules below. 
49.2. FORM SIZE: 
49.2.2. MICR is available on only the following Form Lengths: 31/2, 32/3, 
7, 
49.2.2.1. If the Form Length is any other, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P49001 MICR NOT AVAIL FOR PRODUCT 
Zipset Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Zipset products: 1. Form Length; 2. 
Form Width; 7. Collator/Secondary Operations; 9. Punches; 10. Affix Label; 
14. Booking; 15. Padding; 16. Edge Glue; 19. KS Removal; 20. Consecutive 
Numbers; 21. Check Press Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 29. Spec. Inst; 
30. Construction Diagram; 31. Press Delivery; 32. Guillotine; and 39. 
Comer Cut. The functionality of each of these rules may be illustrated as 
follows (any rules not expressly illustrated below have been described 
elsewhere in the specification): 
1. CHECK FORM LENGTH 
If the PRODUCT is: 
ZIPSET CUSTOM 
LIMITED ZIPSET 
The system will reverse the Form Width and Form Length in all references to 
form sizes, dimensions, locations, etc. 
For FORM LENGTH, use the FORM WIDTH and check against GENERAL Rule G1. 
2. CHECK FORM WIDTH 
If the PRODUCT is: ZIPSET CUSTOM 
The system will reverse the Form Width and Form Length in all references to 
form sizes, dimensions, locations, etc. 
For FORM WIDTH, use the FORM LENGTH and check against GENERAL Rule G1 
2.1. If the order WIDTH (stub length) is found, and the form width is not 
an exact multiple of the cylinder circumference, update MFG PLAN: 
MFG STEP: BREAKAWAY=TRUE 
2.2. If the order WIDTH (stub length) is not found, update MFG. PLAN: 
MFG STEP=GUILLOTINE 
MFG STEP: BREAKAWAY=FALSE 
2.2.1 Use the next larger FORM LENGTH in the table to determine the Press 
and Collator cylinder size. 
7. CHECK COLLATOR/SECONDARY OPERATIONS 
7.1. 40" ROLLS. The system will compare the PROPOSAL with the 
specifications in the file: 40" ROLLS to determine if the order can be run 
on large rolls. 
As soon as a NO condition is detected, mark the PROPOSAL--40' ROLL: NO, and 
skip all remaining edits in section 7.1. 
7.1.2. If the Proposal has TAPE, TRANSTAPE must be on. 
7.1.2.1. If there is Transfer Tape, add one to the number of plies, and 
reevaluate the MAX PLY. 
7.1.2.2. If there is Reinforcement Tape, add one to the number of plies, 
and reevaluate the MAX PLY. 
7.1.3. If there is HOTSPOT CARBON, add one to the number of plies for each 
Hotspot Carbon and reevaluate the MAX PLY 
7.1.4. The Proposal QUANTITY must be equal to or greater then MIN QTY 
7.1.5. If the Proposal has AFFIX LABEL, update MFG. PLAN: JUMBO=no. 
7.1.6. If there are Forward Action Consecutive Numbers, skip the balance of 
rule 7.1. 
7.1.7 The PLY must be equal to or less than the MAX PLY. 
7.1.8. The number of Printing Units on the form must be equal to or less 
than MAX PRINT 
7.1.9. If all the above edits pass, mark the PROPOSAL: 40" ROLLS 
7.2 Deleted--save for future use 
7.3. FASTENING 
The system will compare the PROPOSAL with the specifications in the file: 
GLUE SPECS 
7.3.1. The maximum basis weight for any paper in the glued set must be 
equal to or less than MAX PAPER. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07310 PAPER WEIGHT EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.3.2. PAPER SIZE 
7.3.2.1. The widest part in the PROPOSAL must be equal to or less than MAX 
LENGTH. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07321 FORM LENGTH EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.3.2.2. The minimum length for at least one part must be equal to or 
greater than MIN LNGTH. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07321 FORM LENGTH EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.3.3. PLY 
7.3.3.1. NOTE: IF THERE IS ONE OR MORE HOT SPOT CARBONS IN THE SET, EACH 
HOT SPOT CARBON IS COUNTED AS A PLY IN DETERMINING THE MAXIMUM PLY. 
7.3.3.2. The PLY must be equal to or less than MAX PLY. If not, set flag 
for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07332 PLY EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.3.3.3. If the total set caliper exceeds the MAXCALIPER, set flag for 
review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P07333 CALIPER EXCEEDS SPECS 
7.3.4. If last paper in set=DRYGUM, and it is glued, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07340 SLIP SHEET REQUIRED 
7.3.5. If there is carbon in the last position of the set, add 1 to the 
total number of parts, and reevaluate MAXPLY. Add message to the order. 
MESSAGE #P07340 SLIP SHEET REQUIRED 
7.3.6. Update: ORDER SPECS--COLLATING--STATIONS=Total number of parts+total 
number of Hotspot carbons+number of Transfer Tapes. 
7.4. PERFORATIONS 
7.4.1. If the total caliper for the set exceeds MAXCAL--PRF, the perfs must 
be done on the press. See Rule #21--PRESS PERFS. 
7.4.2. If there are Right Angle perforations through all parts and carbons 
use the following edits. If the Right Angle perfs are for individual 
plies, see: #21. Check Press Perfs 
7.4.3. If the distance between the Right Angle perfs is a multiple of the 
form length: update: ORDER SPECS--COLLATING-H-PERF=1 (one perf unit 
required) 
7.4.4. If the distance between the Right Angle perfs is not a multiple of 
the form length: update: ORDER SPECS--COLLATING-H-PERF=2 (two perf units 
required) 
7.5. CROSS SPOT GLUE 
7.5.1. If there is CROSS SPOT Glue, send to Plant for review 
MESSAGE #P07510 CROSS SPOT GLUE 
7.10 NO GLUE LINE 
7.10.1. If there are no glue lines, the maximum ply=3. If more than 3, set 
exception for the Plant 
MESSAGE #P07101 MAX 3 PLY FOR UNGLUED 
7.10.2. If there are any glue lines, each ply (paper) must have a glue 
line. If not, set exception for the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07102 APPROVE LOOSE COPIES IN SET 
7.11. STUB SIZE 
7.11.1. If the stub width is less than GLUE--SPECS--MINSTUB, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07135 MARGIN OUT OF SPEC 
7.11.2. CARBON INTERLEAVED: The stub size must be one of the following 
sizes: 
1/2" 
5/8" 
1" 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07112 GLUE: MINIMUM STUB 
7.11.3 If there is no carbon, the stub size may be any of the above, and: 
3/8" 
7.11.3.1. If there is no carbon, and if the KS Holes are slit off, the stub 
may be any of the above, and 1/4". If not, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P07113 MINIMUM STUB--NO CARBON 
7.11.4 If the stub size is 1/4" or 3/8", only one glue line is allowed in 
the stub. If there is more than one glue line in the stub, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07112 GLUE: MINIMUM STUB 
9. PUNCHES: Secondary 
The system will check the proposal to see if there are any punches. The 
following edits are to be used only if the punches are through all parts 
and carbons. If there are no punches, or if any punches are not through 
all parts and carbons, skip Rule 9 (see below: PRESS PUNCHES) 
NOTE: The location of punches will be determined as follows (any rules not 
expressly illustrated below have been described elsewhere in the 
specification): 
ROUND: Center to center 
ALL OTHERS: The lower left comer of a rectangle drawn around the punch. 
9.1. The system will compare the TYPE of punches on the PROPOSAL with the 
Data File: PUNCHES--TYPE 
9.1.1. For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES--PRODUCT--TYPE--SECONDARY 
(06-28-1) 
9.1.2. If found, update ORDER SPECS--DRILL=X (One punch unit required). If 
not found, set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P09120 PUNCH TYPE NOT AVAIL 
9.2 The system will compare the SIZE of punches on the PROPOSAL with the 
Data File: PUNCHES--SIZE 
9.2.1. For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES--PRODUCT--SIZE--SECONDARY 
(06-28-1) 
9.2.2. If found, update ORDER SPECS--DRILL=X (One punch unit required). If 
not found set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P09220 PUNCH SIZE NOT AVAIL 
9.3. If there is more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
horizontal plane then the distance between the first and second horizontal 
planes must be equal to or greater than PUNCH--PRODUCT--C C HORIZ. If not, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P09300 PUNCHES--HORIZ LOCATION 
9.4. If there is more than one punch, and they are not in the same vertical 
plane, then each vertical plane must be at least PUNCHES--CCVERT apart. If 
not set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P09400 PUNCHES--VERT LOCATION 
9.5. The system will check the location of the punch in relation to the 
edge of the form. The values are in the data file: PUNCHES--SECONDARY. If 
any of these edits fail, set flag for review by the Plant: 
9.5.1. Distance from the top of the form must be equal to or greater than: 
PUNCHES--TOP 
9.5.2. Distance from the bottom of the form must be equal to or greater 
than: PUNCHES--BOTTOM 
9.5.3. Distance from the left edge of the form must be equal to or greater 
than: PUNCHES--LEFT 
9.5.4. Distance from the right edge of the form must be equal to or greater 
than: PUNCHES--RIGHT. 
MESSAGE #P09540 PUNCH LOCATION 
9.6. If any punch in located in the stub of the form, update ORDER 
SPECS--SECONDARY--DRILL 
10. AFFIX LABEL 
10.1. The system will check the REORDER TYPE code on the Proposal. 
10.1.1. If the Reorder Type=NEW, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #139 LABEL AFFIX--NEW 
10.1.1.1. Must have Form 6347 (Affix Label Spec Sheet--see Screen 
11-02-61). If not, discontinue validation and return the Proposal to the 
Sales Rep. 
10.1.2. If Reorder Type=REORDER must have (6347-REV). If not, discontinue 
validation and return the Proposal to the Sales Rep. 
10.2. Update ORDER SPECS--SECOPS--AFFIX=X 
14. BOOKING: 
14.1 If there is BOOKING the system will compare the selected booking on 
the proposal with the DATA FILE: BOOK COVERS--STYLE. If the STYLE is not 
found for the product, set flag for review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE: 14001 BOOK COVER STYLE NOT AVAILABLE 
14.2. The system will sum the calipers of all the parts/carbons included in 
the booking stub. If the total caliper exceeds BOOKS--MAXCAL, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE: 14002 CALIPER EXCEEDS SPEC FOR STUB 
14.3. NOTE: NEED METHOD TO SUM ALL PAPERS, CALIPERS, CHIPBOARD AND 
COVER*OVERLAP. Cannot exceed 5/8" 
14.4 Data entry will request the number of staples per book. Update the 
MFG.PLAN: X STAPLES PER BOOK. 
14.5 If there are printed covers, there must be a Forms Design. For any 
printed cover, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE: 14003 PRINTED BOOK COVERS 
NOTE: The plant will update the MFG PLAN to indicate if the Book Covers are 
to be printed in House, or if they will be sub-contracted. 
15. PADDING 
15.1. Data Entry will determine if there is to be a backer on the front 
only, the back only, or both. 
15.1.1. Update the Manufacturing Plan: 
(Chipboard on front 
Chipboard on back 
Chipboard: front and back) 
15.2. Prior to processing this rule, the system will calculate the number 
of forms per carton--including the chipboard backer(s). 
15.3. If the number of forms/pad exceeds the forms/carton, set flag for 
review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P15300 ONLY (sets/ctn) ALLOWED PER PAD 
16. EDGE GLUE 
16.1. If any paper is not in GROUP A1 (CARBONLESS), set flag for return to 
Sales. 
MESSAGE #P16100 CARBONLESS PAPER ONLY--EDGE GLUE 
16.2. If EDGE GLUE is selected, update MFG PLAN=SECONDARY OPERATION. 
19. KS REMOVAL 
19.1. The system will check the Proposal for KS REMOVAL feature. If this 
feature is not on the Proposal, skip rule 19. 
19.2. If the TOTAL SET WEIGHT (sum of the basis weights for papers and 
carbons) on the Proposal is greater than: 125# set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P19200 MUST PRICE MANUALLY 
19.3. If the Proposal is marked for KS REMOVAL on the left and the right 
sides, the system will set a flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P19300 KS REMOVAL--BOTH SIDES 
19.5. Update Mfg. Plan: KS--REMOVAL (RIGHT, LEFT,) 
20. CHECK CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip edit 20. 
20.2. If there are consecutive numbers, check the Proposal to see if the 
Consecutive Numbers are marked: 
MICR MICR consecutive numbers are not to be counted in the number of 
Consecutive Numbers per form. If there are MICR numbers, either alone or 
in combination with some other type of numbering, do the validation for 
the appropriate numbers below, and then validate MICR numbers separately: 
Rule 20.5. 
PRESS See rule: 20.3 
COPYSAFE See rule: 20.4 
PRESS NUMBERS 
20.3. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: PRESS is on for: 
20.3.1 NAME If PRESS not on, set flag for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20310 PRESS NOS NOT AVAILABLE 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have PRESS turned on. 
20.3.2. FRMWIDTH: If the form width is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant 
MESSAGE #P20320 PRESS NOS--FORM WIDTH 
20.3.3. TYPE FACE If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20330 PRESS NOS--TYPE FACE 
20.3.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the minimum number 
of digits required in the Consecutive Number. 
The number of digits in the consecutive number must be =&lt;MAX CHAR. If not, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20340 TOO MANY DIGITS IN CONSEC NOS 
20.3.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE#P20350 PRESS NOS--SIZE 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive numbers are 
on one form: 
One Number See Rule 20.3.5.1 
Two Numbers See Rule 20.3.5.2. 
More than two See Rule 20.3.5.3. 
20.3.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.3.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.3.5.1.2. The system will check the location of the Consecutive Number: 
Distance from the top of the form must be =&lt;MINTOP 
Distance from the left edge must be =&lt;MINLEFT. 
Distance from the right edge must be =&lt;MINRIGHT. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 and ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS FEATURES=NUMBERS--TYPE 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20351 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS 
20.3.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.3.5.2.1. The system will check the distance between the Consecutive 
numbers: 
HORIZONTAL SEATION=0, or &gt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
HORIZONTAL SEATION&gt;0 AND &lt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
VERTICAL--SEATION=0, or &gt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
VERTICAL--SEATION&gt;0 and &lt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.3. If the PROPOSAL has more than one size, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20356 MORE THAN ONE STARTING NUMBER 
20.3.5.2.6. If any of the above edits cause 2 UNITS, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20357 TWO NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED 
20.3.5.3. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers on any ply, Set flag 
for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20358 MORE THAN 2 CONSEC. NUMBERS COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4. Check the ply on the Proposal. If the ply is &gt;6 set flag for the 
Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20400 MAXIMUM 6 PLY FOR COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.0. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: COLLATOR is on for: 
20.4.1. NAME If COLLATOR is not on, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20410 COPYSAFE NOS NOT AVAILABLE 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have COLLATOR turned on. 
20.4.2. FRMWIDTH If the form width is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20420 COPYSAFE NOS--FORM WIDTH 
20.4.3. TYPE FACE If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20430 COPYSAFE NOS--TYPE FACE 
20.4.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the minimum number 
of digits required in the Consecutive Number. The number of digits in the 
consecutive number must be =&lt;MAX CHAR. If not, set flag for review by the 
Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20440 TOO MANY DIGITS IN CONSEC NOS 
20.4.4.1. The number of digits in the consecutive number must be at least 
5. If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20441 MINIMUM 5 DIGITS IN COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected name, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20450 COPYSAFE NOS--SIZE 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive number are 
on one form: 
One Number See Rule: 20.4.5.1. 
Two Numbers See Rule: 20.4.5.2. 
More than two See Rule: 20.4.5.3. 
20.4.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.4.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.4.5.1.2. The system will check the location of the Consecutive Number: 
Distance from the top of the form must be &lt;MINTOP. If not, change the 
numbers to PRESS and perform the Validation Rules for PRESS NUMBERS (20.3) 
Distance from the left edge must be =&lt;MINLEFT. 
Distance from the right edge must be =&lt;MINRIGHT. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 and ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR FEATURES=NUMBERS--TYPE 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20451 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS 
20.4.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.4.5.2.1. The system will check the distance between the Consecutive 
numbers: 
HORIZONTAL SEATION=0, or &gt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
HORIZONTAL SEATION&gt;0 AND &lt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 
Units 
VERTICAL--SEATION=0, or &gt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
VERTICAL--SEATION&gt;0 and &lt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one size, ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20455 MORE THAN ONE STARTING NUMBER 
20.4.5.2.6. If any of the above edits cause 2 UNITS, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20456 TWO NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED 
20.4.5.4. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers on any ply, Set flag 
for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20454 MORE THAN 2 CONSEC. NUMBERS 
20.5 CONSECUTIVE NUMBER PREFIX/SUFFIX 
20.5.1. If there are more than 3 Alpha characters in the Consecutive 
Number Prefix and/or Suffix, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P20510 CONSC. NUMBER PREFIXISUFFIX TOO LONG 
21. CHECK PRESS PERFS 
21.0. If the STUB is at the TOP and/or BOTTOM of the form: 
If there are HORIZONTAL PERFS, use the rule for ALLEL PERFS 
If there are VERTICAL PERFS, use the rule for RT. ANGLE PERFS If the STUB 
is at the RIGHT and/or LEFT of the form: 
If there are HORIZONTAL PERFS, use the rule for RT. ANGLE PERFS 
If there are VERTICAL PERFS, use the rule for ALLEL perfs. 
21.1. DIAGONAL 
21.1.1. If PROPOSAL--PERFS--TYPE--DIAG, ORDER SPECS--PRESS FEATURES--DIAG=X 
21.2. RIGHT ANGLE 
21.2.1. For each ply: 
21.2.2. The system will determine the number of RT. ANGLE perfs on the 
order. (This is needed for TOPS) 
21.2.2.1. If the distance between RIGHT ANGLE PERFS=even multiple of the 
PRSLENGTH, update MFG. PLAN: PRESS FEATURE--RT. ANGLE PERF UNITS=1. 
21.2.2.2. If the distance between RIGHT ANGLE PERFS is not an even multiple 
of PRSLENGTH, update MFG PLAN: PRESS FEATURE--RT. ANGLE PERF UNITS=1. 
21.3. ALLEL 
21.3.1. For each ply: 
21.3.1.1. If there is Carbon on the order, and ALLEL PERFS are on all 
PLIES and Carbons, and in the same location on each PLY, update MFG PLAN: 
COLLATOR PERFS. 
Use edits: COLLATOR PERFS 
21.3.2. The system will determine the number of ALLEL perfs on the 
order. (This is required for TOPS). 
21.3.2.1. If the number of ALLEL perfs is greater than MAX NUM PERFS, 
update MFG PLAN: COLLATOR PERFS. 
Use edits: COLLATOR PERFS. 
21.3.3. If the distance between the ALLEL is less than the MULT PERF MIN 
DIST, update MFG PLAN: COLLATOR PERFS. 
Use edits: COLLATOR PERFS. 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
If there are any carbons, and there are any punches through all parts and 
carbons, see: SECONDARY OPERATIONS above. 
22.1. The system will check to see if the Punches are available for the 
Product. 
If not, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P22100 APPROVE PUNCHES FOR PRODUCT 
22.2. The system will check to see if the Punches are available on the 
Press. If not, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P22201 APPROVE PUNCHES FOR PRESS 
22.3. The system will check to see of the Punches are available in the 
selected size. If not, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P22300 APPROVE SIZE OF PRESS PUNCHES. 
22.4.1. If there are more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
vertical plane, then each vertical plane must be at least 27/18" apart. 
If not, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--PUNCHES=2 
30. CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM 
30.1. A construction diagram is required whenever the order does not meet 
the following specifications: 
A. Stub=5/8" 
B. Each carbon is glued to the back of the preceding part. 
C. No glue lines inside the KS Perf. 
30.2. If any of the above are false, MFG PLAN: CONSTRUCT=X 
30.3. If the order has SPOT GLUE, MFG PLAN: CONSTRUCT=X 
30.4. If there is a double stub, MFG PLAN: CONSTRUCT=X 
30.5. If the MFG PLAN: CONSTRUCT=X, then set flag for message to Sales: 
MESSAGE #P30500 CONSTRUCTION DIAGRAM REQUIRED 
31. PRESS DELIVERY ORDER SPECS--PRESS--DELIVERY=ROLL 
32. GUILLOTINE 
32.1. If the Form Width is not equal to SIZES--ZIPSET--CUSTOM--WIDTH, 
update MFG. PLAN=GUILLOTINE. 
39. CORNER CUT 
39.1 If there is a corner cut, update MFG PLAN: CORNER CUT. 
Limited Zipset Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Limited Zipset products: 7. Check 
Collator/Secondary Operations; 9. Punches, Secondary; 11. Transfer Tape; 
14. Booking; 15. Padding; 19. KS Removal; 20. Consecutive Numbers; 21. 
Check Press Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 27. Determine Number Wide; 41. 
Carbon; 47. Lockup; 50. Home Plant Assignment; and, 56. Non-Litho 
Printing. The functionality of each of these rules may be illustrated as 
follows (any rules not expressly illustrated below have been described 
elsewhere in the specification): 
7. CHECK COLLATOR/SECONDARY OPERATIONS 
7.1. If MFG PLAN=JUMBO, change PRODUCT to ZIPSET--CUSTOM 
MESSAGE #P07864 MAX 3 PLY FOR UNGLUED 
7.7 DOUBLE STUBS 
7.7.1. If there is more than one stub: 
7.7.1.1. All parts in the set must be One Standard Length, or One Standard 
Length plus 5/8". See DATAFILE: PRODUCT.XLS--WIDTHS. 
7.7.1.2 The stub length must be 5/8" for each stub. 
7.7.1.3. One double stub may contain 2 or 3 papers; 
7.7.1.4. If there are two double stubs, each may contain no more than 2 
papers. 
If the order exceeds these limitations, set flag for review by the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07003 SPECS EXCEED LIMITED ZIPSET 
7.8 Glue Line Location 
7.8.1. If there is more than one glue line on a form or carbon, up to two 
lines may be treated as a set. 
7.8.1.1. An area of 5/8" must be available for a set of glue lines. 
7.8.1.2. If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P07177 GLUE: MINIMUM STUB 
7.8.2. Up to two sets of glue lines may be located on a form. 
7.8.2.1. If there are more than two sets of glue lines, set flag for review 
by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P07004 TOO MANY GLUE LINES FOR LIMITED 
7.8.3. If there are two glue lines in a set, the distance between the lines 
(center to center) must be 11/32". If not, change product to ZIPSET 
CUSTOM. 
MESSAGE #P07005 GLUE LINE SPECS EXCEED LIMITED 
7.10 NO GLUE LINE 
7.10.1 If there are no glue lines, the maximum ply=1. If more than 1, set 
flag, send message to SALES: 
MESSAGE #P07865 MAX 1-PLY FOR UNGLUED 
7.11. STUB SIZE 
7.11.1. If the stub width is less than 5/8", set flag for review by the 
Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07135 MARGIN OUT OF SPEC 
7.11.2. CARBON INTERLEAVED: The stub size must be 5/8" or larger. 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07177 GLUE: MINIMUM STUB 
7.11.3 If there is no carbon, the stub size may be: 1/4" 
7.11.4 If the stub size is 1/4" or 3/8", only one glue line is allowed in 
the stub. If there is more than one glue line in the stub, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P07177 GLUE: MINIMUM STUB 
7.11.5 If the stub size is 1/4" or 3/8", there must be a 3/8" KS Removal 
feature. If not, set flag for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P07006 MUST HAVE 3/8" KS REMOVAL 
9. PUNCHES--Secondary 
This rule deals with Punching that is not done on the Press. Generally, if 
a Zipset Order requires punches that cannot be done on the press, this 
will result in a drilling operation. 
11. TRANSFER TAPE 
NOTE: Prior to processing this rule, GENERAL RULE 11. and Product Rule 11. 
should be processed. 
11.3. If there is more than one tape on any one ply, set flag to return to 
Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #VL863--ONLY ONE TRANSFER TAPE/PLY 
14. BOOKING 
14.4 If the order requires other than 2 staples per book, change the 
product to ZIPSET-CUSTOM 
14.5 If there are Printed Book Covers, change product to ZIPSET--CUSTOM 
14.5.1. If there are Consecutive Numbers on the Cover, change the product 
to ZIPSET--CUSTOM 
14.6 If the orders requires Chipboard Inserts, change the product to 
ZIPSET--CUSTOM. 
15. PADDING 
15.1. The number of forms/pad must be entered. The acceptable values are: 
One Ply=50 or 100 
More than one Ply=50 or 25 
15.1.1. If no quantity is entered, or if the quantity is not one of the 
above, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P15004 QTY/PAD NOT STANDARD 
15.1. If forms are to be padded, there must be a Chipboard backer. If not, 
set flag for Sales, and discontinue processing the order: 
MESSAGE: #P15002 CHIPBOARD BACKER REQUIRED 
15.3. Update the Manufacturing Plan: 
Chipboard on back 
19. KS REMOVAL 
Limited--Add 3/8" to width, and then trim off to get correct finished size. 
20. CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip edit 20. 
20.2. If there are consecutive numbers, check the Proposal to see if the 
Consecutive Numbers are marked: 
PRESS See rule: 20.3 
COPYSAFE See rule: 20.4 
PRESS NUMBERS 
20.3 If the ply is 1, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20301 CHANGE PRODUCT TO LIMITED SHEETS 
20.3.1. If the ply is greater than 1, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20311 PRESS NUMBERS NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4. Check the ply on the Proposal. If the ply is &gt;6 set flag for the 
Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20828 MAXIMUM 6 PLY FOR COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.0. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: COLLATOR is on for: 
20.4.1. NAME If COLLATOR is not on, set flag for review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20153 COPYSAFE NOS NOT AVAILABLE 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have COLLATOR turned on. 
20.4.2. FRMWIDTH If the form width is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20173 COPYSAFE NOS--FORM WIDTH 
MESSAGE #P20155 COPYSAFE NOS--TYPE FACE 
20.4.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the minimum number 
of digits required in the Consecutive Number. 
The number of digits in the consecutive number must be =&lt;MAX CHAR. 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20148 TOO MANY DIGITS IN CONSEC NOS 
20.4.4.1. The number of digits in the consecutive number must be at least 
4. If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20829 MINIMUM 4 DIGITS IN COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected name, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20156 COPYSAFE NOS--SIZE 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive number are 
on one form: 
One Number See Rule: 20.4.5.1. 
Two Numbers See Rule: 20.4.5.2. 
20.4.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.4.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.4.5.1.2. The system will check the location of the Consecutive Number: 
For Parallel Numbers, the minimum distance from the edge of the form to the 
left-bottom of the Consecutive number is 7/8". 
For Right Angle Numbers, there is no minimum distance from the edge of the 
form. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS--COLLATOR--NUMBERS=1 and ORDER 
SPECS--COLLATOR FEATURES=NUMBERS--TYPE 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20150 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS 
20.3.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
20.3.5.2.1. The system will check the distance between the Consecutive 
numbers on one form, and the distance between the Consecutive numbers on 
two successive forms. 
20.3.5.2.2 Parallel: (vertical) 
VERTICAL--SEATION must be at least 23/4". 
TRUE: Update MFG PLAN: COLLATOR NUMBERS 
FALSE: Set flag for Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE #P20352 CONSEC NUMBER SING NOT ALLOWED 
HORIZONTAL--SEATION must be at least 215/16". 
TRUE: Update MFG PLAN: COLLATOR NUMBERS 
FALSE: Set flag for Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE: #P20352 CONSEC NUMBER SING NOT ALLOWED 
20.3.5.2.3 Right Angle (Horizontal) 
HORIZONTAL--SEATION must be at least 33/16" for the numbers on one form. 
TRUE: Update MFG PLAN: COLLATOR NUMBERS 
FALSE: Set flag for Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE: #P20352 CONSEC NUMBER SING NOT ALLOWED 
VERTICAL--SEATION must be at least 211/16" for the numbers on one form, 
and for the numbers on two successive forms. 
TRUE: Update MFG PLAN: COLLATOR NUMBERS 
FALSE: Set flag for Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE: #P20352 CONSEC NUMBER SING NOT ALLOWED 
20.3.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, set flag for review by 
the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE: #P20252 CONSEC NUMBER SING NOT ALLOWED 
20.3.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one size, set flag for review by 
the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE: #P20353 ONLY ONE NUMBER SIZE ALLOWED 
20.3.5.2.6. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, set flag for 
review by the Sales Rep: 
MESSAGE: #P20354 ONLY ONE NUMBERING INK ALLOWED 
20.3.5.2.7. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set flag for review by the Sales rep: 
MESSAGE: #P20355 ONLY ONE STARTING NUMBER ALLOWED 
20.5 CONSECUTIVE NUMBER PREFIX/SUFFIX 
20.5.1. If there is more than 1 Alpha character in the Consecutive Number 
Prefix and/or Suffix, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P20510 CONSEC. NO. PREFIX/SUFFIX TOO LONG 
21. CHECK PRESS PERFS 
21.0. If the STUB is at the TOP and/or BOTTOM of the form: 
If there are HORIZONTAL PERFS, use the rule for ALLEL PERFS 
If there are VERTICAL PERFS, use the rule for RT. ANGLE PERFS 
If the STUB is at the RIGHT and/or LEFT of the form: 
If there are HORIZONTAL PERFS, use the rule for RT. ANGLE PERFS 
If there are VERTICAL PERFS, use the rule for ALLEL perfs. 
21.2. RIGHT ANGLE 
21.2.1. For each ply: 
21.2.2. Only one Right Angle perf per ply. If there is more than one, set 
flag for review by Sales: 
MESSAGE: #P21220 ONLY ONE RT. ANGLE PERF ALLOWED 
21.2.2.1. If the Stub Length is not: 41/4", 52/3", 81/2" 
Set flag for review by Sales: 
MESSAGE #P21221 RIGHT ANGLE PERF NOT ALLOWED 
21.2.3. If the RIGHT ANGLE Perf is not through PAPERS ONLY, set flag for 
review by Sales: 
MESSAGE #P21230 PERF THROUGH CARBON NOT ALLOWED. 
21.2.4. Update MFG PLAN: 1 RT. ANGLE PERF. 
21.3. ALLEL 
21.3.1. For each ply: 
21.3.2. Up to 4 ALLEL perfs per ply. If there are more than 4, set flag 
for review by Plant: 
MESSAGE: #P21231 ONLY 4 ALLEL PERFS ALLOWED 
21.3.3. Only one ALLEL PERF is allowed through the carbon. 
If there is more than one, set flag for review by Sales: 
MESSAGE #P21330 ONLY ONE PERF THROUGH CARBON ALLOWED 
21.3.4. Update MFG PLAN: 1 ALLEL PERF. 
21.4. DIAGONAL PERFS 
21.4.1. If any perf orientation=diagonal, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21410 DIAGONAL PERFS NOT AVAIL. ON LIMITED 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
If there are any carbons, and there are any punches through all parts and 
carbons, see: SECONDARY OPERATIONS above. 
22.1. The system will check to see if the Punches are available for this 
Product. 
22.1.2. If not found, set flag for review by Sales: 
MESSAGE #P22005 PUNCHES NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT 
22.2. If the punches are located in the Stub area, go to Rule #9--SECONDARY 
PUNCHES. 
22.3. Number of Punches 
22.3.1. If the Form Width=32/5", only one punch is allowed. If there is 
more than one go to Rule #9--SECONDARY PUNCHES. 
22.3.2. If the Form Width=81/2", 5 holes are allowed in the same Vertical 
Plane (Parallel to the Stub) or the same Horizontal Plane (right angle to 
the stub). 
22.3.2.1. If the plane is parallel to the stub, the holes must be 13/8" 
Center to Center 
If the plane is at right angles to the stub, the holes must be 21/8" Center 
to Center 
22.3.2.2. Holes must be 3/8" from edge of form--top or bottom 
22.3.2.3. All holes must be in the same plane, parallel to the stub. 
22.3.2.4. If any of the above are false, set flag for Sales: 
22.3.3. Up to 3 holes are allowed for other Widths. If there are more than 
3 holes, go to Rule #9--SECONDARY PUNCHES. 
22.3.3.1. The minimum distance Center to Center=21/2". If not, got to Rule 
#9--SECONDARY PUNCHES. 
22.3.4. If there are more than 3 holes, go to Rule #9--SECONDARY PUNCHES. 
22.3.5. If 2-hole, 3-hole or 5-hole punch has been selected, and there is 
any other punch on the form, go to Rule #9--SECONDARY PUNCHES. 
27. DETERMINE NUMBER WIDE 
27.1. All Limited Zipsets are 1 wide. 
41. Carbon 
41.1 If there is Face-up Carbon, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P41100 FACE UP CARBON NOT AVAILABLE ON LIMITED 
41.2. The minimum carbon dimension--perpendicular to the stub is 31/2". If 
less, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P41200 CARBON TOO SHORT FOR LIMITED 
41.3. If there is featheredge carbon, and the featheredge is not 1/2" or 
1/4", set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P41300 FEATHEREDGE LENGTH NOT AVAILABLE ON LIMITED 
41.4. If there is more than one parallel perforation on the carbon, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P41400 ONLY ONE VERTICAL PERF ON CARBON ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
47. LOCKUP 
47.1. For each color of printing there must be a clear area (NO PRINTING) 
across the form width, equal to or greater than 2/10" 
47.2. This area must be at the top and the bottom of the form. 
47.3. If there is sufficient LOCKUP, skip the balance of rule #47. 
47.4. If there is not sufficient area for LOCKUP on any plate on the 
proposal, set flag for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P47400 INSUFFICIENT LOCKUP FOR LIMITED 
56. NON-LITHO PRINTING 
56.1. If any non-litho printing features are on the order, the ink for the 
Non-Litho printing must be WARM RED. 
The Non-litho features are: TITLES, DISTINGUISHING FIGURES, STOCK PHRASES, 
PRESS CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS. 
56.2. If any other ink is selected for non-litho printing, set exception 
for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P56200 ONLY WARM RED INK IS ALLOWED FOR NON-LITHO PRINTING 
56.2.1. Discontinue Validation 
Continuous Singles Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Continuous Singles products: 9. 
Punches--Secondary; 10. Affix Label; 19. Ks Removal; 20. Consecutive 
Numbers; 21. Check Press Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 31. Press 
Delivery; 36. Pantographs; 49. MICR; and 50. Home Plant Assignment; 51. 
Security Features; 56. Non-Litho Printing. The functionality of each of 
these rules may be illustrated as follows (any rules not expressly 
illustrated below have been described elsewhere in the specification): 
9. PUNCHES--COLLATOR/SECONDARY: The system will check the proposal to see 
if there are any punches. The following edits are to be used only if the 
punches are through all parts and carbons. If there are no punches, or if 
any punches are not through all parts and carbons, skip Rule 9 (see below: 
PUNCHES--PRESS) 
9.1. The system will compare the TYPE of punches on the PROPOSAL with the 
Data File: PUNCHES--TYPE 
9.1.1. For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES--PRODUCT--TYPE--COLLATOR 
(06-28-1) 
9.1.2. If found, update ORDER SPECS--COLLATING--PUNCH-1=X (One punch unit 
required). If not found, set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P09137 PUNCH TYPE NOT AVAIL 
9.2 The system will compare the SIZE of punches on the PROPOSAL with the 
Data File: PUNCHES--SIZE 
9.2.1. For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES--PRODUCT--SIZE--COLLATOR 
(06-28-1) 
9.2.2. If found, update ORDER SPECS--COLLATING--PUNCH-1=X (One punch unit 
required). If not found set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P09220 PUNCH SIZE NOT AVAIL 
9.3. If there is more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
horizontal plane then the distance between the first and second horizontal 
planes must be equal to 1/2 FOLD LENGTH. If not, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P09300 PUNCHES--HORIZONTAL LOCATION 
9.4. If there is more than one punch, and they are not in the same vertical 
plane, then each vertical plane must be at least PUNCHES--CCVERT apart. If 
not, update ORDER SPECS--COLLATING--PUNCH-2=X (two punch units required.) 
10. AFFIX LABEL 
10.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if AFFIX LABEL is 
indicated. If not, skip Rule #10. 
10.2. The following must be available: 
10.2.1. A window on the form F3 file indicating "AFFIX LABEL". This window 
is to show the size and location of the label. 
10.2.1.1. If there is more than one AFFIXED LABEL on a copy, all the 
"WINDOWS" must be indicated on the F3 file. 
10.2.2. A separate F3 file showing the label itself, with the appropriate 
text if applicable. 
10.2.2.1. If there is more than one AFFIXED LABEL, and they are not the 
same, a separate F3 file must be available for each LABEL. 
10.2.3. Form #6347--AFFIX LABEL SPEC SHEET. 
If any of the above is not available, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #843 SPECS FOR AFFIXED LABEL 
10.3. The system will compare the label specifications on the proposal with 
the specifications in the Data File: LABEL AFFIX. 
10.3.1. Select LABEL AFFIX ID: LAB001 
10.3.1.1. If the label is circular, skip to rule #10.3.7. 
10.3.2. If the width of the label is less than MINWIDTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL 195 AFFIX LABEL--WIDTH 
10.3.3. If the width of the label is greater than MAXWIDTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL195 AFFIX LABEL--WIDTH 
10.3.4. If the depth of the label is less than MINDEPTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL196 AFFIX LABEL--DEPTH 
10.3.5. If the depth of the label is greater than MAXDEPTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL196 AFFIX LABEL--DEPTH 
10.3.6. If the ration of width to length is greater than RATIO, set flag 
for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL198 AFFIX LABEL--RATIO 
10.3.6.1. Skip Rule #10.3.7. and 10.3.8. 
10.3.7. If the label diameter is less than MINDIAM, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL197 AFFIX LABEL--DIAMETER 
10.3.8. If the label diameter is greater than MAXDIAM, set flag for review 
by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL197 AFFIX LABEL--DIAMETER 
10.3.9. If the edge of the label is less than MINEDGE from the edge of the 
form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.10. If the edge of the label is less than MINPERF from any perforation 
on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.11. If the edge of the label is less than MINPERF from any file hole 
on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.12. If the edge of the label is less than MINSE from any other 
label on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.13. If the basis weight of the form to which the label is affixed is 
less than MINWGT, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL200 AFFIX LABEL--PAPER WGT 
10.3.14. If the form width (not the label) is less than MINFORMWID, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL201 AFFIX LABEL--FORM WIDTH 
10.3.15. If the form width (not the label) is greater than MAXFORMWID, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL201 AFFIX LABEL--FORM WIDTH 
10.3.16. If the form length (not the label) is less than MINFORMLEN, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL202 AFFIX LABEL--FORM LENGTH 
10.3.17. If the form length (not the label) is greater than the MAXFORMLEN, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL202 AFFIX LABEL--FORM LENGTH 
10.3.18. If the fold length for the form (not the label) is less than 
MINFLDLEN, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL203 AFFIX LABEL--FOLD LENGTH 
10.4. Update ORDER SPECS--SECOPS--AFFIX=X 
10.5. The system will cross reference the Proposal for the Forms with the 
Proposal for the Labels. 
10.5.1. Update ORDER SPECS--AFFIX LABEL REF: (reference code or name.) 
19. KS REMOVAL 
19.1. The system will check the Proposal for KS REMOVAL feature. If this 
feature is not on the Proposal, skip rule 19. 
19.2. The system will compare the BASIS WEIGHT of the paper (and carbons) 
on the Proposal with the Data File: KS REMOVAL--MAXSET. If the total 
weight is greater than MAXSET, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE#157 
19.3 The system will compare the location of the KS REMOVAL stub on the 
Proposal with the Data File: KS REMOVAL--MINSTUB. If the KS REMOVAL stub 
is less than MINSUB, set a flag for review by the Plant. 
19.4. If the Proposal is marked for KS REMOVAL on both sides, the system 
will set a flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #158 
19.5. Update Order Specs: KS--REMOVAL 
20. CHECK CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip edit 20. 
20.1.1. MICR 
If there are MICR numbers, either alone or in combination with some other 
type of numbering, do the validation for the appropriate numbers below, 
and then validate MICR numbers separately: Rule #49 
20.2. The system will check the REORDER TYPE: 
20.2.1. EXACT REORDER: 
20.2.1.1. If there are changes to any of the following: Go to Rule #20.3. 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--NAME 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--SIZE 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--TYPE FACE 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--CHECK DIGIT 
20.2.1.2. If no starting consecutive number has been entered, and there was 
only one destination on the previous order, the system will add 1 to the 
ending number of the previous order, and use this as the starting number 
for the current order. Set a flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P20212 VERIFY STARTING NUMBER 
20.2.1.2.1. If the current order has more than one destination, or has 
number resets, the starting consecutive number must be entered for each 
destination and/or number reset. 
20.2.1.3. If a starting consecutive number has been entered, and the new 
starting number is lower than the ending number of the previous order, set 
a flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P20213 VERIFY STARTING NUMBER 
20.2.1.4. If there are no changes to the above skip Rule #20 until after 
Rule #50--HOME PLANT ASSIGNMENT. 
20.2.1.5. If the HOME PLANT=PREVIOUS PLANT, skip Rule #20. 
20.2.1.6. If the HOME PLANT does not equal the PREVIOUS PLANT, continue at 
Rule #20.3. 
20.2.2. REORDER WITH CHANGE: 
20.2.2.1. If there are changes to any of the above fields, and/or changes 
to the F3--CONSECUTIVE NUMBER AREA, such as: 
LOCATION OF CONSECUTIVE NUMBER 
DIRECTION OF NUMBER 
Go to Rule #20.3. 
20.2.2.2. If no starting consecutive number has been entered, and there was 
only one destination on the previous order, the system will add 1 to the 
ending number of the previous order, and use this as the starting number 
for the current order. Set a flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P20222 VERIFY STARTING NUMBER 
If a starting consecutive number has been entered, and the new starting 
number is lower than the ending number of the previous order, set a flag 
for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P20222 VERIFY STARTING NUMBER 
20.2.2.3. If there are no changes to the elements listed in rule 
#20.2.1.1., and there are no changes to the F3--CONSECUTIVE NUMBER AREA, 
skip Rule #20 until after Rule #50--HOME PLANT ASSIGNMENT. 
20.2.2.4. If the HOME PLANT does not equal the PREVIOUS PLANT, continue at 
Rule #20.3. 
20.2.3. REFERENCE ORDER: continue at 20.3. 
20.2.4. NEW ORDER: continue at 20.3. 
20.3. If there are consecutive numbers, check the Proposal to see if the 
Consecutive Numbers are marked: 
PRESS See rule: 20.4 
PRESS NUMBERS 
20.4. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: PRESS is on for: 
20.4.1 NAME If PRESS not on, set flag for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20410 PRESS NOS NOT AVAILABLE 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have PRESS turned on. 
20.4.2. FRMLEN If the form length is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant 
MESSAGE #P20421 PRESS NOS--FORM LENGTH 
20.4.3. TYPE FACE If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20431 PRESS NOS--TYPE FACE 
20.4.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will add the Proposal Quantity to the Starting Consecutive 
Number to determine the minimum number of digits required in the 
Consecutive Number. 
The number of digits in the consecutive number must be=&lt;MAX CHAR. If not, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20442 TOO MANY DIGITS IN CONSEC NOS 
20.4.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20451 PRESS NOS--SIZE 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive numbers are 
on one form: 
One Number See Rule 20.4.5.1 
Two Numbers See Rule 20.4.5.2. 
More than two See Rule 20.4.5.3. 
20.4.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.4.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.4.5.1.2. The system will check the location of the Consecutive Number: 
Distance from the top of the form must be =&lt;MINTOP 
Distance from the left edge must be =&lt;MINLEFT. 
Distance from the right edge must be =&lt;MINRIGHT. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 and ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS FEATURES=NUMBERS--TYPE 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20452 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS. 
20.4.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.4.5.2.1. The system will check the distance between the Consecutive 
numbers: 
HORIZONTAL SEATION=0, or &gt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
HORIZONTAL SEATION&gt;0 AND &lt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
VERTICAL--SEATION=0, or &gt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=1 Unit 
VERTICAL--SEATION&gt;0 and &lt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.3. If the PROPOSAL has more than one size, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, ORDER 
SPECS--PRESS--NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.4.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBER, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20455 MORE THAN ONE STARTING NUMBER 
20.4.5.2.6. If any of the above edits cause 2 UNITS, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20456 TWO NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED 
20.4.5.3. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers, Set flag for review 
by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20453 MORE THAN 2 CONSEC. NUMBERS 
21. CHECK PRESS PERFS 
21.1. If there are no perfs on the form, skip Rule #21 
21.2. Compare each perforation with the Feature Type to assure that the 
perf is available for the Product and Process. 
21.2.1. If not, set flag for review by Engineering 
MESSAGE #P21210 INVALID PERF FOR PRODUCT 
21.3. DIAGONAL PERF 
21.3.1. If the perf TYPE is DIAG, update ORDER SPECS--PRESS 
FEATURES--DIAG=X 
21.4. If there is more than one type (Feature List) of HORIZ PERF on the 
proposal, the following rules must be run for each type (e.g. Lefteredge, 
Standard, Score, etc.) 
21.5. LETTEREDGE 
21.5.1. If the FEATURE LIST=LETTEREDGE, assure that the PAPER for this ply 
is approved for LETTEREDGE PERF. 
21.5.1.1. If not, exception for Engineering: 
MESSAGE#P21511 APPROVE LETTEREDGE PAPER 
21.6 STANDARD 
21.6.1. HORIZONTAL PERFS 
21.6.1.1. If the distance between HORIZ PERFS is an even multiple of 
PRSLENGTH, update ORDER SPECS--PRESS FEATURES--HORIZ=1 
21.6.1.2. Determine the maximum number of Horizontal Perfs for one unit: 
(Cylinder)/(Press Size)*2 
21.6.1.3. If the number of HORIZ perfs exceeds the maximum number, update 
ORDER SPECS--PRESS FEATURES--HORIZ=2 
21.6.1.4. If the distance between HORIZ PERFS is not an even multiple of 
PRSLENGTH, ORDER SPECS--PRESS FEATURES--HORIZ=2 
21.6.2 If the total number of perfs exceeds the "maximum number of 
Horizontal Perfs*2 (see 21.6.1.2.) set flag for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE: #P21620 APPROVE HORIZONTAL PERFS. 
21.7. VERTICAL 
21.7.1. If there are no Vertical Perfs on the Proposal, skip Rule #21.7. 
21.7.2. If there is more than one type of VERT PERF on the proposal, each 
TYPE must be checked. 
21.7.3. If there is more than one PERF, the distance between the perfs must 
be equal or greater than PERFORATIONS--V-PERF NAME--MINDIST. If not, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P21730 APPROVE PERFS 
21.7.4. If there is more than one PERF, the number of perfs must be equal 
to or less than PERFORATIONS-V-PERF NAME-MAXNO. If not, set flag for 
review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P21740 APPROVE PERFS 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
22.1. The system will check the Punches to see if they are available for 
the Product. If not, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P22101 APPROVE PUNCHES 
22.2. The system will check to see if the Punches are available on the 
Press. If not, the validation will have to be processed in Rule 
#9--PUNCHES. 
22.4. If there is more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
horizontal plane then the second horizontal plane must be 1/2 FOLD LENGTH 
from the first. 
22.4.1. If there is more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
vertical plane, then each vertical plane must be at least 27/8" apart. 
If not, ORDER SPECS-PRESS-PUNCHES=2 
31. PRESS DELIVERY 
31.1. The system will check ORDER SPECS-COLLATING-TAPE. If X, update ORDER 
SPECS-PRESS-DELIVERY=ROLL 
31.2. If ORDER SPECS-COLLATING-TAPE is not X, update ORDER 
SPECS-PRESS-DELIVERY=FOLD 
36. PANTOGRAPHS 
36.1. Pantographs may be selected only from the Data File: Pantographs. 
36.2. If a pantograph is selected, the system will request the INK NUMBER 
for the Pantograph. 
36.3. The system will request the % of screen for the Pantograph. 
36.4. The system will request the angle of the Pantograph. 
36.5. If any of the above are missing, the screen cannot be completed. 
49. MICR 
A form may have MICR repetitive and/or MICR consecutive numbers. In either 
event, any proposal that specifies MICR must be processed through this 
validation. 
49.1. ORDER TYPE 
49.1.2. The system will check the REORDER TYPE, and execute the validation 
rules depending on the TYPE: 
49.1.2.1. EXACT REORDER: Rule #49.3. PAPER 
49.1.2.2. REORDER W/CHANGE: All rules 
49.1.2.3. NEW ORDER: All rules 
49.1.2.4. REFERENCE: All rules 
49.2. FORM SIZE: 
49.2.1. Minimum form width: 6" 
49.2.2. Minimum form length: 23/4" 
49.2.6. If any of the above edits fail, set flag for review by the Sales 
Rep. 
MESSAGE #VL848 FORM SIZE--MICR 
49.3. PAPER 
49.3.1. Any paper with MICR must be approved for MICR. See Data File: 
PAPER-MICR 
49.3.2. Minimum Basis Wgt: 24# 
49.3.3. If any paper is not OK for MICR, set flag for review by ENGR. 
MESSAGE #VL039 APPROVE PAPER FOR MICR 
49.4. INK 
49.4.1. Ink for MICR printing must be approved for MICR. See Data File: 
INK-MICR 
49.4.2. If any INK is not OK for MICR, set flag for review by ENGR 
MESSAGE #VL040 APPROVE INK FOR MICR 
49.5. CLEAR BAND 
49.5.1. An area, 5/8" deep, and extending 1/4" to the left edge of the form 
must be free of all other MICR ink. 
49.5.1.1. Printing in other inks--not MICR--may appear in this clear band. 
If any other ink is in this area, the system will check the Data File: 
INK-MICR to assure that the ink is not approved for MICR. 
49.5.2. If not true, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #VL849 MICR CLEAR BAND NOT CLEAR 
49.6. MICR AREA 
49.6.1. All MICR printing must be located within an area 1/2" deep, and 
parallel to the bottom edge of the form. 
49.6.2. The bottom edge of the MICR characters must be 3/16" from and 
parallel to the bottom of the form. 
49.6.3. If the above is not true, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #VL850 MICR PRINTING OUTSIDE MICR AREA 
49.7. CONSTRUCTION 
49.7.1. The form must have a slit or a KS-REMOVAL perf to the right of the 
MICR area. 
49.7.2. If the KS-REMOVAL perf is not specified for the right side, set 
flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #VL851 KS REMOVAL REQUIRED ON RIGHT 
50. HOME PLANT ASSIGNMENT 
50.1. MFG PLAN: COLLATING PUNCH: 
50.1.1. If there is a value in COLLATING--PUNCH, and the HOME PLANT is not 
DAY, change the HOME PLANT to DAY. 
50.2. FORM LENGTH 
50.9.2.1. If the HOME PLANT is FAY, and the form length is 31/4", change 
the HOME PLANT to MFG. 
50.3. UNION BUG 
50.3.1. If there is a Union bug, the HOME PLANT must be FAY. 
50.4. If there is TRANSFER TAPE on the order, and the HOME PLANT is DAY, 
change MFG PLAN--PRESS-DELIVERY to FOLD. 
Limited Continuous Singles Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Limited Continuous Singles products: 
1. Check Form Length; 2. Check Form Width; 6. Quantity; 20. Consecutive 
Numbers; 21. Check Press Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 31. Press 
Delivery; 34. Paper Specs; 47. Lockup; 49. MICR; 50. Home Plant 
Assignment; 55. Ink; and, 56. Non-Litho Printing. The functionality of 
each of these rules may be illustrated as follows (any rules not expressly 
illustrated below have been described elsewhere in the specification): 
6. QUANTITY 
6.1. MAXIMUM QUANTITY 
SAME AS STANSET-LIMITED 
20. CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip edit 20. 
20.2. The system will check the REORDER TYPE: 
20.2.1. If no starting consecutive number has been entered, and there was 
only one destination on the previous order, the system will add 1 to the 
ending number of the previous order, and use this as the starting number 
for the current order. Set a flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P20817 VERIFY STARTING NUMBER 
20.2.2. If the current order has more than one destination, or has number 
resets, the starting consecutive number must be entered for each 
destination and/or number reset. 
20.2.3. If a starting consecutive number has been entered, and the new 
starting number is lower than the ending number of the previous order, set 
a flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P20817 VERIFY STARTING NUMBER 
20.2. If there are consecutive numbers, check the Proposal to see if the 
Consecutive Numbers are marked: 
PRESS See rule: 20.3 
COPYSAFE See rule: 20.4 
PRESS NUMBERS 
20.3. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: PRESS is on for: 
20.3.1 NAME If PRESS not on, set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONS. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have PRESS turned on. 
20.3.2. FRMLEN If the form length is not available for the selected NAME, 
set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONS. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT 
20.3.3. TYPE FACE If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONS. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT 
20.3.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will add the Proposal Quantity to the Starting Consecutive 
Number to determine the minimum number of digits required in the 
Consecutive Number. 
The number of digits in the consecutive number must be =&lt;MAX CHAR. If not, 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONS. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT 
20.3.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONS. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive numbers are 
on one form: 
______________________________________ 
One Number See Rule 20.3.5.1 
Two Numbers See Rule 20.3.5.2. 
More than two See Rule 20.3.5.3. 
______________________________________ 
20.3.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.3.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.3.5.1.2. The system will check the location of the Consecutive Number: 
Distance from the top of the form must be =&lt;MINTOP 
Distance from the left edge must be =&lt;MINLEFT. 
Distance from the right edge must be =&lt;MINRIGHT. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=1 and ORDER SPECS-PRESS 
FEATURES=NUMBERS-TYPE 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20150 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS. 
20.3.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.3.5.2.1. The system will check the distance between the Consecutive 
numbers: 
HORIZONTAL SEATION=0, or &gt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=1 Unit 
VERTICAL-SEATION=0, or &gt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=1 Unit 
If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20150 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS. 
20.3.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has any of the following: 
More than one TYPE 
More than one size 
More than one NUMBERING INK 
More than two NUMBERS/FORM 
Set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONS. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4. Copysafe numbers are not available on Singles. If selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONS. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT MICR NUMBERS 
20.5. MICR Numbers are not available on this product. If selected, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20145 CONS. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PRODUCT MOD CHECK DIGIT 
20.6. Data entry will request if the Consecutive Numbers have a Check 
Digit. 
20.6.1. The there is no check digit, skip rule #20.6. 
20.6.2. If there is a check digit, Data Entry will request the following: 
20.6.2.1. Identification of the Modulous System (Data Entry will display a 
list of the MOD Check Digits that are available) 
20.6.2.2. Data Entry will request: "Is this form an exact reorder of the 
previous order, and the MOD Check Digit calculation the same as the 
previous order? 
20.6.2.2.1. If the response is YES, skip the balance of rule 20.6. 
20.6.2.2.2. If the response is NO, continue to the next edit: 20.6.2.3. 
20.6.2.3. Data Entry will request a sample calculation. This will be a 
free-form field with sufficient room to show the calculations. 
20.6.2.4. The sample calculation must be printed as part of the ORDER FORM 
at the plant. 
21. CHECK PRESS PERFS 
NOTE: Use rule #21 CHECK PRESS PERFS from LIMITED STANSET VALIDATION except 
do not run: 
21.4. LETTEREDGE PERFS 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
NOTE: Use rule #22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES, except do not run the two 
instructions immediately below: 
If punches are not through all parts and carbons, use the edits below. 
If any punches are through all parts and carbons, see: SECONDARY OPERATIONS 
above. 
31. PRESS DELIVERY 
31.1. Update ORDER SPECS: PRESS DELIVERY=FOLD 
Limited Continuous Singles Validation Rules (with MICR) 
The following rules are processed for Limited Continuous Singles products 
with MICR ink: 1. Check Form Length (see rule for Limited Continuous 
Singles--no MICR); 2. Check Form Width (see rule for Limited Continuous 
Singles--No MICR); 3. Check Ply; 6. Quantity (see rule for Limited Stanset 
With MICR); 20. Consecutive Numbers; 34. Paper Specs (see rule for Limited 
Stanset With MICR); and 49. MICR. The Following Rules May Also Be 
Processed: 21. Check Press Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 50. Home Plant 
Assignment; 31. Press Delivery; 41. Carbon; 47. Lockup; and, 56. Non-Litho 
Printing. The functionality of each of these rules may be illustrated as 
follows (any rules not expressly illustrated below have been described 
elsewhere in the specification): 
20. CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip edit 20. 
20.2. If there are consecutive numbers, check the Proposal to see if the 
Consecutive Numbers are marked: 
______________________________________ 
PRESS See rule: 20.3 
COPYSAFE See rule: 20.4 
______________________________________ 
PRESS NUMBERS 
Press Numbering is not available on this product, but to enable the Pricing 
Engine to price the order correctly, Validation will allow the selection 
of PRESS NUMBERS, but will use the rules for COPYSAFE NUMBERS. 
20.3. If Press Numbering is selected, use the following rules for COPY SAFE 
NUMBERING. 
COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.0. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: SECONDARY is on for: 
20.4.1. NAME If SECONDARY is not on, set flag for review by CSR 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have SECONDARY turned on. 
20.4.2. FRMLEN If the form length is not available for the selected NAME, 
set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
20.4.3. TYPE FACE If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
20.4.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the minimum number 
of digits required in the Consecutive Number. The number of digits in the 
consecutive number must be =&lt;MAXCHAR. If not, set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR PROD. 
20.4.4.1. The number of digits in the consecutive number must be at least 
5. If not, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20829 MINIMUM 5 DIGITS IN COPYSAFE NUMBERS 
20.4.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected name, 
set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P20156 COPYSAFE NOS--SIZE 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive number are 
on one form: 
______________________________________ 
One Number See Rule: 20.4.5.1. 
Two Numbers See Rule: 20.4.5.2. 
More than two See Rule: 20.4.5.3. 
______________________________________ 
20.4.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.4.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.4.5.1.2. Update MFG. PLAN--CONS. NOS. on NALE 
20.4.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM 
Validate all of above, and 
20.4.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, excluding MICR, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, excluding 
MICR, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.4.5.4. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers, excluding MICR on 
any ply, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONS NOS NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED MICR NUMBERS 
20.5. If there are MICR NUMBERS (Repetitive and/or Consecutive) see Rule 
#49. 
MOD CHECK DIGIT 
20.6. Data entry will request if the Consecutive Numbers have a Check 
Digit. 
20.6.1. The there is no check digit, skip rule #20.6. 
20.6.2. If there is a check digit, Data Entry will request the following: 
20.6.2.1. Identification of the Modulous System (Data Entry will display a 
list of the MOD Check Digits that are available) 
20.6.2.2. Data Entry will request: "Is this form an exact reorder of the 
previous order, and the MOD Check Digit calculation the same as the 
previous order? 
20.6.2.2.1. If the response is YES, skip the balance of rule 20.6. 
20.6.2.2.2. If the response is NO, continue to the next edit: 20.6.2.3. 
20.6.2.3. Data Entry will request a sample calculation. This will be a 
free-form field with sufficient room to show the calculations. 
20.6.2.4. The sample calculation must be printed as part of the ORDER FORM 
at the plant. 
Sheeted Singles Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Sheeted Singles: 5. Secondary 
Equipment; 8. Polywrap; 10. Affix Label; 14. Booking; 15. Gum Pad; 20. 
Consecutive Numbers; 21. Check Press Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 23. 
Packaging (optional); 31. Press Delivery; and, 52. Palletizing. For the 
purposes of this validation, sheeted singles are forms that will be 
delivered from the press in sheets. One-ply Forms that are delivered from 
the press in continuous strips, for subsequent operations, will be 
validated as singles. The sheeted singles product will be split into two 
products: standard sheeted singles and laser sheeted singles. Since most 
of the rules will be applicable to both products, only one set of rules 
will be developed, but each rule will stipulate standard or laser where 
applicable. The distinction between the two products is necessary because 
many of the values contained in the Data Files will be different depending 
on the type of sheeted singles product. The functionality of each of these 
rules may be illustrated as follows (any rules not expressly illustrated 
below have been described elsewhere in the specification): 
5. CHECK SECONDARY EQUIPMENT 
STANDARD 
5.2. CONSECUTIVE NUMBER IN STACK 
5.2.1. If there are no consecutive numbers on the forms, skip this rule. 
5.2.1.1. If the CSR has note indicated TOP or BOTTOM for the Consecutive 
Numbers in a stack, set exception for the CSR 
MESSAGE #P05210 HIGH NUMBERS ON TOP or BOTTOM? 
5.2.1.2. Update ORDER SPECS: USAGE-NUMBERS=(HIGH NUMBERS ON TOP or HIGH 
NUMBERS ON BOTTOM) 
LASER 
5.1. SIMPLEX of DUPLEX 
5.1.1. The system will ask the Sales Rep if the form are SIMPLEX or DUPLEX. 
This will require a response. 
5.1.2. Update ORDER SPECS: USAGE-IMAGING=(SIMPLEX or DUPLEX) 
8. POLYWRAP 
STANDARD 
8.1. CHIPBOARD. The DATA ENTRY process will request if there are to be 
chipboards on TOP and/or BOTTOM. 
8.6.1. If there are to be chipboards, add one or both of the following 
messages to the order: 
MESSAGE #C08509 CHIPBOARD ON TOP 
MESSAGE #C08510 CHIPBOARD ON BOTTOM 
LASER 
8.2. CHIPBOARD. The system will add both messages to the order: 
MESSAGE #C08509 CHIPBOARD ON TOP 
MESSAGE #C08510 CHIPBOARD ON BOTTOM 
10. AFFIX LABEL 
10.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if AFFIX LABEL is 
indicated. If not, skip Rule #10. 
10.2. The following must be available: 
10.2.1. A window on the form F3 file indicating "AFFIX LABEL". This window 
is to show the size and location of the label. 
10.2.1.1. If there is more than one AFFIXED LABEL on a copy, all the 
`WINDOWS` must be indicated on the F3 file. 
10.2.2. A separate F3 file showing the label itself, with the appropriate 
text if applicable. 
10.2.2.1. If there is more than one AFFIXED LABEL, and they are not the 
same, a separate F3 file must be available for each LABEL. 
10.2.3. Form #6347--AFFIX LABEL SPEC SHEET. 
If any of the above is not available, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #843 SPECS FOR AFFIXED LABEL 
10.3. The system will compare the label specifications on the proposal with 
the specifications in the Data File: LABEL AFFIX. 
10.3.1. Select LABEL AFFIX ID: LAB001 
10.3.1.1. If the label is circular, skip to rule #10.3.7. 
10.3.2. If the width of the label is less than MINWIDTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL195 AFFIX LABEL--WIDTH 
10.3.3. If the width of the label is greater than MAXWIDTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL195 AFFIX LABEL--WIDTH 
10.3.4. If the depth of the label is less than MINDEPTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL196 AFFIX LABEL--DEPTH 
10.3.5. If the depth of the label is greater than MAXDEPTH, set flag for 
review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #VL196 AFFIX LABEL--DEPTH 
10.3.6. If the ration of width to length is greater than RATIO, set flag 
for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL198 AFFIX LABEL--RATIO 
10.3.6.1. Skip Rule #10.3.7. and 10.3.8. 
10.3.7. If the label diameter is less than MINDIAM, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL197 AFFIX LABEL--DIAMETER 
10.3.8. If the label diameter is greater than MAXDIAM, set flag for review 
by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL197 AFFIX LABEL--DIAMETER 
10.3.9. If the edge of the label is less than MINEDGE from the edge of the 
form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.10. If the edge of the label is less than MINPERF from any perforation 
on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.11. If the edge of the label is less than MINPERF from any file hole 
on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.12. If the edge of the label is less than MINSE from any other 
label on the form, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL199 AFFIX LABEL--LOCATION 
10.3.13. If the basis weight of the form to which the label is affixed is 
less than MINWGT, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL200 AFFIX LABEL--PAPER WGT 
10.3.14. If the form width (not the label) is less than MINFORMWID, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL201 AFFIX LABEL--FORM WIDTH 
10.3.15. If the form width (not the label) is greater than MAXFORMWID, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL201 AFFIX LABEL--FORM WIDTH 
10.3.16. If the form length (not the label) is less than MINFORMLEN, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL202 AFFIX LABEL--FORM LENGTH 
10.3.17. If the form length (not the label) is greater than the MAXFORMLEN, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL202 AFFIX LABEL--FORM LENGTH 
10.3.18. If the fold length for the form (not the label) is less than 
MINFLDLEN, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #VL203 AFFIX LABEL--FOLD LENGTH 
10.4. Update ORDER SPECS-SECOPS-AFFIX=X 
10.5. The system will cross reference the Proposal for the Forms with the 
Proposal for the Labels. 
10.5.1. Update ORDER SPECS--AFFIX LABEL REF: (reference code or name.) 
14. BOOKING 
14.1. The system will check the Proposal for BOOKING. If this feature is 
not on the Proposal, skip rule 14. 
14.2. The system will compare the STYLE of cover on the proposal with the 
file: BOOKS--STYLE for the Product. 
14.3. The system will check the quantity/book for the selected style. 
14.4. The system will check to see if there is any printing on the cover. 
14.4.1. CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS. 
NOTE: BOOK COVER NUMBERS will be 3/16" Gothic. If anything else is 
required, it will have to be entered in Special Instructions. 
If there are consecutive numbers on the cover, the starting consecutive 
number must be entered. If not, set flag for correction by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P14804 STARTING CONSEC. NO. 
14.4.1.1. There must be an F3 File showing the location of the consecutive 
number. If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P14854 F3 LOCATION: BOOK NUMBERS 
14.4.2. OTHER PRINTING 
If there is any other printing on the cover, the Ink for the PRINTED COVER 
must be specified. If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P14855 INK for BOOK COVER 
14.4.2.1. There must be an F3 File showing the printing for the cover. If 
not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P14856 F3 for BOOK COVER PRINTING 
14.5. Update ORDER SPECS: 
BOOKS=Selected Style 
BOOK COVER NUMBERS=Y 
BOOK COVER NUMBER INK= 
BOOK COVER INK= 
QTY/BOOK=Selected Quantity 
STANDARD 
15. PADDING 
15.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there is Padding. If 
there is no padding, skip edit 15. 
15.2. If there is Padding, the system will check to see if there is an 
entry in SETS/PAD. If not, set flag and return to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P15L840 MUST HAVE SETS/PAD 
15.3. The system will check: KING--PADS for the sets/pad. 
15.3.1. If it is found, update ORDER SPECS--QTY/PAD. 
15.3.2. If not found, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P15188 SPECIAL SETS/KAGE 
15.4. The system will check to see if the location for the padded edge has 
been entered. Acceptable entries are: 
TOP, BOTTOM, LEFT, RIGHT 
If one of these locations has not been entered, set a flag for review by 
the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P15842 PADDED EDGE REQUIRED 
LASER 
Not available 
20. CHECK CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip edit 20. 
PRESS NUMBERS 
20.3. Check the file: CONSNOS to see if the flag: PRESS is on for: 
20.3.1 NAME If PRESS not on, set flag for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20310 PRESS NOS NOT AVAILABLE 
For the following edits, check only those elements in the CONSNOS file that 
have PRESS turned on. 
20.3.2. FRMLEN If the form length is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant 
MESSAGE #P20146 PRESS NOS--FORM LENGTH 
20.3.3. TYPE FACE If the TYPE FACE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20147 PRESS NOS--TYPE FACE 
20.3.4. NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
The system will use the Proposal Quantity to determine the minimum number 
of digits required in the Consecutive Number. 
The number of digits in the consecutive number must be =&lt;MAX CHAR. If not, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20148 TOO MANY DIGITS IN CONSEC NOS 
20.3.5. NAME SIZE If the NAME SIZE is not available for the selected NAME, 
set flag for review by the plant. 
MESSAGE #P20149 PRESS NOS--SIZE 
The system will check the Proposal to see how many consecutive numbers are 
on one form: 
One Number See Rule 20.3.5.1 
Two Numbers See Rule 20.3.5.2. 
More than two See Rule 20.3.5.3. 
20.3.5.1. ONE NUMBER PER FORM 
20.3.5.1.1. The orientation of the number (Regular, Right Angle, etc. will 
be part of the NAME, and does not have to be validated. 
20.3.5.1.2. The system will check the location of the Consecutive Number: 
Distance from the top of the form must be =&lt;MINTOP 
Distance from the left edge must be =&lt;MINLEFT. 
Distance from the right edge must be =&lt;MINRIGHT. 
If ALL of above are true, ORDER SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=1 and ORDER SPECS-PRESS 
FEATURES=NUMBERS-TYPE 
If not, set flag for review by the Plant: 
MESSAGE #P20150 LOCATION OF CONS. NOS 
20.3.5.2. TWO NUMBERS PER FORM Validate all of above, and 
20.3.5.2.1. The system will check the distance between the Consecutive 
numbers: 
HORIZONTAL SEATION 0, or &gt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=1 Unit 
HORIZONTAL SEATION&gt;0 AND &lt;MINHORIZ ORDER SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=2 Units 
VERTICAL-SEATION=0, or &gt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=1 Unit 
VERTICAL-SEATION&gt;0 and &lt;MINVERT, ORDER SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.2. If the PROPOSAL has more than one TYPE, ORDER 
SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.3. If the PROPOSAL has more than one size, ORDER 
SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.4. If the PROPOSAL has more than one NUMBERING INK, ORDER 
SPECS-PRESS-NUMBERS=2 Units 
20.3.5.2.5. If the PROPOSAL has more than one starting CONSEC NUMBERS on 
any ply, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20151 MORE THAN ONE STARTING NUMBER 
20.3.5.2.6. If any of the above edits cause 2 UNITS, set flag for review by 
the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P20157 TWO NUMBER UNITS REQUIRED 
20.3.5.3. MORE THAN TWO NUMBERS/FORM 
If the PROPOSAL has more than two consecutive numbers on any ply, Set flag 
for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P20152 MORE THAN 2 CONSEC. NUMBERS 
MICR NUMBERS 
20.5. If there are MICR NUMBERS (Repetitive and/or Consecutive) see Rule 
#49. 
MOD CHECK DIGIT 
20.6. Data entry will request if the Consecutive Numbers have a Check 
Digit. 
20.6.1. The there is no check digit, skip rule #20.6. 
20.6.2. If there is a check digit, Data Entry will request the following: 
20.6.2.1. Identification of the Modulous System (Data Entry will display a 
list of the MOD Check Digits that are available) 
20.6.2.2. Data Entry will request: "Is this form an exact reorder of the 
previous order, and the MOD Check Digit calculation the same as the 
previous order? 
20.6.2.2.1. If the response is YES, skip the balance of rule 20.6. 
20.6.2.2.2. If the response is NO, continue to the next edit: 20.6.2.3. 
20.6.2.3. Data Entry will request a sample calculation. This will be a 
free-form field with sufficient room to show the calculations. 
20.6.2.4. The sample calculation must be printed as part of the ORDER FORM 
at the plant. 
21. CHECK PRESS PERFS 
21.5. PERF CUTS 
21.5.1. Reorder. If the proposal is a reorder, use the rules in 21.5.2. 
21.5.1.1. If the order is not a reorder, skip this rule. 
21.5.2. REORDER 
21.5.2.1. Compare each of the following specs on the proposal with the 
specs on the previous order. If any untrue statement is encountered, skip 
the balance of 21.5.2. and go to 21.5.3. 
21.5.2.2. The location of all perfs on the proposal must be identical to 
the location of the perfs on the previous order. 
21.5.2.3. The paper on the proposal must be identical to the paper on the 
previous order. 
21.5.2.4. The PRIMARY WRITING DEVICE on the proposal must be the same as 
the PRIMARY WRITING DEVICE on the previous order. 
21.5.2.5. The SECONDARY EQUIPMENT on the proposal must be the same as the 
SECONDARY EQUIPMENT on the previous order. 
21.5.2.50. Update the proposal with the perf cut information from the 
previous order: 
For each Horizontal Perf: 
HORIZONTAL=(from previous) 
For each Vertical Perf: 
VERTICAL PERF=(from previous) 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
22.1. Select: PROPOSAL DATA--PUNCHES 
22.1.1. BLANK--proceed to next edit 
22.2. PROPOSAL DATA: PUNCHES-TYPE 
For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES AVAIL 
22.2.1. If not found, set flag for review by the Plant 
MESSAGE #P22137 PUNCH TYPE NOT AVAILABLE 
22.2.2. If TYPE=CORNER CUT, skip to Rule #22.5 
22.3. PROPOSAL DATA: PUNCHES-SIZE 
For acceptable values SEE: PUNCHES AVAIL-PRODUCT-SIZE 
22.3.1. If size not turned on, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P22139 PUNCH SIZE NOT AVAILABLE 
22.4. If there are more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
horizontal plane then the second horizontal plane must be 1/2 FOLD LENGTH 
from the first. 
22.4.1. If there are more than one punch, and they are not in the same 
vertical plane, then each vertical plane must be at least 27/8" apart. 
If not, ORDER SPECS-PRESS-PUNCHES=2 
22.4.2. Skip balance of rule #22. 
22.5. CORNER CUT 
22.5.1. Data Entry will specify the location of the Corner Cut(s). 
Acceptable values are: 
RT, LT, RB, LB--any combination. 
22.5.2. Update ORDER SPECS-PRESS-PUNCHES+1 
23. KAGING 
If STANDARD KING is selected, use the rules following. 
If LASERPAK is selected, skip to Rule #23L--LASERPAK STANDARD 
23.1. The system will calculate STANDARD KING--SHEETED SINGLES. 
23.1.1. Refer to the structure: PAPER for the caliper. 
23.1.1.1. If any paper in the set does not have a CALIPER, set a flag for 
Engineering to enter the Caliper into the PAPER file. 
MESSAGE #P23038 (WGT, COL, TYPE) NEEDS CALIPER 
23.1.2. If the Proposal has any features that are listed in the structure: 
FEATURES, the system will add the caliper for that feature to the PAPER 
Caliper. 
23.1.3. COMBINATION OF FEATURES. If there is a combination of more than one 
different FEATURE on the proposal, use the caliper of the FEATURE with the 
highest caliper only, and delete the caliper for the other features. 
23.1.4. The system will select the proper column for determining STANDARD 
KING. The options are: 
1. SINGLES--NO PERF 
Use for one ply, with no perforations. 
2. SINGLES-PERFORATED 
Use for one ply, with one or more perforations. 
23.1.5. The system will refer to the KING CHART--TOTAL CALIPER, and the 
appropriate column as selected above to determine the number of 
forms/stack. 
If the exact TOTAL CALIPER is not in the list, use the next higher TOTAL 
SET CALIPER. 
23.1.7 Update ORDER SPECS-KING-STD QTY 
23.2. CALCULATE K HEIGHT 
23.2.1. The pack height obtained in the above rule is for a 12" high pack. 
23.2.2. The system will determine the height of a STANDARD CARTON 
23.2.2.1. FRMWIDTH=ORDER SPECS-FRMWIDTH FRMLENGTH=ORDER SPECS-FRMLENGTH 
23.2.2.2. Select FRMWIDTH and FRMLENGTH from the Data File: K HEIGHT. 
23.2.2.3. If the FRMWIDTH or FRMLENGTH is not in file, use the next higher 
FRMWIDTH and/or FRMLENGTH. 
23.2.2.4. Update ORDER SPECS-KING-STD HEIGHT=Height of carton 
23.2.2.5. If ORDER SPECS-KING-STD HEIGHT is not 12", calculate the 
number of sets in the STD HEIGHT. 
23.2.2.6. Update ORDER SPECS-KING-STD QTY 
23.3. The system will determine the number of stacks in a STANDARD CARTON. 
23.3.1. Refer to the file: K HEIGHT. Using the FRMWIDTH and FRMLENGTH 
selected above, select the KS/CTN. 
23.3.2. Update ORDER SPECS-KING-STD STACKS/CTN=(1,2,etc) STACKS/CTN 
23.6. The system will check to see if the Proposal is for a New order, 
Reorder, or Reference Order. 
23.6.1. Skip to the appropriate rule, depending on the type of previous 
order: 
REORDER Skip to rule: 23.7. 
REFERENCE Skip to rule: 23.7. 
NEW ORDER Skip to rule: 23.8. 
23.7. REORDER 
23.7.1. The system will compare the Proposal with the specifications on the 
previous order. 
Product 
Type of product 
Form Width 
Form length 
Basis weight of paper 
Number of perforations (horizontal and vertical) 
Affix Label 
Material 
Location 
Transfer Tape 
Reinforcement Patch 
23.7.2. If any of the elements listed above is different from the previous 
order, skip to RULE: 23.8.--NEW ORDER. 
23.7.2.1. If the Sales Rep has not specified a quantity per pack or carton, 
update ORDER SPECS STD QTY with the quantity/pack or carton from the 
previous order. 
23.7.2.2. If the quantity per carton is within the K QUANTITY VARIANCE 
of the calculated quantity, update ORDER SPECS: STANDARD KING=X 
23.7.2.3. If the quantity per carton is not within the K QUANTITY 
VARIANCE, update ORDER SPECS: SPECIAL KING=X. 
23.7.2.2. Skip TO 23.7.4. MORE THAN ONE TYPE OF KING 
23.7.3. If the Sales Rep has entered the quantity per pack or carton, 
compare the quantity entered with the calculated quantity per pack or 
carton. 
23.7.3.1. If the entered quantity is within the K QUANTITY VARIANCE, 
update ORDER SPECS: STANDARD KING=X 
23.7.3.2. If it is not within the K QUANTITY VARIANCE, update ORDER 
SPECS: SPECIAL KING=X 
23.7.4. MORE THAN ONE TYPE OF KING If more than one type of packing is 
specified, the quantity per carton/pack must be specified for the smallest 
unit of packaging. All other units must be a multiple of this unit. If 
not, set flag and return Proposal to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P23833 CTN QTY NOT A MULTIPLE OF K QTY 
23.8. NEW ORDER 
23.8.1. If no QTY/CTN was entered, and if no TYPE has been selected, skip 
the balance of rule #23. 
23.8.2. If a TYPE has been selected, and a quantity entered for that type: 
23.8.2.1. Check the Data File: KAGING to see if the type is available 
for the Product. If not, set flag and return to Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P23835 KAGING NOT AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRODUCT 
23.8.3. If the Sales Rep has entered a quantity per pack calculate the 
Number of KS/CTN and the QTY/CTN. 
23.8.3.1. If more than one type of packaging has been selected, the system 
will start with the type having the smallest number of forms/pack. 
23.8.3.2. Calculate the height of one package. 
23.8.3.2.1. If the height of one package is greater than KAGING-MAXK, 
set a flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #G08187 K HEIGHT EXCEEDS SPECS 
23.8.3.3. Calculate the number of packages that will fit into STD HEIGHT, 
without exceeding STD HEIGHT. 
23.8.3.4. Multiply the number of packages by ORDER SPECS-STD STKS/CTN 
23.8.3.5. Update ORDER SPECS-KING-KS/CTN. 
23.8.4. Compare the QTY/CTN with the STD QTY. 
23.8.4.1. If the difference is within the K QUANTITY VARIANCE of the STD 
QTY, update ORDER SPECS: STANDARD KING=X 
23.8.5. If the Sales Rep has entered a quantity per carton, compare the 
entered quantity per carton with STD QTY. 
23.8.5.1. If the difference is within the K QUANTITY VARIANCE, update 
ORDER SPECS: STANDARD KING=X 
23.8.5.2. If the difference is not within the K QUANTITY VARIANCE, 
update ORDER SPECS: SPECIAL KING=X 
23.8.6. If there is more than on TYPE of package specified, the quantity 
per package must be equal to or a multiple of the number of forms in the 
smallest package. If not, set a flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P23833 CTN QTY MOT A MULTIPLE OF K QTY 
23L. KAGING 
LASERPAK 
23L.1. The system will calculate LASERPAK 
23L.1.1 If any of the following data has been entered, exception to CSR: 
KAGING (other than LASER K, including: Quantity per Pack 
INNER KAGING: (any) 
TRANSFER TAPE 
EYELET 
REINFORCEMENT PATCH 
REMOIST STRIP 
BINDERY (ANY) 
MESSAGE: #P23110 (*******) NOT ALLOWED FOR LASERK 
23L.1.1. The LASERPAK Packaging will be used for the following: 
______________________________________ 
BASIS WT. QUANTITY 
______________________________________ 
20 2500 
24 2000 
______________________________________ 
If the Basis Weight of the Paper is any other than 20# or 24#, exception to 
the Plant: 
MESSAGE: #P23111 FURNISH QUANTITY FOR LASER K 
23L.1.2 Update MFG PLAN: LASERK 
Update MFG PLAN: QTY per CARTON 
Update MFG PLAN: CARTON HEIGHT=10" 
31. PRESS DELIVERY 
31.1. If the proposal has AFFIX LABEL: 
ORDER SPECS-PRESS-DELIVERY=ROLL 
31.2. All other proposals: 
ORDER SPECS-PRESS-DELIVERY=SHEETER 
52. LETIZING 
52.1. Standard Palletizing is allowed. If any other type is selected, set 
exception for Plant: 
MESSAGE #P52100 SPECIAL LETIZING 
52.2. If LASER K had been selected, the order quantity (with overrun) 
must be at least 170,000 or a greater multiple of 170000. If any other 
quantity is specified, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P52200 LASER K LETS MUST BE 170000 
Limited Sheeted Singles Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Limited Sheeted Singles: 20. 
Consecutive Numbers; 21. Check Press Perfs; 22. Check Press Punches; 27. 
Determine Number Wide; 31. Press Delivery; and, 32. Guillotine. 
Additionally, the following rules from custom sheeted singles are 
processed for limited sheeted singles: 5. Check Secondary Equipment; 15. 
Padding; and, 52. Palletizing. The functionality of each of these rules 
may be illustrated as follows (any rules not expressly illustrated below 
have been described elsewhere in the specification): 
20. CHECK CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
20.1. One Regular Consecutive Number (in addition to MICR) can be done on 
the press. If there is more than one consecutive number, or more than one 
MICR number, skip to rule #20.2 SECONDARY OPERATION. 
20.1.1. The system will check the SIZE and TYPE FACE. Only the following 
are allowed: 
______________________________________ 
SIZE FACE 
3/16 GOTHIC 
______________________________________ 
If any other size or face is selected, skip to rule #20.2. 
SECONDARY OPERATION 
20.1.2. If the above rule is true, and there are no other consecutive 
numbers except MICR, update MFG PLAN=PRESS CONSEC. NOS. 
20.2 SECONDARY OPERATION 
20.2.1. The system will check to see if the selected Consecutive Number 
meets ALL of the following criteria: 
20.2.1.1. Size available for this Product 
20.2.1.2. Face available for this Product 
20.2.1.3. Available for SECONDARY Operation 
20.2.1.4. The maximum number of digits=9 
20.2.1.5. The minimum number of digits=4 
20.2.2. If any of the above edits fail, set flag for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20002 CONSEC. NOS. NOT AVAILABLE FOR LIMITED 
20.3. Up to 3 Consecutive Numbers (not including MICR Numbers) are 
available. 
20.3.1. The system will check the distance between the Consecutive Numbers: 
VERTICAL SEATION=Even multiple of 11" (32/3 or 51/2). If not, set 
exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P20310 NUMBER LOCATION NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
20.4. CONSEC. NUMBER INK: 
20.4.1. Only MICR Black (001) or WARM RED is allowed. If any other Consec. 
Number Ink is selected, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE: P20009 CONSEC. NO. INK NOT AVAIL FOR LIMITED 
20.4.2. If the Regular Consecutive Numbers and the MICR Numbers are the 
same ink, update MFG. PLAN=1pass. 
20.4.3. If the Regular consecutive Numbers are other than the MICR ink, 
update MFG. PLAN=2 passes. 
20.5. MICR NUMBERS If there are MICR NUMBERS (Repetitive and/or 
Consecutive) see Rule #49. 
21. CHECK PRESS PERFS 
21.1. If there are Diagonal perfs, set flag for review by the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21001 DIAG PERF NOT AVAIL FOR PRODUCT 
21.2. HORIZONTAL (Right Angle) 
21.2.1. One full Right Angle perf is allowed anywhere on the form. 
21.2.2. If there is more than one Right Angle perf, the distance apart must 
be 32/3" and/or 71/3". If not, set flag for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21002 PERFS NOT AVAIL FOR PRODUCT 
21.3. VERTICAL (Parallel) 
21.3.1. Up to 4 parallel perfs are allowed per form. If there are more than 
4, set exception for CSR 
MESSAGE #P21310 MAX: 4 ALLEL PERFS 
21.3.2. Each parallel perf must be at least 1" apart. If not, set exception 
for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P21320 ALLEL PERFS TOO CLOSE 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
22.1. Only 1/4" round punches are available. If any other punches are 
selected, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22005 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.4. Up to 7 punches are allowed in a Horizontal Row. Only one Horizontal 
row is allowed. These may be at the TOP or BOTTOM of the form. If there 
are more than 7, set exception for Plant: 
MESSAGE #P22140 TOO MANY PUNCHES IN ROW 
22.5. Up to 7 punches are allowed in a Vertical Row. Only one Vertical row 
is allowed. The location of the Punches will depend on the Form Length. 
All distances are from the TOP edge of the form to the center of the hole: 
41/4" Length: 3/4, 11/2, 2, 21/4, 23/4, 31/2 
81/2" Length: 3/4, 1, 11/4, 11/2, 13/4, 2, 21/4, 21/2, 23/4, 3, 31/4, 31/2, 
4, 41/4, 41/2, 5, 51/4, 51/2, 53/4, 6, 61/4, 61/2, 63/4, 7, 71/4, 71/2, 
73/4 
If the punches are in any other location, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE: #P22500 LOCATION OF PUNCHES 
22. CHECK PRESS PUNCHES 
22.1. Only 1/4" round punches are available. If any other punches are 
selected, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22005 PUNCHES NOT AVAIL ON LIMITED 
22.4. Up to 5 punches are allowed in a Horizontal Row. If there are more 
than 5, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22140 TOO MANY PUNCHES IN ROW 
22.4.1. Only one Horizontal row is allowed. This row may be at the TOP or 
BOTTOM of the form. If the Horizontal Row is not at the top or bottom of 
the form, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22410 PUNCHES MUST BE AT TOP OR BOTTOM FOR LIMITED 
22.4.2. The location of the Punches is measured from the LEFT EDGE of the 
form. The Punches may be in the following locations: 
______________________________________ 
LEFT to CENTER OF HOLE 
______________________________________ 
11/2 
27/8 
41/4 
55/8 
______________________________________ 
If the punches are positioned in any other location, set exception for the 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22420 LOCATION OF HORIZONTAL PUNCHES NOT ALLOWED ON LIMITED 
22.5. Up to 7 punches are allowed in a Vertical Row. 
22.5.1. Only one Vertical row is allowed. This row may be at the left or 
the right side of the form. If the Vertical Row is not at the left or 
right, set exception for CSR: 
MESSAGE #P22510 PUNCHES MUST BE AT LEFT OR RIGHT FOR LIMITED PRODUCT. 
22.5.2. The location of the Punches will depend on the Form Length. All 
distances are from the TOP edge of the form to the center of the hole: 
11" Length: 11/4, 33/8, 41/8, 51/2, 67/8, 75/8, 93/4 
If the punches are in any other location, set exception for the Plant: 
MESSAGE: #P22500 LOCATION OF PUNCHES 
27. DETERMINE NUMBER WIDE 
27.1. All forms are 2 wide. 
27.2. Update Mfg. Plan 
31. PRESS DELIVERY 
All orders: SHEETER 
32. GUILLOTINE 
32.1. The maximum form size for this product=81/2.times.11. 
32.2. If the order form size is less than 81/2.times.11, the Validation 
Engine will determine how many forms can fit on one sheet, and the number 
of cuts that will be required. 
32.3. Update MFG. PLAN: 
Number up=x 
Number of cuts=x 
32.4. If the order form size is less than 81/2.times.11 (either dimension), 
update MFG PLAN: 
PRESS DELIVERY=Semi Finished 
SECONDARY OPERATION=Guillotine 
56. NON-LITHO PRINTING 
56.1. Non-litho--except CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS--printing is not allowed on 
this product. If any non-litho features are selected, set exception for 
CSR: 
MESSAGE #P56100 NON-LITHO NOT AVAILABLE ON LIMITED 
Stanfast Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Stanfast Products: 3. Product; 4. 
Size; 5. Ply; 8. Papers; 11. Inks; 12. Punching; 13. Perforations; 14. 
Consecutive Numbers; 15. Guillotine; 16. Polywrap; 17. Remoist Strip; 18. 
Transfer Tape; 19. Reinforcement Patch; 20. Reinforcement Tape; 21. Die 
Cutting; 22. Folding; 23. (Use Rule 23 From Rotary--General For Packing); 
and, 26. Center Selection. Additionally, the following rules from General 
Validation are processed for Stanfast Products: 78. Administrative; 80. 
Coded Invoice Instructions; 81. Release I Exclusions; and, 82. Invalid 
Combinations. The functionality of each of these rules may be illustrated 
as follows (any rules not expressly illustrated below have been described 
elsewhere in the specification): 
3. PRODUCT 
3.2. QUANTITY If the Order quantity is greater than the PRODUCT-MAX QTY, 
set flag for review by MFG HQTRS. 
MESSAGE #P03189 QUANTITY OUT OF SPEC 
3.2.1. If the Proposal Quantity is less than MIN QTY, set flag for review 
by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P03207 QUANTITY LESS THAN MINIMUM 
3.3. If the Order has more inks on any one ply than PRODUCT-MAX INK, set 
flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P03190 NUMBER OF INKS 
4. SIZE 
The system will check to see if the form size is available for product. 
4.1. The system will check to see if there is sufficient lockup. If there 
is not at lease (PRODUCT-LOCKUP) clear at the TOP or BOTTOM of the form, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
Message #P04144 INSUFFICIENT LOCKUP 
4.2. The system will compare the FORM SIZE on the PROPOSAL with the Sheet 
Sizes available for this product. 
4.2.1. See: DATA FILES--STANFAST--SHEET SIZES for a list of the sizes that 
are available. 
4.3. If the selected size is available, the system will: 
4.3.1. Add the corresponding PROD SIZE to ORDER SPECS. 
4.3.2. Add the value in #UP to the ORDER SPECS. 
4.3.3. Add the value in CUTS to ORDER SPECS 
4.3.4. Skip the balance of Rule 4. 
4.4. If the selected size is not available, the system will: 
4.4.1. Check the Primary Writing Device (if entered). 
4.4.1.1. If the GRAIN DIRECTION for the Primary Writing Device=LONG, go to 
Rule: 4.4.3. 
4.4.2. Reverse the PROPOSAL WIDTH AND the PROPOSAL LENGTH. 
Use the reversed width and length to check the available sizes. 
4.4.2.1. If the size is available, go to Rule: 4.3. 
4.4.3. Set exception for Home Plant: 
MESSAGE #P04191 PRODUCTION SIZE REQUIRED 
4.5 To remove the flag, the Home Center will have to add PRODUCTION SIZE, 
#UP and CUTS to the PROPOSAL. 
4.5.1. The PROPOSAL may not become an order until this flag is removed. 
5. PLY 
The system will compare the PLY on the PROPOSAL to the maximum PLY 
available for this product. 
5.1. See DATA FILES--STANFAST PRODUCTS--MAXPLY for the maximum ply that is 
allowed on any product. 
5.2. If the PROPOSAL PLY exceeds the MAXPLY ply for the product, the system 
will set a flag for review by the Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P05106 REVIEW PLY 
5.2.1. This flag must be removed before the PROPOSAL can become an ORDER. 
8. PAPERS 
8.3. The system will compare the paper with the list of approved papers for 
StanFast. If OTHER is selected, set exception for Purchasing and 
Engineering: 
MESSAGE G34001 NEW PAPER 
8.4. If any paper is flagged as not available (PSHEET not on), set 
exception for Purchasing: 
MESSAGE #P08301 PAPER AVAIL IN SHEETS 
8.5. If any paper is flagged as not approved for production (PSHEET not 
on), send message to Engineering. 
MESSAGE #P08013 APPROVE FOR SHEET PRODUCTION 
11. INKS 
11.1. The system will check each ink that is selected to see if the Feature 
List Attribute: stanfast opt is on. 
11.1.1. If the stanfast.sub.-- opt is not on, set exception for the Print 
Center: 
MESSAGE: P11110 APPROVE INK: (Ink name/PMS#) 
11.2. If the stanfast opt is on 
11.2.1. If the stanfast special opt is on, update Mfg. Plan for Pricing: 
SPECIAL 
11.2.2. If the stanfast special opt is not on, update Mfg. Plan for 
Pricing: STANDARD. 
11.3. If an ink has been approved by the Print Center (see: 11.1.1. above), 
update the Mfg. Plan for Pricing: SPECIAL 
12. PUNCHING 
The system will check the proposal to see if there are any punches. If not, 
skip Rule #12 
12.1. The system will compare the TYPE of punches on the PROPOSAL with the 
Data File: PUNCHES--NAME and SIZE--XREF-PRODUCT. 
12.1.1. If the NAME and SIZE are not available for the PRODUCT, set flag 
for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P12109 APPROVE PUNCHES 
12.1.2. Skip the balance of Rule #12. 
12.2. If 2-HOLE punches is selected: 
12.2.1. The punches must be in the same vertical plane or horizontal plane; 
12.2.2. The center-to-center measurement must be equal to 41/4" or 81/2" 
12.2.3. The distance from the center of each hole to the closest edge of 
the form must be equal to or greater than PUNCHES-LEFT or PUNCHES-RIGHT or 
PUNCHES-TOP or PUNCHES-BOTTOM 
12.2.4. (Reserved for future use) 
12.2.5. If any of the above are not true, set flag for review by the Sales 
Rep. 
MESSAGE #P12846 CANNOT USE 2-HOLE PUNCH 
12.2.6. Skip the balance of Rule #12 
12.3. If 3-HOLE punches is selected: 
12.3.1. The punches must be in the same vertical or horizontal plane; 
12.3.2. The center-to-center measurement must be equal to: PUNCHES-CCVERT 
or PUNCHES-CCHORIZ 
12.3.3. The distance from the center of each hole to the closest edge of 
the form must be equal to PUNCHES-LEFT or PUNCHES-RIGHT or PUNCHES-TOP or 
PUNCHES-BOTTOM 
12.3.5. If any of the above are not true, set flag for review by the Sales 
Rep. 
MESSAGE #P12847 CANNOT USE 3-HOLE PUNCH 
12.3.6. Skip the balance of rule #12 
12.4. If 5-HOLE punches is selected: 
12.4.1. The punches must be in the same vertical or horizontal plane; 
12.4.2. The center-to-center measurement must be equal to: PUNCHES-CCVERT 
or PUNCHES-CCHORIZ 
12.4.3. The distance from the center of each hole to the edge of the form 
must be equal to PUNCHES-LEFT or PUNCHES-RIGHT or PUNCHES-TOP or 
PUNCHES-BOTTOM 
12.4.5. If any of the above are not true, set flag for review by the Sales 
Rep. 
MESSAGE #P12845 CANNOT USE 5-HOLE PUNCH 
12.5. If COMBO-5 is selected, the holes must meet the following 
specifications: 
Form Size: 81/2.times.11 
Number of punches: 5 
Size: 1/4" ROUND 
Location: Left side only, 3/8" from left edge of form 
Location: Distance from top of form: 
11/4", 41/8, 51/2, 67/8, 93/4 
If any of these are not true, set exception for the CSR: 
MESSAGE P 12440 CANNOT USE COMBO-5 PUNCH 
12.6 If COMBO-7 is selected, the holes must meet the following 
specifications: 
12.6.1. At least one dimension of the form must be 11" 
12.6.3. Number of punches=7 
12.6.4. Size=1/4" ROUND 
12.6.5. Parallel to the 11" dimension, and 3/8" from the edge of the form. 
12.6.6. Distance from the edge of the form (edge that is perpendicular to 
the 11" dimension): 
11/4", 31/4", 41/8", 51/2", 67/8", 73/4", 93/4" 
If any of the above (12.6.1. thru 12.6.6) are not true, set exception for 
the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P12600 CANNOT USE COMBO-7 PUNCH 
12.7 If COMBO-3 is selected, the holes must meet the following 
specifications: 
12.7.1 At least one dimension of the form must be 81/2" 
12.7.2. Number of punches=3 
12.7.3. Size=1/4" ROUND 
12.7.4. Parallel to the 81/2" dimension, and 3/8" from the edge of the 
form. 
12.7.5. Distance from the edge of the form (edge that is perpendicular to 
the 81/2" dimension): 
11/2", 23/4", 23/4" 
If any of the above (12.7.1. thru 12.7.4.) is not true, set exception for 
the CSR: 
MESSAGE #P12700 CANNOT USE COMBO-3 PUNCH 
12.10. The system will check the NAME and SIZE of the punches on the form. 
12.10.1. If the number of punches on the form is greater than 
PUNCHES-MAXIMUM, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P12109 APPROVE PUNCHES 
12.10.2. Skip the balance of Rule #12. 
12.10.3. Reserved for future use 
12.10.4. If there is more than one punch, and all are not in the same 
vertical or horizontal plane, set exception for the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P12109 APPROVE PUNCHES 
13. PERFORATIONS 
13.1. Perforations will be selected from a screen. Only those perfs that 
are available for STANFAST will be displayed. 
13.2. If any perfs are requested that are not on the selection list, the 
system will set a flag for review by the Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P13110 APPROVE PERFS 
13.4. The location of the perfs will be shown on the F3 copy. 
14. CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS 
14.1. The system will check the Proposal to see if there are consecutive 
numbers. If there are no consecutive numbers, skip rule 14. 
14.2. The system will check the Reorder Type: 
14.2.1. EXACT REORDER 
14.2.1.1. If there are changes to any of the following, go to Rule 
#14.3.--NEW ORDER: 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--NAME 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--SIZE 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--NUMBER OF CHARACTERS 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--TYPE FACE 
CONSECUTIVE NUMBER--CHECK DIGIT 
14.2.1.2. If no starting consecutive number has been entered, and there was 
only one destination on the previous order, the system will add 1 to the 
ending number of the previous order, and use this as the starting number 
for the current order. 
14.2.1.3. If the current order has more than one destination, or has number 
resets, the starting consecutive number must be entered for each 
destination and/or number reset. 
14.3. NEW ORDERS, R/O WITH CHANGE, REFERENCE ORDERS 
14.3.1. ONE CONSECUTIVE NUMBER PER FORM 
14.3.1.1. The system will check the Proposal Form Size against the Data 
File: CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS-PRODUCT: MIN FORM LEN, MAX FORM LEN, MIN FORM 
WIDTH, MAX FORM WIDTH. If the proposal FORM SIZE is not within the limits 
defined by these elements, set exception for the Print Center: 
MESSAGE #P14111 APPROVE CONS. NOS 
14.3.1.2. The system will check the location of the Consecutive Number on 
the Form: 
The minimum distance from the edge of the form must be equal to or greater 
than MIN RIGHT, MIN LEFT, MIN TOP and MIN BOTTOM. If not, set a flag for 
review by the Print Center: 
MESSAGE #P14111 APPROVE CONS. NOS. 
14.3.1.3. For 1-Ply forms, the system will check the Basis Paper Weight: 
14.3.1.3.1. The BASIS WGT must be within the range defined by the MIN PAPER 
and MAX PAPER. 
14.3.1.3.3. If the Basis Weight exceeds these limits, set flag for review 
by the Print Center. 
MESSAGE #P14111 APPROVE CONS. NOS. 
14.3.1.4. The system will check the amount of space (number of digits) 
allowed for the CONSEC. NUMBER. The number of digits must be within the 
range set by the Data File: CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS--MAX CHAR SE and MIN 
CHAR SE. 
14.3.1.4.1. If the number of characters is not within the range set by 
these elements, set flag for review by the Print Center. 
MESSAGE #P14111 APPROVE CONS. NOS. 
14.3.1.5. If all of the above edits pass, update Order Specs: 
14.3.1.5.1. If the PRODUCT is COLLATED SETS, ORDER SPECS-CONSEC. 
NUMBERS=COPYSAFE 
MESSAGE #P14003 CONS NOS MUST BE COPYSAFE 
14.3.1.5.2. All other Products, ORDER SPECS-CONSEC. NUMBERS=SECONDARY. 
14.3.1.5.3. Skip the balance of Rule #14. 
14.4.1. If there is more than one consecutive number per form, set flag for 
review by the Print Center. 
MESSAGE #P14111 APPROVE CONS. NOS. 
15. GUILLOTINE 
15.1. Guillotine will have been determined by the form size validation 
rules. If Guillotine is necessary, add the number of cuts to the Order 
Specs. 
16. POLYWRAP (07-74) 
16.1. POLYWRAP options will be selected from a screen. 
16.2. If any polywrap options are requested that are not on the list, the 
system will set a flag for review by the Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P16113 
17. REMOIST STRIP 
17.1. The location of a Remoist Strip will be shown on F3 Copy. 
17.1.1. The location may be Vertical or Horizontal 
17.1.2. Default width=1/2" 
17.2. If Remoist is selected, the system will set a flag for review by the 
Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P17114 
18. TRANSFER TAPE 
18.1. The location and orientation of Transfer Tape will be shown on F3 
Copy. 
The acceptable values are: 
FRONT 
BACK 
18.2. If a location for Transfer Tape is shown, but no size is selected, 
default to 1/2". 
18.3. ORDER SPECS-COLLATING-TAPE=X 
18.4 If Transfer Tape is selected, the system will set a flag for review by 
the home Center. 
MESSAGE #P18115 
19. REINFORCEMENT PATCH 
19.1. The kind of patch, size of patch, size of hole and location of 
Reinforcement Patches must be shown on F3. 
19.2. If REINFORCEMENT PATCH(S) is selected, set flag for review by the 
Home Center 
MESSAGE #P19116 APPROVE REINFORCE PATCH 
20. REINFORCEMENT TAPE 
20.1. The location and orientation of Reinforcement Tape will be shown on 
F3 Copy. 
The acceptable values are: 
FRONT 
BACK 
20.2. If a location for Reinforcement Tape is shown, but no size is 
selected, default to 1/2". 
20.3. ORDER SPECS-COLLATING-TAPE=X 
20.4 If Reinforcement Tape is selected, the system will set a flag for 
review by the home Center. 
MESSAGE #P18115 APPROVE TRANSFER/REM TAPE 
21. DIE CUTTING 
21.1. The location, shape and orientation of Die-cutting must be shown on 
F3 Copy. 
21.2. If Die-cutting is selected, the system will set a flag for review by 
the Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P21117 APPROVE DIE-CUTTING 
22. FOLDING 
The system will check to see if the form size and type of folding is 
available for the product. 
22.1. If there is not FOLDING on the Proposal, skip edit 22. 
22.2. See: DATA FILES--FOLDING a list of the types of folding available. 
22.2.1. If the selected type is not available, the system will set a flag 
for review by the Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P22118 APPROVE FOLDING 
22.2. See: DATA FILES--FOLDING for a list of the sheet sizes that are 
available for folding. 
22.2.1. If the selected size is not available, the system will set a flag 
for review by the Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P22118 APPROVE FOLDING 
26. CENTER SELECTION 
26.1. The system use the Mail Code for the primary Sales Rep and the 
PRODUCT access the file: DISTRICTS to determine the production Center. 
26.1.1. If the PRODUCT has not been assigned to a Print Center for the 
District, set flag and send message to StanFast Headquarters. 
MESSAGE #P26174 PLANT ASSIGNMENT 
Stanfast Sets Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Stanfast Set Products: 4. Size; 8. 
Papers; and 23. Fastening. Additionally, the following rules from General 
Validation are processed for Stanfast Sets: 78. Administrative; 80. Coded 
Invoice Instructions; 81. Release I Exclusions; and 82. Invalid 
Combinations; and the following Stanfast Validation rules are processed 
for Stanfast Sets: 3. Product; 5. Ply; 11. Inks; 12. Punching; 13. 
Perforations; 14. Consecutive Numbers; 15. Guillotine; and 16. Polywrap. 
The functionality of each of these rules may be illustrated as follows 
(any rules not expressly illustrated below have been described elsewhere 
in the specification): 
4. SIZE 
Use Rule #4 from StanFast Sheets. In addition, run the following rule: 
4.1.0 If the ply is greater than 1, at least one dimension of the 
form,(Width or Length) must be the same for all plies. If not, generate 
exception message. 
MESSAGE #P04841 ODD SIZE NOT ALLOWED 
Use all other rules in STANFAST SHEETS--RULE #4 
23. FASTENING 
The system will check to see if any of the special Fastening Types have 
been selected for this proposal. 
23.1. See: DATA FILES--FASTENING for a list of the fastening types that are 
available. 
23.2. If EDGE GLUE is selected, all plies must be the same dimension on the 
glued side. If not, return the Proposal to the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P23819 UNIQUE DIMENSION--EDGE GLUE 
23.2.1. If EDGE GLUE is the only Fastening Type, skip 23.3. 
23.3. If any of the types of Fastening are selected, the system will set a 
flag for review by the Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P23121 SPECIAL FASTENING 
23.4. If the PROD is CARBONLESS SETS, there must be some entry in 
FASTENING. If not, set flag for review by the Sales Rep. 
MESSAGE #P23L862 FASTENING REQUIRED 
Stanfast Envelopes Validation Rules 
The following rules are processed for Stanfast Envelopes: 3. Product; 4. 
Size; 8. Papers; 11. Inks; and 26. Center Selection. Additionally, the 
following rules from General Validation are processed for Stanfast 
Envelopes: 78. Administrative; 80. Coded Invoice Instructions; 81. Release 
I Exclusions; and 82. Invalid Combinations. The functionality of each of 
these rules may be illustrated as follows (any rules not expressly 
illustrated below have been described elsewhere in the specification): 
3. PRODUCT 
3.1. QUANTITY. If the order quantity is less than PRODUCT-MINQTY or greater 
than PRODUCT-MAXQTY, set flag for review by the Plant. 
MESSAGE #P03189 QUANTITY OUT OF SPEC 
3.2. The order quantity must be in even multiples of 500. If not, set flag 
for Sales: 
MESSAGE #P03001 QTY MUST BE MULTIPLE OF 500 
3.3. If the order has more inks (front, back, total) than the 
PRODUCT-MAX#-FRONT, MAX#-BACK, MAX#-TOTAL, set flag for review by the 
Plant. 
MESSAGE #P03190 NUMBER OF INKS 
4. SIZE 
4.3. The system will check to see if there is sufficient lockup. If there 
is not at least (PRODUCT-LOCKUP) clear at the TOP or BOTTOM of the form, 
set flag for review by the Plant. 
Message #P04144 INSUFFICIENT LOCKUP 
4.10. ENVELOPES and WINDOW ENVELOPES. The system will check the Envelope 
size to see if it is available: 
4.10.1. If the FORM SIZE (Width and Length) are available for the selected 
Paper--SIZE REFERENCE TABLE, update ORDER SPECS--WIDTH and LENGTH. 
Update ORDER SPECS-#UP=1. 
Skip balance of Rule #4 
4.10.2. If the FORM SIZE is not available for the selected Paper, set flag 
for review by the Home Center. 
MESSAGE #P04192 ENVELOPE SIZE NOT AVAILABLE 
8. PAPERS 
8.1. If any paper is flagged as not available for SHEET Production, send 
message to Purchasing. 
MESSAGE #P08301 PAPER NOT AVAILABLE 
11. INKS 
NOTE: This rule is the same as Rule #11 for StanFast Sheets 
11.1. Inks will be selected from a screen. Only inks that are available for 
STANFAST will be displayed for selection. 
11.2. Each ink, when selected, will be marked as STANDARD or SPECIAL (for 
pricing) 
11.3. If the Sales Rep requests some ink other than what is displayed for 
selection, the system will set a flag for review by the Home Plant. 
MESSAGE #P11108 
26. CENTER SELECTION 
26.1. The system use the Mail Code for the primary Sales Rep and the 
PRODUCT access the file: DISTRICTS to determine the producing Center. 
26.1.1. If the PRODUCT has not been assigned to a Print Center for the 
District, set flag and send message to StanFast Headquarters. 
MESSAGE #P26174 PLANT ASSIGNMENT 
Referring now to FIGS. 2, 3 and 6, forms order pricing 300 is described in 
detail. A pricing engine 50 is resident in the second computer system 16. 
The pricing engine 50 operates in accordance with a set of pricing rules 
which are integral to order pricing 300. In order pricing 300, the 
manufacturing steps of the validated manufacturing plan are identified, 
i.e., input from the manufacturing steps generated during validation, see 
step 302 in FIG. 6 and step 212 in FIG. 5. Next, distinct cost components 
for each manufacturing step are identified, see step 304. Specifically, 
the pricing engine 50 is operative to extract from the manufacturing plan 
the labor steps necessary to produce the ordered form and develop a labor 
cost component 306 for each manufacturing step. Similarly, the pricing 
engine 50 is operative to identify the materials needed to produce the 
ordered form and develop a material cost component 308 for each material. 
Finally, the pricing engine 50 is operative to build a mark-up cost 
component 310 associated with the ordered form and a burden cost component 
312 associated with the necessary freight and storage for the forms. An 
initial value for each cost component is developed based on the labor, 
material, burden, and mark-up cost components 306, 308, 310, 312, see step 
314. Associated rules selected from the pricing rules resident in the 
pricing engine 50 are applied to each cost component to change the 
initialized value for each cost component and generate changed labor, 
material, and mark-up cost components 322, 324, 326. The form price is 
calculated based upon the changed labor, material, and mark-up cost 
components 322, 324, 326, see step 318. Freight and storage costs are 
calculated based on the burden cost component 310 once the form price is 
calculated, see steps 318 and 328. The form price may be calculated based 
upon cost components associated with a hypothetical manufacturing facility 
or the specific manufacturing facility selected in order validation 200. 
The pricing engine 50 generates pricing exceptions in response to 
application of the pricing rules. For example, a pricing exception may 
arise if an order is associated with a special account or exceeds a 
predetermined paper weight limit, press impression limit, single ply 
equivalents limit, or an estimated total form price limit. If no exception 
is generated, each of the cost components and all cost component inputs 
are written to an order entry system database, not shown, for future 
reference, see step 334. The form freight and storage prices are displayed 
and may be printed, see step 336. To complete order pricing 300, a user is 
prompted to set the sell price and place the order, see step 338. If an 
exception is generated, the exceptions are listed to enable the CSR to 
review the list of exceptions and determine if there are any exceptions 
that can be resolved by the CSR, see step 340. If all exceptions are 
resolved by the CSR or another user at list, the pricing rules are again 
applied to the order, see steps 342 and 316. If one or more exceptions 
cannot be resolved at list, then the exceptions are routed to appropriate 
exception handling locations 48 where pricing override values 320 are 
assigned to the order by the exception handlers and the form price is 
calculated using the override values 320, see steps 344, 346, and 318. 
Specifically, the pricing engine 50 is programmed to operate in an 
override mode wherein at least one of the labor cost component 322, the 
material cost component 324, the burden cost component 310, and the 
mark-up cost component 326 for the ordered form are replaced by an 
override value 320, and wherein the pricing engine 50 is programmed to 
calculate the price based upon the override value 320. 
The pricing rules comprise two sets of rules. The first set, the Rotary 
Pricing Rules, is processed for forms to be produced by traditional rotary 
printing facilities. The second set, the Stanfast.RTM. Pricing Rules, is 
processed for forms to be produced by Stanfast.RTM., or quick print, 
facilities. 
The Rotary Pricing Rules use rules and equations to identify the material, 
labor, markup, and freight and storage cost components associated with a 
specific order. The equations and rules for the material cost component 
are as follows (some pricing tables referred to below are not actually 
shown in the present specification because the content thereof is self 
explanatory): 
##EQU1## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 
1. Ply Flat Waste Imps is found in the Paper Waste Base table shown below. 
2. Press #Wide and Press #Around are found in like named fields on the 
Press Manufacturing Step. 
3. The Order Quantity is initialized to the value of Order.sub.-- Qty on 
the Customer Order table. 
4. Ply Base Running Waste Percent in found in the Paper Waste Base table 
shown below. 
5. Mfg Length is set equal to the value of Mfg.sub.-- Length on the Ply 
table. 
6. Paper Caliper is found in the Paper Caliper attribute in the Feature 
Attribute List table for the paper attached to the current ply. 
7. Mill Roll Outer Diameter and Mill Roll Inner Diameter are found in the 
Roll Type table shown below. 
8. Core & Wrapper Waste Percent Per Roll are found in the Paper Waste Base 
table shown below. 
9. Paper Attribute Adjustment should be initialized to 0.00 for base 
calculation. 
10. Feature Waste Percent should be initialized to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
11. Ply Secondary Operation Count should be initialized to 0 for the base 
calculation. 
12. Secondary Operation Waste % is found in the Pricing Constants table. 
______________________________________ 
Paper Waste Base Table (the base condition has 0 printing units, crimp 
fastening for Stanset and no consecutive numbers) 
______________________________________ 
Ply Base 
Core & 
Ply Flat Running 
Wrapper Waste 
Product Type 
Jumbo Waste Imps 
Waste % 
% per Roll 
______________________________________ 
Sheeted Single 
False 2000 5% 3% 
Zipset True 2000 4% 3% 
Zipset False 2000 6% 3% 
Continuous Singles 
False 2000 5% 3% 
Stanset True 3000 4% 3% 
Stanset False 3000 6% 3% 
______________________________________ 
Roll Type Table 
Outer Inner 
Roll Type Jumbo Diameter Diameter 
______________________________________ 
Mill Roll T 36 3 
Mill Roll F 36 3 
Finish T 39 3.5 
Finish F 20 3 
______________________________________ 
Step 2. Find the Pounds of Paper Required for total order for each ply. 
##EQU2## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
2. Mfg Length and Mfg Width are found in like named fields on the 
associated Ply record. 
3. Ply Waste % was calculated in Step 1 above. 
4. Order As Weight is found in the Feature List attribute table for the 
associated paper. 
Step 3. Calculate Paper Cost/M. 
##EQU3## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Look up $/CWT, Narrow Roll $/CWT, Time Discount and Freight $/lb by 
Paper ID and Minimum Pounds Required in the Material Cost/Price table. 
Note that you must add the Ply Pounds Required as calculated in Step 2 for 
all plies with the same paper (i.e. same Feature ID) and use this value in 
the Minimum Pounds field for this lookup. If Narrow Roll $/CWT, Time 
Discount and Freight $/lb are Null in the Material Cost Price table, use 
the default values from in the Supplier table. 
2. Ply Pounds Required was calculated in Step 2. 
3. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field in the 
Customer Order table. 
4. Manufacturing Reduction % should be set equal to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Paper Pricing Rules 
Pricing 
Rule Rule Description 
Input Effected 
Factor 
Operation 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
1 Each printing unit 
Feature Waste % 
1% Add 
2 Press Consec #'s 
Feature Waste % 
2% Add 
3 Press MICR Feature Waste % 
5% Add 
Form Plies = 1 
4 Press MICR Feature Waste % 
10% Add 
Form Plies &gt; 1 
5 Set is Flat Glued 
Feature Waste % 
5% Add 
6 Collator Consec #'s 
Feature Waste % 
1% Add 
7 Carbonless Paper Attribute Waste % 
1% Add 
Paper Weight &lt; 80 lbs. 
8 Carbonless Paper Attribute Waste % 
2% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 80 lbs. 
9 Dry Gum Paper Attribute Waste % 
5% Add 
Paper Weight &lt; 20 lbs. 
10 Dry Gum Paper Attribute Waste % 
6% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 20 lbs. 
Paper Weight &lt; 80 lbs. 
11 Dry Gum Paper Attribute Waste % 
7% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 80 lbs. 
12 Pressure Sensitive 
Paper Attribute Waste % 
15% Add 
Paper Weight &lt; 20 lbs. 
13 Pressure Sensitive 
Paper Attribute Waste % 
16% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 20 lbs. 
Paper Weight &lt; 80 lbs. 
14 Pressure Sensitive 
Paper Attribute Waste % 
17% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 80 lbs. 
15 Safety Paper Attribute Waste % 
1% Add 
Paper Weight &lt; 80 lbs. 
16 Safety Paper Attribute Waste % 
2% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 80 lbs. 
17 Coated Paper Attribute Waste % 
5% Add 
Paper Weight &lt; 20 lbs. 
18 Coated Paper Attribute Waste % 
6% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 20 lbs. 
Paper Weight &lt; 80 lbs. 
19 Coated Paper Attribute Waste % 
7% Add 
Paper Weight &gt; 80 lbs. 
20 Other Paper Attribute Waste % 
1% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 20 lbs. 
Paper Weight &lt; 80 lbs. 
21 Other Paper Attribute Waste % 
2% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 80 lbs. 
22 Offset Paper Attribute Waste % 
1% Add 
Paper Weight &gt;= 50 lbs 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Paper Burden 
Paper Burden Equation 
Paper Burden is calculated separately for each different paper. This is 
done to be flexible enough to handle a future possibility of assigning 
different burden rates to different papers. At present all paper will 
carry the same burden rate. To most easily incorporate the three ways 
PRIMAC may define paper burden, the equation shown calculates Paper Burden 
Cost for each ply separately. 
##EQU4## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Ply Pounds Required and Ply Waste % are calculated in the Paper Cost 
Component in steps 2 and 1, respectively. 
2. Burden $/lb., Burden $/MSI and Burden $/Finished Sheet are all found in 
the Pricing Constants table. Note that only one of these three values will 
be non-zero. 
3. Order As Weight is set equal to the Order As Weight Feature List 
attribute associated with the paper used for the current ply. 
4. Manufacturing Reduction % for base is zero 
Paper Burden Rules 
No paper burden Pricing Rules have been defined at this time. 
Carbon 
Carbon Equation 
Step 1. Calculate the number of Square Inches required for each carbon ply. 
EQU Ply square inches required=Order Quantity.times.Mfg Length.times.Mfg 
Width.times.(1+Carbon Waste %) 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
2. Mfg Length is set equal to Mfg.sub.-- Length field on the associated Ply 
record. 
3. Mfg Width is set equal to the Mfg.sub.-- Width field on the associated 
Ply record. 
4. Carbon Waste Percent is found in the Carbon.sub.-- Waste table shown 
below. 
______________________________________ 
Carbon Waste Table 
Carbon Waste 
Product Type ID % 
______________________________________ 
Stanset 9% 
Continuous Single 
9% 
Zipset 6% 
______________________________________ 
Step 2. Calculate the Carbon Cost/M. 
##EQU5## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Mfg Length is set equal to Mfg.sub.-- Length field on the associated Ply 
record. 
2. Mfg Width is set equal to the Mfg.sub.-- Width field on the associated 
Ply record. 
3. Carbon Waste Percent is found in the Carbon.sub.-- Waste table shown 
above. 
4. Base CPMSI and Make-ready Cost are found in the Material.sub.-- 
Cost.sub.-- Price table shown below. 
NOTE that you must add the Ply Square Inches Required as calculated in Step 
1 for all plies with the same carbon (i.e. same Feature ID and size and 
attached features) and use this value in the Material.sub.-- Min field for 
this lookup. (i.e. this means that two carbons are unique if they have 
different feature Ids, different sized, different features attached to the 
carbon, or similar features but in different locations. 
5. Feature CPMSI is set equal to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
6. Make Ready Indicator should be set equal to 0 for the base calculation 
since most full coat slit carbon are stock and the make-ready charge 
spread over many orders is assumed to be negligible. This indicator may be 
turned on (set to 1) in the feature rules where appropriate. 
7. Order Quantity is set equal to the value of Order.sub.-- Qty in the 
Customer Order table. 
8. Average Order Count should be set equal to 1 for the base calculation. 
This may be changed in feature rules to prorate make ready charge over a 
mix of stock and non stock rolls with feather edge and clean edge 
(stripe). 
______________________________________ 
Material Cost Price Table 
(only fields applicable to carbon shown) 
Make.sub.-- 
Feature.sub.-- 
Cost.sub.-- ready.sub.-- 
Material.sub.-- 
List.sub.-- Id 
Unit.sub.-- Id 
Material.sub.-- Min 
Type Charge 
Charge 
______________________________________ 
712 M Sq. In 0 Price 47.50 .04204 
712 M Sq. In 24,000,000 Price 47.50 .03950 
714 M Sq. In 0 Price 47.50 .04288 
714 M Sq. In 24,000,000 Price 47.50 .04033 
12812 M Sq. In 0 Price 90.00 .0693 
12812 M Sq. In 24,000,000 Price 90.00 .0687 
864 M Sq. In 0 Price 70.00 .06475 
864 M Sq. In 24,000,000 Price 70.00 .06279 
______________________________________ 
Note--The cost for all full coat carbons must be slit cost. Full coat 
processed carbon is generally used in the Stanwide product. Full coat 
processed carbon may be used in some rare Stanset constructions with 
manufacturing approval (exception). If pricing for full coat processed 
carbon is supported then either a field must be added to the 
Material.sub.-- Cost.sub.-- Price table to allow different material types 
to be attached to a unique feature id or a unique feature id must be 
established for each full coat processed carbon formula. 
______________________________________ 
Carbon Pricing Rules 
Pricing 
Rule Feature Input Name Factor Operation 
______________________________________ 
1 Vertical Perf Feature CPMSI 
.00833 Replace 
Make Ready 1 Replace 
Indicator 
2 Striped Carbon 
Feature CPMSI 
.00833 Replace 
Make Ready 1 Replace 
Indicator 
Average Order 
10 Replace 
Count 
3 Feather Edge Carbon 
Feature CPMSI 
.00833 Replace 
Make Ready 1 Replace 
Indicator 
Average Order 
10 Replace 
Count 
______________________________________ 
Miscellaneous Materials 
Miscellaneous Material Equation 
The following is the Order $ version of the Miscellaneous Material 
equation. 
##EQU6## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Feature Cost $/M is set to $0.00 for the base calculation. 
2. Feature Cost Flat $ is set to $0.00 for the base calculation. 
3. Order Quantity is set to the value of Order.sub.-- Qty in the Customer 
Order table. 
______________________________________ 
Miscellaneous Material Pricing Rules: 
Pricing 
Rule Feature Input Name Factor 
Operation 
______________________________________ 
1 Laser Cartons 
Feature Cost $/M 
.23 Add 
Feature Cost Flat $ 
10.00 Add 
2 Standard Palletizing 
Feature Cost $/M Add 
Sequenced Feature Cost Flat $ 
Add 
3 Standard Palletizing 
Feature Cost $/M Add 
Not Sequenced 
Feature Cost Flat $ 
Add 
4 Special Palletizing 
Feature Cost $/M Add 
Sequenced Feature Cost Flat $ 
Add 
5 Special Palletizing 
Feature Cost $/M Add 
Not Sequenced 
Feature Cost Flat $ 
Add 
6 New Match Ink 
Feature Cost Flat $ 
Add 
______________________________________ 
The equations and rules for the labor cost component are as follows: 
Composition 
##EQU7## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. The Number of Faces for each paper version will be determined by reading 
each paper ply and tallying them by the values found in Composition 
Complexity Front and Composition Complexity Back fields. 
2. The Number of Faces for each carbon version will be determined by 
reading each carbon ply and tallying them by the values found in 
Composition Complexity Front and Composition Complexity Back fields. 
3. Time for each version will be found in the Composition Minutes table 
shown below. 
4. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
5. Composition Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using 
the SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
______________________________________ 
Composition.sub.-- Minutes table 
Composition Type 
Paper Composing Minutes 
______________________________________ 
1 Line Change True 10 
Minor True 20 
Major True 45 
Extensive True 120 
Exact Reorder True 0 
Same As Another True 0 
Camera Ready True 0 
Camera Ready 1Line 
True 10 
1 Line Change False 10 
Minor False 
Major False 
Extensive False 
Exact Reorder False 
Same As Another False 
______________________________________ 
Composition Pricing Rules 
There are no pricing rules currently defined for the Composition Cost 
Component. 
Note: Composing direct labor in the future will be included in the markup 
calculation as an expense instead of factory cost 
Photo Offset 
Photo Offset Equation 
Step 1. Calculate the Number of Extra Plates required for each unique 
original plate. Plates wear out. Many duplicates of the same plate may be 
required to run the entire order. A plate may be used to print one or more 
plies. The total number of impressions that need to be printed by the same 
plate will determine how many plates will be required. Since front and 
back printing are applied during the same press pass at two different 
stations, both a front and back plate are required. Therefore identical 
front and back composition requires two original plates. But if there are 
several plies that have identical composition on the same face, only one 
original plate is required. 
##EQU8## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Press #Wide and Press #Around is found on the Press Manufacturing Step 
record for the given ply. 
2. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
3. The Carbonless Paper Factor should be set to 0.5 if the ply currently 
being examined is carbonless and 1.0 if not. Whether the ply is carbonless 
can be found in the `Paper Pricing Group` feature list attribute. 
4. The Screening Factor should be set to 0.25 if the screening or reverse 
print indicator is TRUE for the current plate and 0.00 if not. 
5. Impressions/Plate is found in pricing reference data tables for plate 
life. See below. 
______________________________________ 
Plate Life Table 
Equipment Type Plate Life Impressions 
______________________________________ 
Offset Press 300,000 
Transfer Letterpress 
1,000,000 
______________________________________ 
Step 2. Calculate the amount of time required in Photo Offset. 
##EQU9## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Feature Minutes is set to zero (0) for the base calculation. 
2. The Number of plates for each version (except Extra) will be determined 
by reading each plate record and tallying them by the values found in the 
Plate Change Complexity field. 
3. Number of Extra Plates is calculated in Step 1. 
4. Minutes for each plate version are found in the Photo Offset Minutes 
table as shown below. 
5. Photo Offset Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using 
the SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
______________________________________ 
Photo Offset Minutes Table 
Plate Version Photo Offset Minutes 
______________________________________ 
New 130 
1 Line Change 10 
Exact Reorder 30 
Camera Ready 75 
Camera Ready 1 Line 
85 
Change 
Extra Plates 30 
______________________________________ 
______________________________________ 
Photo Offset Pricing Rules 
Pricing 
Rule Condition(s) 
Affected Input 
Factor 
Operation 
______________________________________ 
1 MICR Repetitive 
Feature Minutes 
40 Add 
2 Optical Scanning 
Feature Minutes 
60 Add 
______________________________________ 
Press Setup 
Press Setup Equation 
The following is the equation of cost for the press setup operation for 
rotary products. 
##EQU10## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Base Minutes, Add'l for Ply, Add'l for #Wide, and Add'l for both Ply & 
#Wide are found in the Equipment Setup Minutes reference table shown 
below. This table has a Setup.sub.-- Equip.sub.-- Type field which holds 
the type of press for which the Equipment Setup record applies. The value 
to be used in the lookup for this part of the key is found in the first 
Press Mfg Step in the Equip.sub.-- Type.sub.-- ID field. 
2. Order Quantity is set equal to Order.sub.-- Qty on the Customer Order 
table. 
3. Form Plies is initialized with the count of paper plies for the 
manufacturing order. 
4. Press #Wide is determined by looking for the maximum number wide across 
all press steps or, if any press step has Semi-finished sheets as the 
delivery method, then set the value of Max Press #Wide to 1. 
5. Feature Setup Minutes=0 in the base condition. Features add time. This 
is calculated separately and replaces the 0. 
6. Setup Lineup Factor=1 in the base condition. 
7. Manufacturing Reduction Percent should be initialized to 0.00 for the 
base calculation. 
8. Press Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using the 
SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Equipment Setup Minutes Table (Press Values only) 
Add'l Mins. 
for Over on 
Product 
Equip 
Minimum 
Multiple 
Base 
Add'l Mins. for 
Add'l Mins. for 
Ply and 
Type Type 
# Around 
Plies 
Minutes 
over 2 Plies 
over 1 Wide 
Wide 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Stanset 
Offset 
1 True 92.0 
24.9 15.6 1.9 
Stanset 
Offset 
2 True 94.1 
25.8 17.8 2.8 
Stanset 
Offset 
4 True 100.5 
28.6 24.1 5.7 
Cont. Single 
Offset 
1 False 
125.2 
0 14.6 0 
Cont. Single 
Offset 
2 False 
71.6 
0 19.1 0 
Cont. Single 
Offset 
4 False 
110.0 
0 25.5 0 
Zipset Offset 
2 True 90.0 
25.1 12.0 2.1 
Zipset Offset 
3 True 90.3 
26.2 14.4 3.2 
Zipset Offset 
4 True 72.6 
27.2 16.8 4.3 
Zipset Offset 
5 True 95.0 
28.3 19.1 5.3 
Zipset Offset 
2 False 
62.8 
0 9.9 0 
Zipset Offset 
3 False 
64.1 
0 11.2 0 
Zipset Offset 
4 False 
65.4 
0 12.5 0 
Zipset Offset 
5 False 
66.7 
0 13.8 0 
Sheeted Single 
Offset 
1 False 
Sheeted Single 
Offset 
2 False 
119.6 
0 19.1 0 
Sheeted Single 
Offset 
4 False 
158.0 
0 25.5 0 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Press Setup Rules 
The criteria for some rules may be "none" which merely indicates that the 
rule should be run every time because of the existence of the 
manufacturing process and cost component. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Criteria 
Pricing Rule 
(Multiple Criteria on Multiple lines) 
Affected Input 
Change 
Value 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
1 3/16" Regular Number 
Feature Setup Minutes 
Add Module B 
2 Standard Perf Feature Setup Minutes 
Add Module A 
Orientation = Vertical 
Type = Hit Skip 
3 Standard Perf Feature Setup Minutes 
Add Module A 
Orientation = Vertical 
Type = Full 
3 Standard Perf Feature Setup Minutes 
Add Module C 
Orientation = Horizontal 
Type = Partial 
4 Standard Perf Feature Setup Minutes 
Add Module C 
Orientation = Horizontal 
Type = Full 
5 Any Ink exists on form 
Feature Setup Minutes 
Add Module D 
6 Any Plates used on form 
Feature Setup Minutes 
Add Module D 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Press Run 
Setup 
Collator Setup Equation 
The following is the equation of cost for the collator setup operation for 
rotary products. 
Press Run Equation 
Press Running Cost/M is calculated ply by ply. The calculation consists of 
three major portions: base running, unwind roll change time, and finished 
roll change time. 
Step 1. Calculate FPM adjusted for paper weight slowdown. 
EQU Feature FPM=Base FPM.times.Paper Weight Slow Speed Factor 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Base FPM and Paper Weight Slow Speed Factor are found in Press Base 
Speed table shown below. Equipment Type and Delivery Method are found in 
the associated Mfg Step record. 
2. Paper Weight Slow Speed Factor is found in the Paper Weight Speed Factor 
table also shown below. Delivery Method is found in the associated Mfg 
Step record and Paper Weight is found in the Feature List Attribute table 
for the paper being run during this operation. 
______________________________________ 
Press Base Speed 
Finish RollChange 
Base 
Equipment Type 
Delivery Method 
Time FPM 
______________________________________ 
Offset Press 
Fold 0 541 
Offset Press 
Roll 5.3 618 
Offset Press 
Finished Sheet 
0 541 
Offset Press 
Semi -Finished Sheet 
0 309 
Offset Press 
Spiral Fold 0 256 
______________________________________ 
______________________________________ 
Paper Weight Speed Factor 
Press Delivery Type 
Min Paper Weight 
% Of Base Fpm 
______________________________________ 
Fold 0 87.5% 
Fold 12.0 100.0% 
Fold 24.1 87.5% 
Fold 80.1 75.0% 
Roll 0 87.5% 
Roll 12.0 100.0% 
Roll 24.1 87.5% 
Roll 80.1 75.0% 
Finished Sheet 
0 87.5% 
Finished Sheet 
12.0 100.0% 
Finished Sheet 
24.1 87.5% 
Finished Sheet 
80.1 75.0% 
Semi -Finished Sheet 
0 97.5 
Semi -Finished Sheet 
12.0 100.0% 
Semi -Finished Sheet 
24.1 97.5% 
Semi -Finished Sheet 
80.1 95.0% 
Spiral Fold 0 71.0% 
Spiral Fold 20.0 100.0% 
Spiral Fold 24.1 84.0% 
Spiral Fold 80.1 71.0% 
______________________________________ 
Step 2. Calculate Press Running Minutes 
##EQU11## 
EQU Press Run Labor Cost/M=Press Run Minutes/M.times.Press Labor $/Hour.div.60 
Minutes/Hour 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Feature FPM was calculated in Step 1. 
2. Press #Wide is found in the Mfg Step record. 
3. No. of Units for the ply is a count of original litho plates used on 
this ply. 
4. #Wide & No. of Units Slowdown Factor is found in the Pricing Constants 
table. 
5. Mill Roll Change Time is found in the Pricing Constants table..sup.See 
Note 1 
FNT .sup.Note 1 : The Base FPM and base condition Base Mill Roll Change Minutes 
include PRESS TURNOVER ALLOWANCE=1.0526, PRESS CLAIM FACTOR=1.115 and 
NORMAL RUN & DAILY FACTOR of 1.1024. 
6. Paper Caliper is found in the Feature List Attribute table for the paper 
associated with this press run step. 
7. Mill Roll Inner and Outer Diameter are found in the Roll Type table 
shown below. The Roll Type looked up should be Mill Roll and the Jumbo 
indicator to use is found on the Mfg Order record. 
8. Finish Roll Change Time is found in the Press Base Speed table shown 
above. 
9. Number Reset Time should be initialized to zero (0) for the base 
calculation. 
10. Finish Roll Inner and Outer Diameter are found in the Roll Type table 
shown below. The Roll Type looked up should be Finish Roll and the Jumbo 
indicator to use is found on the Mfg Order record. 
11. Manufacturing Reduction Percent should be initialized to zero (0) for 
the base calculation. 
12. Mfg Length should be initialized with the Mfg Length field in the 
associated Ply record. 
13. Press Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using the 
SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
14. Feature Special Delay % is set to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
______________________________________ 
Roll Type Table 
Outer Inner 
Roll Type Jumbo Diameter Diameter 
______________________________________ 
Mill Roll True 36 3 
Mill Roll False 36 3 
Finish Roll True 39 3.5 
Finish Roll False 20 3 
______________________________________ 
Press Running Pricing Rules 
The criteria for some rules may be "none" which merely indicates that the 
rule should be run every time because of the existence of the 
manufacturing process and cost component. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Pricing 
Rule 
Feature Input Value 
Operation 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
1 Carbonless Feature FPM 
376 Replace 
Mill Roll Change Time 
12.5 Replace 
2 Dry Gum Feature FPM 
210 Replace 
Mill Roll Change Time 
13.5 Replace 
3 Hit-Skip Perfs Vert 
Feature FPM 
271 Replace 
Mill Roll Change Time 
13.5 Replace 
4 MICR Consec. Numbering 
Feature FPM 
271 Replace 
Finish Roll Change Time 
3.8 Add 
Number Reset Time 
Module E 
Add 
5 Over 12 Number Machines 
Feature FPM 
271 Replace 
6 Spiral Folding Mill Roll Change Time 
12.9 Replace 
7 Title Feature Special Delay % 
5% Add 
Heat Resistant Ink 
8 Ink (each Litho ink on the ply) 
Feature Special Delay % 
5% Add 
Heat Resistant Ink 
9 Micr Consec Number 
Feature Special Delay % 
5% Add 
Heat Resistant Ink 
10 3/16 Regular Consecutive Number 
Feature Special Delay % 
5% Add 
Heat Resistant Ink 
11 3/16 Regular Consecutive Number 
Number Reset Time 
Module E 
Add 
12 Prismatic Printing 
No of Units 
1 Add 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Collator 
##EQU12## 
EQU Collator Flat Labor Cost/M=Collator Flat Minutes/M.times.Collator Labor 
$/Hour.div.60 Minutes/Hour 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Base Minutes, Add'l for Ply, Add'l for #Wide, and Add'l for both Ply & 
#Wide are found in the Equipment Setup Minutes reference table shown 
below. This table has a Setup.sub.-- Equip.sub.-- Type field which holds 
the type of collator for which the Equipment Setup record applies. The 
value to be used in the lookup for this part of the key is found in the 
first Press Mfg Step in the Equip.sub.-- Type.sub.-- ID field. 
2. Form Plies is initialized with the count of paper plies for the 
manufacturing order. 
3. Number of Streams is from the Num.sub.-- Streams field on the 
Manufacturing Step record. 
4. Collator #Wide is set equal to the Number Wide field on the Collator 
Manufacturing Step record. 
5. Feature Setup Minutes should be initialized to 0 for the base 
calculation. 
6. Setup Lineup Factor should be initialized to 1 in the base condition. 
7. Order Quantity is set equal to Order.sub.-- Qty on the Customer Order 
table. 
8. Manufacturing Reduction Percent should be initialized to 0.00 for the 
base calculation. 
9. Collator Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using the 
SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Equipment Setup Minutes (Collator Values Only) 
Product 
Equip 
Minimum 
Multiple 
Base 
Add'l Mins. for 
Add'l Mins. for 
Add'l Mins. for Over 
Type 
Type 
# Around 
Plies 
Minutes 
over 2 Plies 
over 1 Wide 
on Ply and # Wide 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Stanset 
Crimp 
1 True 93.1 
5.1 0 0 
Stanset 
Crimp 
2 True 73.4 
5.1 0 0 
Stanset 
Crimp 
4 True 127.7 
5.1 0 0 
Stanset 
Glue 
1 True 93.1 
5.1 0 0 
Stanset 
Glue 
2 True 73.4 
5.1 0 0 
Stanset 
Glue 
4 True 127.7 
5.1 0 0 
Cont. 
Glue 
1 False 0 0 0 
Single 
Cont. 
Glue 
2 False 0 0 0 
Single 
Cont. 
Glue 
4 False 0 0 0 
Single 
Zipset 
Zipset 
2 True 46.6 
3.8 0 0 
Zipset 
Zipset 
3 True 80.0 
3.8 0 0 
Zipset 
Zipset 
4 True 87 3.8 0 0 
Zipset 
Zipset 
5 True 93.7 
3.8 0 0 
Zipset 
Zipset 
2 False 
42.8 
0 0 0 
Zipset 
Zipset 
3 False 
76.2 
0 0 0 
Zipset 
Zipset 
4 False 
83.2 
0 0 0 
Zipset 
Zipset 
5 False 
89.9 
0 0 0 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Note: 
Collator Setup Pricing Rules 
The criteria for some rules may be "none" which merely indicates that the 
rule should be run every time because of the existence of the 
manufacturing process and cost component. 
______________________________________ 
Cost Component 
Optional? 
Feature Input Factor 
Operation 
______________________________________ 
Yes Filefold Feature Setup Minutes 
90 add 
Yes Cross web glue 
Feature Setup Minutes 
150 add 
1 glue unit 
Yes Cross web glue 
Feature Setup Minutes 
210 add 
2 glue units 
Yes Cross web glue 
Feature Setup Minutes 
255 add 
3 glue units 
Yes Cross web glue 
Feature Setup Minutes 
285 add 
4 glue units 
Yes Accumod Feature Setup Minutes 
60 add 
number 
Yes Autographic 
Feature Setup Minutes 
60 add 
number 
______________________________________ 
Collator Run 
Collator Run Equation 
Collator running minutes/M are calculated differently by collator type. The 
equation shown can be used for Crimp, Glue and Zipset collating, but the 
supporting reference data is separate. The calculation consists of three 
major portions: base running, carbon roll change time, and paper roll 
change time. 
##EQU13## 
Base Calculation Initializations (All Collator Types) 
1. Form Plies is a count of the paper ply records for this manufacturing 
order. 
2. Feature Base Adjustment should be initialized to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
3. Feature Base Adjustment Min/M should be initialized to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
4. Carbon Roll Change Time is found in the Pricing Constants table. 
5. Total Carbon Caliper is the sum of all carbon calipers as found in the 
Feature List Attribute Carbon Caliper attached to each carbon Ply. 
6. Carbon Roll Inner Diameter and Carbon Roll Outer Diameter are found in 
the Roll Type table shown below. These values are found in the Carbon Roll 
records where the Jumbo indicator matches that found on the Manufacturing 
Order record. 
7. Collator #Wide is found on the collator Manufacturing Step record. 
8. Paper Roll Change Time is found in the Pricing Constants table. 
9. Number Reset Time should be initialized to 0 for the base calculation. 
10. Total Paper Caliper is the sum of all paper calipers as found in the 
Feature List Attribute Paper Caliper attached to each paper Ply. 
11. Paper Roll Inner Diameter and Paper Roll Outer Diameter are found in 
the Roll Type table shown below. These values are found in the Finish Roll 
records where the Jumbo indicator matches that found on the Manufacturing 
Order record. 
12. Mfg Length should be set equal to the Maximum Mfg Length of all paper 
and carbon plies in the Ply table. 
13. Number of Streams is initialized to the value of Num.sub.-- Streams as 
found in the Collator Mfg Step record. 
14. Manufacturing Reduction should be set to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
15. Collator Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using 
the SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
The Base FPM and Ply Adjustment FPM inputs are initialized differently 
depending on which type of collator is being used in the production of 
this form. The Equipment.sub.-- Type.sub.-- ID on the Mfg Step table for 
the collator operation identifies which collator to use. See the Equipment 
Type table for the actual Ids for these collator types. 
Base Calculation Initializations (Stanset Crimp Collator) 
1. Base FPM and Ply Adjustment FPM is initialized to the value found in the 
Crimp Collator Base Speed table shown below. 
Base Calculation Initializations (Stanset Glue Collator) 
1. Base FPM is initialized to the value found in the Glue Collator Base 
Speed table shown below. 
2. Ply Adjustment FPM is set to 0 for the base calculation. 
Base Calculation Initializations (Zipset Collator) 
1. Base FPM is initialized to the value found in the Zipset Collator Base 
Speed table shown below. 
2. Ply Adjustment FPM is set to 0 for the base calculation. 
______________________________________ 
Roll Type Table 
Roll Type Jumbo O.D. I.D. 
______________________________________ 
Mill Roll True 36 3 
Mill Roll False 36 3 
Finish True 39 3.5 
Finish False 20 3 
Carbon True 27 3 
Carbon False 17 3 
______________________________________ 
Jumbo (describes Press Finished Roll and Collator Paper and Carbon) is in 
Manufacturing Order 
______________________________________ 
Crimp Collator Base Speed 
Product Base Ply Adjustment 
Type Jumbo FPM FPM 
______________________________________ 
Stanset False 266 16.65 
Stanset True 288 19.66 
______________________________________ 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Glue Collator Base Speed 
Product 
Minimum 
Carbon- 
Type 
Ply Weight 
less 
Jumbo 
1 Ply 
2 Ply 
3 Ply 
4 Ply 
5 Ply 
6 Ply 
7 Ply 
8 Ply 
9 Ply 
10 Ply 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Stanset 
0 False 
True 
105 
242 
221 
182 
162 
146 
113 
113 
97 89 
Stanset 
12 False 
True 
242 
282 
262 
242 
203 
182 
146 
130 
105 
97 
Stanset 
20 False 
True 
242 
242 
221 
182 
162 
146 
113 
113 
97 89 
Stanset 
60 False 
True 
203 
242 
146 
130 
130 
81 81 73 73 73 
Stanset 
80 False 
True 
146 
162 
97 
89 
89 
81 81 73 73 73 
Stanset 
100 False 
True 
146 
113 
97 
89 
89 
81 81 73 73 73 
Stanset 
12 True 
True 282 
221 
182 
162 
113 
105 
97 89 81 
Stanset 
20 True 
True 242 
146 
130 
130 
113 
105 
97 89 81 
Stanset 
105 True 
True 
146 
113 
97 
89 
89 
81 81 73 73 73 
Stanset 
0 False 
False 
78 
179 
164 
135 
120 
108 
84 84 72 66 
Stanset 
12 False 
False 
179 
209 
194 
179 
150 
135 
108 
96 78 72 
Stanset 
20 False 
False 
179 
179 
164 
135 
120 
108 
84 84 72 66 
Stanset 
60 False 
False 
150 
179 
108 
96 
96 
60 60 54 54 54 
Stanset 
80 False 
False 
108 
120 
72 
66 
66 
60 60 54 54 54 
Stanset 
100 False 
False 
108 
84 
72 
66 
66 
60 60 54 54 54 
Stanset 
12 True 
False 209 
164 
135 
120 
84 78 72 66 60 
Stanset 
20 True 
False 179 
108 
96 
96 
84 78 72 66 60 
Stanset 
105 True 
False 
108 
84 
72 
66 
66 
60 60 54 54 54 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
______________________________________ 
Zipset Collator Base Speed Table 
Number of 
Plies .times. 
Number of Cutoff 
Streams Number of 
length &gt; 
(Minimum) 
Operators 
4" Breakaway 
Jumbo Base FPM 
______________________________________ 
1 1 False False False 1 
1 1 False True False 130 
1 1 True False False 115 
1 1 True True False 150 
1 1 False False True 185 
1 1 False True True 
1 1 True False True 
1 1 True True True 
1 2 False False False 125 
1 2 False True False 185 
1 2 True False False 175 
1 2 True True False 
1 2 False False True 
1 2 False True True 
1 2 True False True 
1 2 True True True 
2 1 False False False 
2 1 False True False 
2 1 True False False 
2 1 True True False 
2 1 False False True 
2 1 False True True 
2 1 True False True 
2 1 True True True 
2 2 False False False 
2 2 False True False 
2 2 True False False 
2 2 True True False 
2 2 False False True 
2 2 False True True 
2 2 True False True 
2 2 True True True 
4 1 False False False 
4 1 False True False 
4 1 True False False 
4 1 True True False 
4 1 False False True 
4 1 False True True 
4 1 True False True 
4 1 True True True 
4 2 False False False 
4 2 False True False 
4 2 True False False 
4 2 True True False 
4 2 False False True 
4 2 False True True 
4 2 True False True 
4 2 True True True 
7 1 False False False 
7 1 False True False 
7 1 True False False 
7 1 True True False 
7 1 False False True 
7 1 False True True 
7 1 True False True 
7 1 True True True 
7 2 False False False 
7 2 False True False 
7 2 True False False 
7 2 True True False 
7 2 False False True 
7 2 False True True 
7 2 True False True 
7 2 True True True 
10 1 False False False 
10 1 False True False 
10 1 True False False 
10 1 True True False 
10 1 False False True 
10 1 False True True 
10 1 True False True 
10 1 True True True 
10 2 False False False 
10 2 False True False 
10 2 True False False 
10 2 True True False 
10 2 False False True 
10 2 False True True 
10 2 True False True 
10 2 True True True 
______________________________________ 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Collator Running Feature Rule Examples 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Feature 1st Condition 
2nd Condition 
3rd Condition 
Variable Name 
Value 
Operation 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Press Applied 
Regular Crimp only Base FPM -33.3 
Add 
Consec. Numbers 
Collator 
Press Applied 
Regular Crimp Only Feature Base 
8.7 Replace 
Consec. Numbers 
Collator Adjustment % 
Press Applied 
Jumbo Crimp Only Base FPM 39.3 
Add 
Consec. Numbers 
Collator 
Press Applied 
Jumbo Crimp Only Feature Base 
7.0 Replace 
Consec. Numbers 
Collator Adjustment % 
Hotspot Crimp Only Form Plies 
1 Add 
Any Ply is DRY 
2 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 120 Replace 
GUM 
Any Ply is DRY 
3 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 108 Replace 
GUM 
Any Ply is DRY 
4 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 96 Replace 
GUM 
Any Ply is DRY 
5 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 96 Replace 
GUM 
Any Ply is DRY 
6 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 84 Replace 
GUM 
Any Ply is DRY 
7 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 78 Replace 
GUM 
Any Ply is DRY 
8 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 72 Replace 
GUM 
Any Ply is DRY 
9 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 66 Replace 
GUM 
Any Ply is DRY 
10 ply Any Glue Continuous 
Base FPM 60 Replace 
GUM 
Transfer tape Zipset Form Plies 
1 add 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1/2 in stub With carbon Feature base 
20.0 
Replace 
adjustment % 
filefold Feature base 
1 add 
adjustment 
min/m 
cross web glue 
cutoff length &gt; Feature base 
1.7 add 
11 adjustment 
min/m 
cross web glue 
cutoff length &lt; Feature base 
1.35 
add 
11 adjustment 
min/m 
ocr collator number Feature base 
20.0 
replace 
adjustment % 
accumod number Feature base 
10.0 
replace 
adjustment % 
autographic number Feature base 
10.0 
replace 
adjustment % 
physicians perfs Feature base 
10.0 
replace 
adjustment % 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
2nd 
cond 5th 
1st Cutoff 
3rd 4th cond 
cond Length 
cond cond 
product 
6TH Variable Increase 
feature # Operators 
&gt;4" Breakaway 
Jumbo 
id cond Name factor 
Operation 
Input 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1 N N N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1 N Y N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1 Y N N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1 Y Y N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
2 N N N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
2 N Y N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
2 Y N N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1 N N Y zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1 N Y Y zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1 Y N Y zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
Reverse 50 or Less 
1 Y Y Y zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
1 N N N zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
1 N Y N zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
1 Y N N zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
1 Y Y N zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
2 N N N zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
2 N Y N zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
2 Y N N zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
1 N N Y zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
1 N Y Y zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
1 Y N Y zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
PAPER &gt; 50 LB 
1 Y Y Y zipset 
PLY WIDTH 50% OF 
Base FPM Replace 
F 
LARGEST WIDTH 
SPOT PASTE 
1 N N N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
1 N Y N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
1 Y N N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
1 Y Y N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
2 N N N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
2 N Y N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
2 Y N N zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
1 N N Y zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
1 N Y Y zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
1 Y N Y zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
SPOT PASTE 
1 Y Y Y zipset Base FPM Replace 
F 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Guillotine: Pads/Books 
Guillotine: Pads/Books Equation 
##EQU14## 
EQU Guillotine Labor Cost/M=Guillotine Minutes/M.times.Guillotine Labor 
$/Hour.div.60 Minutes/Hour 
The equation shown above is based on the following: 
##EQU15## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Number Cuts is populated from Num.sub.-- Cuts on the Guillotine: 
Pads/Books manufacturing step record. 
2. Setup Minutes, Minutes/Flat Lift, Cut Minutes/Lift and Flat Lift Height 
are found in the Base Guillotine Time table shown below. The key, Mfg Step 
Desc Code, is a field in the associated Manufacturing Step record. 
3. Lift Height should be set equal to Flat Lift Height for the base 
calculation. 
4. Feature Adjustment should be initialized to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
5. Quantity Per Group is the largest value of the QTY attribute for any of 
the following features in the Order Features table: Polywrap, Padding, 
Kraft Wrap (rel II) or Booking (rel II). If none of the listed features 
exist then Quantity Per Group is 1. 
6. Carbonless % should be initialized to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
7. Set Caliper is the sum of all paper and carbon ply calipers. 
8. Other Component Caliper should be initialized to 0.0000 for the base 
calculation. 
9. Group Factor is based on the value of Group Caliper. If Group 
Caliper&gt;Lift Height then Group Factor is 0.5, otherwise Group Factor is 1. 
This is due to the fact that the pack height of a large wrap quantity may 
in some infrequent cases exceed the maximum lift height. In these cases 
the pack quantity split into 2 packs. 
10. Num Around is found in the Num.sub.-- Around field in associated 
manufacturing step. 
11. Order Quantity is found in the Order.sub.-- Qty field in the 
Customer.sub.-- Order table. 
12. Guillotine Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using 
the SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
______________________________________ 
Base.sub.-- Guillotine.sub.-- Time 
Setup Minutes Cut Minutes 
Flat Lift 
Mfg Step Description Code 
Minutes Flat Lift 
Lift Height 
______________________________________ 
GTRIMODD 4.0 .50 .18 3.0 
GTRIMSTB 4.0 .88 .18 3.0 
GMULTIUP 4.0 1.86 .18 2.4 
GPADBOOK 4.0 .36 .18 5.5 
______________________________________ 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Guillotine: Pads/Books Pricing Rules 
Rel 
Pricing 
II 
Rule 
Feature Input Name Factor 
Operation 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
1 Padding Other Component Caliper 
500 Add 
Y 2 Any Ply is Pressure Sensitive Paper 
Feature Adjustment % 
25% 
Replace 
3 Any Ply is Carbonless Paper 
Carbonless % 
33% 
Replace 
4 Collate Cutoff Length &gt;= 22 
Minutes Per Lift 
0.60 
Replace 
5 Product Type = Sheets 
Minutes Per Lift 
0.60 
Replace 
6 Different width Plies 
Minutes Per Lift 
0.84 
Replace 
Collate Cutoff Length &lt; 22 
7 Different width Plies 
Minutes Per Lift 
1.02 
Replace 
Collate Cutoff Length &gt;= 22 
8 Feather Edge Carbon 
Minutes Per Lift 
4.32 
Replace 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Guillotine: Trim Odd Width 
Guillotine: Trim Odd Width Equation 
##EQU16## 
EQU Guillotine Labor Cost/M=Guillotine Minutes/M.times.Guillotine Labor 
$/Hour.div.60 Minutes/Hour 
The equation shown above is based on the following: 
##EQU17## 
Base Calculation Initializations 
1. Flat Indicator should be initialized to 1 for the base calculation. 
2. Setup Minutes, Minutes/Flat Lift, Cut Minutes/Lift and Flat Lift Height 
are found in the Base Guillotine Time table shown below. The key, Mfg Step 
Desc Code, is a field in the associated Manufacturing Step record. 
3. Form.sub.-- Width is set equal to the value of the Form.sub.-- Width 
field in Manufacturing.sub.-- Order table. 
4. Blade Length is a lookup from the Pricing.sub.-- Constants table. 
5. Fanned Indicator should be initialized to 0 for the base calculation. 
6. Minimum Indicator should be initialized to 1 for the base calculation. 
7. Maximum Indicator should be initialized to 0 for the base calculation. 
8. Minutes Per Fanned Lift should be set equal to 0 for the base 
calculation. 
9. Feature Adjustment Minutes should be initialized to 0 for the base 
calculation. 
10. Feature Adjustment % should be initialized to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
11. Quantity Per Group is the largest value of the QTY attribute for any of 
the following features in the Order Features table: Polywrap, Padding, 
Kraft Wrap (rel II) or Booking (rel II). If none of the listed features 
exist, then Quantity Per Group is 1. 
12. Group Factor is based on the value of Group Caliper. If Group 
Caliper&gt;Lift Height then Group Factor is 0.5, otherwise Group Factor is 1. 
This is due to the fact that the pack height of a large wrap quantity may 
in some infrequent cases exceed the maximum lift height. In these cases 
the pack quantity split into 2 packs. 
13. Fanned Lift Height should be initialized to 0 for the base calculation. 
14. Set Caliper is the sum of all paper and carbon ply calipers. 
15. Other Component Caliper should be initialized to 0.0000 for the base 
calculation. 
16. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field in the 
Customer Order table. 
17. Guillotine Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using 
the SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
______________________________________ 
Base.sub.-- Guillotine.sub.-- Time 
Setup Minutes/ Cut Minutes/ 
Flat Lift 
Mfg Step Description Code 
Minutes Flat Lift 
Lift Height 
______________________________________ 
GTRIMODD 4.0 .50 .18 3.0 
GTRIMSTB 4.0 .88 .18 3.0 
GMULTIUP 4.0 1.86 .18 2.4 
GPADBOOK 4.0 .36 .18 5.5 
______________________________________ 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Guillotine: Trim Odd Width Pricing Rules 
Rel 
Pricing 
II 
Rule 
Conditions Input Name Factor 
Operation 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
1 Form Width &gt; 10.2" 
Minutes Per Flat Lift 
2.2 
Replace 
Maximum Indicator 
1 Replace 
Minimum Indicator 
0 Replace 
2 Consecutive Numbers 
Flat Lift Height 
2.4 
Replace 
Feature Adjustment Minutes 
.8 
Replace 
3 Different Width Ply 
Fanned Lift Height 
12 Replace 
Minutes Per Fanned Lift 
2.5 
Replace 
Fanned Indicator 
1 Replace 
Flat Indicator 
0 Replace 
4 Feather Edge Carbon 
Fanned Lift Height 
12 Replace 
Minutes Per Fanned Lift 
4.7 
Replace 
Fanned Indicator 
1 Replace 
Flat Indicator 
0 Replace 
Y 5 Any Ply is Pressure Sensitive Paper 
Feature Adjustment % 
25% 
Replace 
6 Padding Other Component Caliper 
500 Add 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Guillotine: Multi-Up Sheets 
Guillotine: Multi-Up Sheets Equation 
##EQU18## 
EQU Guillotine Labor Cost/M=Guillotine Minutes/(M.times.Guillotine Labor 
$/Hour.div.60 Minutes/Hour 
The equation shown above is based on the following: 
##EQU19## 
Base Calculation Initialization: 1. Number Cuts should be set equal to the 
Num.sub.-- Cuts field in the Guillotine Multi-up Sheets manufacturing 
step. 
2. Setup Minutes, Minutes/Flat Lift, Cut Minutes/Lift and Flat Lift/Height 
are found in the Best Guillotine Time table shown below. The key, Mfg Step 
Desc Code, is a field in the associated Manufacturing Step record. 
3. Feature Adjustment % should be initialized to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
4. Quantity Per Group is the largest value of the QTY attribute for any of 
the following features in the Order Features table: Polywrap, Padding, 
Kraft Wrap (rel II) or Booking (rel II). If none of the listed features 
exist, then Quantity Per Group is 1. 
5. Group Factor is based on the value of Group Caliper. If Group 
Caliper&gt;Lift Height then Group Factor is 0.5, otherwise Group Factor is 1. 
This is due to the fact that the pack height of a large wrap quantity may 
in some infrequent cases exceed the maximum lift height. In these cases 
the pack quantity split into 2 packs. 
6. Press Num Wide is set equal to the Num.sub.-- Wide field in the Press 
Manufacturing Step record. Note that there is never more than one press 
step for sheeted singles which is the only product type that would have a 
Multi-Up Sheets Guillotine step. 
7. Press Num Around is set equal to the Num.sub.-- Around field in the 
Press Manufacturing Step record. 
8. Paper Caliper is equal to the Paper Caliper attribute in the Feature 
List Attribute table. 
9. Other Component Caliper should be initialized to 0.0000 for the base 
calculation. 
10. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field in the 
Customer Order table. 
11. Guillotine Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using 
the SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
______________________________________ 
Base.sub.-- Guillotine.sub.-- Time 
Setup Minutes/ Cut Minutes/ 
Flat Lift 
Mfg Step Description Code 
Minutes Flat Lift 
Lift Height 
______________________________________ 
GTRIMODD 4.0 .50 .18 3.0 
GTRIMSTB 4.0 .88 .18 3.0 
GMULTIUP 4.0 1.86 .18 2.4 
GPADBOOK 4.0 .36 .18 5.5 
______________________________________ 
______________________________________ 
Guillotine: Multi-Up Sheets Pricing Rules 
Rel 
II Condition Input Name Factor 
Operation 
______________________________________ 
Padding Other Component Caliper 
500 Add 
Y Any Ply is Feature Adjustment % 
25% Replace 
Pressure Sensitive 
Paper 
______________________________________ 
Guillotine: Trim Stub 
Guillotine: Trim Stub Equation 
##EQU20## 
Guillotine Labor Cost/M=Guillotine Minutes/M.times.Guillotine Labor 
$/Hour.div.60 Minutes/Hour 
The equation shown above is based on the following: 
##EQU21## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. Feature Adjustment % should be 
initialized to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
2. Setup Minutes, Minutes/Flat Lift, Cut Minutes/Lift and Flat Lift Height 
are found in the Base Guillotine Time table shown below. The key, Mfg Step 
Desc Code, is a field in the associated Manufacturing Step record. 
3. Form.sub.-- Width is set equal to the Form.sub.-- Width field found in 
the Manufacturing.sub.-- Order table. 
4. Blade Length is a lookup from the Pricing.sub.-- Constants table. 
5. Minimum Indicator should be initialized to 1 for the base calculation. 
6. Maximum Indicator should be initialized to 0 for the base calculation. 
7. Set Caliper is the sum of all paper and carbon ply calipers. 
8. Quantity Per Group is the largest value of the QTY attribute for any of 
the following features in the Order Features table: Polywrap, Padding, 
Kraft Wrap (rel II) or Booking (rel II). If none of the listed features 
exist, then Quantity Per Group is 1. 
9. Group Factor is based on the value of Group Caliper. If Group 
Caliper&gt;Lift Height then Group Factor is 0.5, otherwise Group Factor is 1. 
This is due to the fact that the pack height of a large wrap quantity may 
in some infrequent cases exceed the maximum lift height. In these cases 
the pack quantity split into 2 packs. 
10. Other Component Calipers should be initialized to 0.0000 for the base 
calculation. 
11. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field in the 
Customer.sub.-- Order table. 
12. Guillotine Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using 
the SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
______________________________________ 
Base.sub.-- Guillotine.sub.-- Time 
Mfg Step Setup Minutes Cut Minutes/ 
Flat Lift 
Description Code 
Minutes Flat Lift Lift Height 
______________________________________ 
GTRIMODD 4.0 .50 .18 3.0 
GTRIMSTB 4.0 .88 .18 3.0 
GMULTIUP 4.0 1.86 .18 2.4 
GPADBOOK 4.0 .36 .18 5.5 
______________________________________ 
Guillotine: Trim Stub Pricing Rules 
Rel Pricing Oper- 
II Rule Conditions Input Name Factor 
ation 
______________________________________ 
1 Form Length &gt; 
Minutes Per 
4.0 Replace 
9.9" Flat Lift 
Maximum Indicator 
1 Replace 
Minimum Indicator 
0 Replace 
2 Padding Other Component 
500 Add 
Caliper 
Y 3 Any ply is Feature Adjustment 
25% Replace 
Pressure % 
Sensitive Paper 
______________________________________ 
Padding 
Padding Equation 
##EQU22## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. Padding Setup Minutes and 
Minutes/Slab are found in Padding.sub.-- Minutes data reference tables. 
See below. 
2. Pad # Around is set equal to the Num.sub.-- Around field in the Padding 
Manufacturing Step. 
3. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
4. Forms/Pad is set equal to the Qty display attribute associated to the 
Padding Feature. 
5. Padding Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using the 
SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
______________________________________ 
Padding.sub.-- Minutes 
Multi Ply 
Min Forms/Pad 
Setup Minutes 
Minutes/Slab 
______________________________________ 
False 1 15 .082 
False 50 15 .111 
True 1 15 .111 
______________________________________ 
Padding Pricing Rules 
There are no Pricing Rules for the Padding Cost Component. 
Wrapping 
Wrapping Equation 
##EQU23## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. Wrapping Setup Minutes, Feed Size 
Change Minutes, Lineup Factor and Minutes/Pack are found in the Pricing 
Constants table. 
2. Order Quantity is found in the Order.sub.-- Qty field in the Customer 
Order table. 
3. Forms/Pack is set equal to the Qty display attribute associated with 
Wrapping feature on the order. 
4. Wrapping Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using the 
SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
______________________________________ 
Wrapping Minutes 
Feed Size 
Minutes/Pa 
Setup Change Lineup 
Style ck Minutes Minutes 
Factor 
______________________________________ 
Polywrap .26 3.6 0 1 
Banding .78 2.88 0 1 
Kraft Wrap 
1.26 2.88 26 1 
______________________________________ 
Note: Only Polywrap is included and therefore, these are the only values 
that will be found in the Pricing Constants table. 
Wrapping Pricing Rules 
There are no Pricing Rules for the Wrapping Cost Component. 
Outer Boxing 
Outer Boxing Equation 
##EQU24## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. Lookup Standard Outer Boxing Minutes 
Per Carton in Pricing Constants table. 
2. Standard Outer Carton Quantity is set equal to the Std.sub.-- 
Carton.sub.-- Qty field in the Manufacturing Order table. 
3. Special Outer Carton Quantity should be initialized to the value found 
in the Special Quantity Display attribute attached to the Special Feature 
(Feature Type=Packaging). If this feature or feature attribute is not 
defined for this order, the Special Outer Carton Quantity should be set 
equal to Standard Outer Carton Quantity. 
4. Outer Boxing Labor Rate is found in the SRC Cost Center List table using 
the SRC Cost Center ID found in the Mfg Step table. 
Outer Boxing Pricing Rules 
There are no pricing rules currently defined for the Outer Boxing Cost 
Component. 
Labor Burden 
Labor Burden Equation 
PRIMAC will potentially account for fixed and variable burden separately. 
The order entry system 10 (also referred to herein as STAR) will follow 
that same direction. Fixed Burden is calculated as dollars per labor hour. 
Variable Burden is calculated as a percent of direct labor cost. Pricing 
burden will be based on Practical Capacity utilization rather than actual 
utilization. For each Direct Labor Cost calculation there is a 
corresponding Labor Burden Cost calculation, although one generic Labor 
Burden Cost equation can be used in every case. In this equation shown 
below 
##EQU25## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. Operation Variable Burden Rate, 
Operation Fixed Burden $/Hour, Operation Actual Utilization Rate, and 
Operation Practical Capacity Utilization Rate are found in the SRC Cost 
Center List table shown below. Note that the record selected from this 
table will vary according to the cost component that is currently being 
calculated. 
2. Operation Labor Cost/M and Operation Minutes/M are the results of the 
associated cost component equations calculated earlier. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
SRC Cost Center List Table 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Cost Variable 
Fixed 
Cost Center 
Mfg Prod 
Cyl 
# Center 
Rate 
Labor 
Burden 
Burden 
Act. 
Pract. 
Descript 
Process 
Type 
Size 
op Type Type 
Rate 
Percent 
$/Hr 
Use Cpcty 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Composing 
Limited 
0 1 Comps Corp 
11.50 
0% $0 90% 
Photo Limited 
0 1 Photo Corp 
14.76 
267% $0 59% 90% 
Offset Off. 
Press Limited 
22 1 Press Corp 
15.30 
399% $0 56% 90% 
Press Limited 
24 1 Press Corp 
14.88 
363% $0 95% 90% 
Press Limited 
28 1 Press Corp 
15.38 
390% $0 82% 90% 
Press Limited 
25.5 
1 Press Corp 
15.62 
361% $0 85% 90% 
Press Limited 
32 1 Press Corp 
15.58 
358% $0 90% 
Press Limited 
20 1 Press Corp 
15.44 
365% $0 90% 
Collator 
Limited 
Stan 
0 1 Collator 
Corp 
14.71 
322% $0 90% 
Collator 
Limited 
Zip 
0 1 Collator 
Corp 
14.74 
301% $0 90% 
Collator 
Limited 
Zip 
0 2 Collator 
Corp 
26.38 
301% $0 90% 
Guillotine: 
Limited 
0 1 G: P/Bs 
Corp 
13.61 
267% $0 70% 
Pads/ 
Books 
Guillotine: 
Limited 
0 1 G: Wdth 
Corp 70% 
Trim Odd 
Width 
Guillotine: 
Limited 
0 1 G: Multi- 
Corp 70% 
Multi-Up Up 
Sheets 
Guillotine: 
Limited 
0 1 G: Stub 
Corp 70% 
Trim Stub 
Drilling 
Limited 
0 1 Drilling 
Corp 
11.46 
182% $0 70% 
Booking 
Limited 
0 1 Bking Corp 
11.11 
173% $0 70% 
Wrapping 
Limited 
0 1 Wrppng 
Corp 
12.93 
261% $0 70% 
Boxing 
Limited 
0 1 Boxing 
Corp 70% 
Padding 
Limited 
0 1 Padding 
Corp 
10.59 
236% $0 70% 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Cost Variable 
Fixed 
Cost Center 
Mfg Prod 
Cyl 
Num 
Center 
Rate 
Labor 
Burden 
Burden 
Actual 
Pract. 
Descript 
Process 
Type 
Size 
Oper 
Type Type 
Rate 
Percent 
$/Hr 
Use Cpcty 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Composing 
Custom 0 1 Composing 
Corp 
11.50 
0% $0 90% 
Photo Custom 0 1 Photo Off 
Corp 
14.76 
267% $0 59% 90% 
Offset 
Press Custom 22 1 Press Corp 
15.30 
399% $0 56% 90% 
Press Custom 24 1 Press Corp 
14.88 
363% $0 95% 90% 
Press Custom 28 1 Press Corp 
15.38 
390% $0 82% 90% 
Press Custom 25.5 
1 Press Corp 
15.62 
361% $0 85% 90% 
Press Custom 32 1 Press Corp 
15.58 
358% $0 90% 
Press Custom 20 1 Press Corp 
15.44 
365% $0 90% 
Collator 
Custom 
Stan 
0 1 Collator 
Corp 
14.71 
322% $0 90% 
Collator 
Custom 
Zip 
0 1 Collator 
Corp 
14.74 
301% $0 90% 
Collator 
Custom 
Zip 
0 2 Collator 
Corp 
26.38 
301% $0 90% 
Guillotine: 
Custom 0 1 G: P/Bs 
Corp 
13.61 
267% $0 70% 
Pads/ 
Books 
Guillotine: 
Custom 0 1 G: Width 
Corp 70% 
Trim Odd 
Width 
Guillotine: 
Custom 0 1 G: Multi- 
Corp 70% 
Multi-Up Up 
Sheets 
Guillotine: 
Custom 0 1 G: Stub 
Corp 70% 
Trim Stub 
Drilling 
Custom 0 1 Drilling 
Corp 
11.46 
182% $0 70% 
Booking 
Custom 0 1 Booking 
Corp 
11.11 
173% $0 70% 
Wrapping 
Custom 0 1 Wrapping 
Corp 
12.93 
261% $0 70% 
Boxing 
Custom 0 1 Boxing 
Corp 70% 
Padding 
Custom 0 1 Padding 
Corp 
10.59 
236% $0 70% 
Press Stanfas 
0 1 SF Pre-Fig 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
Gathering 
Stanfas 
0 1 SF Gather 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
Guillotine 
Stanfas 
0 1 SF Guill 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
Perf Stanfas 
0 1 SF Perf 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
Folding 
Stanfas 
0 1 SF Fold 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
Numbering 
Stanfas 
0 1 SF Number 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
Padding 
Stanfas 
0 1 SF Pad 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
Wrapping 
Stanfas 
0 1 SF Wrap 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
Composg 
Stanfas 
0 1 SF Comp 
Corp 
0 0 0 0 0 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Calculated Pricing Rule Effects 
Variable Pricing Rule Effects 
Some of the Pricing Rule Effects do not have constant values by which the 
Cost Component input will be effected but rather the value must be 
calculated based on feature counts and manufacturing conditions. The 
calculation for any given Pricing Rule Effect fits into one of the 
equations listed below. Upon calculating the Pricing Rule Effect, the 
Pricing Engine will return this value and use it like any Constant Effect 
would be used to update the value of the associated Cost Component input. 
Module A--Flat Minutes Dependent on Number Wide 
##EQU26## 
Module B--Flat Minutes Dependent on Number Wide and Number Around 
##EQU27## 
Module C--Flat Minutes Dependent on Number Around 
##EQU28## 
Module D--Flat Minutes Dependent on Feature Count Only 
Additional Feature Setup Minutes=(initial Feature Count.times.Minutes Per 
Inital Unit).div.Lineup Factor 
Module E--Running Minutes Dependent on Number Wide and Number Around 
Minutes=(Feature Count.times.Minutes Per Initial Unit.times.Number 
Wide.times.Number Around).div.Lineup Factor 
Modules A, B, and C apply to features which require additional initial 
setup minutes for each occurrence of the feature on the same ply, but no 
additional time for the identical feature on subsequent plies. But, the 
same feature can exist on more than one ply, with some differences in the 
attributes of the feature on different plies. In these cases, one ply 
requires time for installation of the equipment for the feature, while 
another ply requires time to make modifications. 
Module D is used for calculation of time for the setup of features such as 
ink and plate installations which depend on how many are required. 
Calculation Initializations: 
1. Initial Feature Count and Changed Feature Count are done in the pricing 
calculation code. 
2. Number Wide and Number Around are determined for each mfg step by 
validation. Where these calculations are being done for Setup Mfg Steps, 
the maximum Number Wide and Number Around should be used. Otherwise, use 
Number Wide and Number Around from the specific Running Mfg Step currently 
being processed. 
3. Minutes Per Initial Unit, Minutes Per Changed Unit, Initial Feature 
Fixed Minutes, Changed Feature Fixed Minutes, and Lineup Factor are found 
in a reference data table. See below. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Pricing Rule Effect Input 
Minutes/ 
Initial 
Changed 
Equipment 
Minutes/ 
Changed 
Fixed 
Fixed 
Lineup 
Feature Type Module 
Initial Unit 
Unit Minutes 
Minutes 
Factor 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
3/16 Reg. Number 
Press 
B .2 .2 4.1 4.1 1 
Hitskip Vert. Perf. 
Press 
A 6.1 0 18.6 
18.6 1 
Full Vert. Perf. 
Press 
A 1.8 0 1.1 1.1 1 
Full Horiz. Perf. 
Press 
C 6.3 0 7.1 7.1 1 
Hitskip Horiz. Perf. 
Press 
C 8.3 0 9.8 9.8 1 
Standard Inks 
Press 
D 24.5 0 0 0 1 
(Litho) 
Standard Plates 
Press 
D 33.5 0 0 0 1 
(Orig and Extra) 
3/16 Reg. Number 
Press 
E 0.2 0 0 0 1 
MICR Number 
Press 
E 0.2 0 0 0 1 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Pricing Constants 
Pricing Constants 
Pricing constants have been referenced throughout the equations. Listed 
below is the Pricing Constants table with the necessary data populated. 
______________________________________ 
Pricing Constants Table 
Constant Value 
______________________________________ 
Secondary Operation Waste % 
1% 
Paper Burden $ per LB 0 
Paper Burden $ per MSI 0 
Paper Burden $ per Finished Sheet 
0 
Blade Length 45 
PolyWrap Setup Minutes 3.6 
PolyWrap Feed Size Change Minutes 
0 
PolyWrap Lineup Factor 1 
PolyWrap Minutes per Pack 
0.26 
Standard Outer Boxing Minutes per Carton 
1.4 
Latitude Mileage Factor 
69.2 
Longitude Mileage Factor 
0.77 
Packaging Weight Factor 
10% 
Truck Maximum Pounds 44,000 
Truck Rate Minimum Pounds 
10,000 
Storage Average Releases 
12 
Storage Average Distance 
200 
HVCO Order Qualifier $15,000 
HVCO Carton Qualifier $140 
______________________________________ 
The equations and rules for the markup cost component are as follows: 
Markup 
Markup Equation 
The basis for markup is Factory Cost. Factory cost consists of two parts: 
material cost, which is the cost of the paper, carbon, and miscellaneous 
material purchased to produce the order; and conversion, which is the cost 
associated with the labor and burden involved in converting the purchased 
material into the finished form. 
##EQU29## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Surcharge % should be set equal 
to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
2. The Manufacturing Reduction % should be set equal to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
3. The Overrun % should be set equal to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
4. Conversion Cost/M is the cost associated with converting raw materials 
into the finished form. It is equal to the sum of all Labor Cost 
Components except for the Composition Labor and Composition Labor Burden 
Cost Components. 
5. Total Factory Cost/M is the total cost incurred at the manufacturing 
facility to create the finished product. It is equal to the sum of the 
Conversion Cost/M, Paper Cost/M, Paper Burden Cost/M, Carbon Cost/M, and 
Miscellaneous Material Cost/M. 
6. The Composition Labor Cost/M is the value of the Composition Labor Cost 
Component. 
7. The Composition Labor Burden Cost/M is the value of the Composition 
Labor Burden Cost Component. 
8. Order Quantity is set equal to the value of Order.sub.-- Qty in the 
Customer Order table. 
9. All other inputs are initialized from the Markup reference table shown 
below. 
______________________________________ 
Markup Table (The values in this table represent 
only the Stanset product. Other rows would be created 
for other product types as well.) 
Product Type 
Input Affected Value 
______________________________________ 
Stanset Fixed Administrative Expense 
$15.67 
Stanset Variable Administrative Expense 
18.54% 
Stanset Fixed Engineering Expense 
$0 
Stanset Variable Engineering Expense 
3.44% 
Stanset Fixed Selling Expense 
$86.52 
Stanset Variable Selling Expense 
11.84% 
Stanset Fixed Profit Target 
$0 
Stanset Variable Profit Target 
15% 
Stanset Fixed Differential Target 
$0 
Stanset Variable Differential Target 
18% 
Stanset Sales Volume $161,098,200 
Stanset List Volume $195,066,300 
Stanset Order Count 66,949 
______________________________________ 
______________________________________ 
Markup Pricing Rules (sample set only) 
Pricing 
Rule Conditions Input Name 
Factor 
Operation 
______________________________________ 
1 No Overrun Overrun % 10% Add 
Product Type = Zipset 
Order Quantity &lt;= 50 M 
2 No Overrun Overrun % 5% Add 
Product Type = Zipset 
Order Quantity &gt; 50 M 
Order Quantity &lt;= 100 M 
______________________________________ 
Pricing Constants 
Pricing constants have been referenced throughout the equations. Listed 
below is the Pricing Constants table with the necessary data populated. 
______________________________________ 
Pricing Constants Table 
Constant Value 
______________________________________ 
Secondary Operation Waste % 
1% 
Paper Burden $ per LB 0 
Paper Burden $ per MSI 0 
Paper Burden $ per Finished Sheet 
0 
Blade Length 45 
PolyWrap Setup Minutes 3.6 
PolyWrap Feed Size Change Minutes 
0 
PolyWrap Lineup Factor 1 
PolyWrap Minutes per Pack 
0.26 
Standard Outer Boxing Minutes per Carton 
1.4 
Latitude Mileage Factor 
69.2 
Longitude Mileage Factor 
0.77 
Packaging Weight Factor 
10% 
Truck Maximum Pounds 44,000 
Truck Rate Minimum Pounds 
10,000 
Storage Average Releases 
12 
Storage Average Distance 
200 
HVCO Order Qualifier $15,000 
HVCO Carton Qualifier $140 
______________________________________ 
The equations and rules for the freight and storage cost component are as 
follows: 
PRISM Freight 
PRISM Storage Equation 
This equation is calculated for all negotiated rate customers that choose a 
freight payment method of `Prepaid`. 
EQU Prepaid Freight $ Per M=PRISM Freight Rate.times.Forms Value per M 
Base Calculation Initializations: 
1. PRISM Freight Rate is found in the Freight.sub.-- Rate field in the 
PRISM.sub.-- Storage table. The key to the Prism Storage table includes . 
. . 
CADD Customer Number: This is found in the Sold-To Customer Address record. 
Category: Category is either `Z` which indicates that the record is a 
customer level record or a `P` which represents the record is at a 
Customer Form Number level. This field is used in combination with the 
Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value fields. The Pricing Engine should 
always look for more specific records first. If a customer level record 
exists and a form number level record exists for the same customer, the 
form number level record should be used. Therefore, the Pricing Engine 
will always try to find a Category `P` record first where the value of 
Cust.sub.-- Form.sub.-- Number from the Customer Order table falls 
alphabetically within the range of values represented by the fields 
Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value. If this record cannot be found, 
then a search for a record at the customer level will be performed. This 
search will not use the Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value fields. If 
no customer level record is found, a not-priceable exception is raised. 
Note: There may be multiple records returned that fit the customer form 
number criteria. In these cases, there should be only two, one which is 
for that specific customer form number only (i.e. Begin.sub.-- 
Value=End.sub.-- Value) and one where the specified customer form number 
fits within the range defined by Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value. 
In these cases, the record specific to the specified customer form number 
should be used (i.e. the one where Begin.sub.-- Value=End.sub.-- Value) 
Storage.sub.-- Method: This field is either `C`, which indicates the 
customer has requested full carton releases only, or a `P`, which allows 
the customer to release forms from Storage in less than full cartons. This 
value is set by examining the value of Full.sub.-- Carton.sub.-- Release 
on the Customer Order table. A value of `Y` (True) in this field means 
that Storage.sub.-- Method should be `C`. A value of `N` (False) indicates 
that Storage.sub.-- Method should be `P`. 
Storage Invoice Timing: This field is either `R`, which indicates the 
customer will be invoiced for storage at release of stored forms or `S`, 
which designates the customers desire to be invoiced for storage when they 
are stored. This value is set equal to the value of Storage.sub.-- 
invoice.sub.-- Timing on the Customer Order table. 
Effective Date: this value should be set equal to the current date. 
2. Forms Value per M is either the Forms List Price as calculated by the 
Pricing Engine or the Forms Sell Price as set by the CSR or Sales 
Representative. Which to use is determined by looking at the Based.sub.-- 
on.sub.-- Sell.sub.-- Price field on the PRISM.sub.-- Storage record found 
in Step 1 above. If this value is `Y` (True), then Forms Value per M 
should be set equal to the Forms Sell Price, otherwise, Forms Value per M 
should be set equal to the Forms List Price. 
PRISM Freight Pricing Rules 
No Pricing Rules have been identified for this cost component at this time. 
Freight (Standard Rate) 
Standard Freight Equation 
Prepaid freight is calculated by using either a negotiated rate that has 
been predetermined and inserted in the Prism system or by using standard 
shipping rates. 
If order qualifies for Prism rates, all shipments to the customer are based 
on the Prism rates. These include shipments direct from plants to customer 
as well as shipments from the warehouse to the customer. Freight cost for 
shipments from the plant to the warehouse are included in storage charges 
and therefore are not included in any freight calculations. 
If order does not qualify for Prism rates, standard rates apply to all 
regular shipments to the customer. These rates are determined by the 
shipping mileage and the pounds shipped to each location. For direct 
shipments from the plant to the customer, the shipping mileage is 
determined by Zipcodes and the weight is calculated for the quantity of 
forms in each shipment. For shipments from a storage warehouse, the 
shipping mileage is based on an average shipping distance and shipping 
weight is based on the weight of forms stored divided by an average number 
of release from the warehouse. 
Prism Prepaid Freight 
See PRISM Freight Cost Equation from previous section for details on this 
cost component. 
Standard Prepaid Freight 
Standard freight requires a separate cost component for each prepaid 
shipment. The Prepaid Freight Charge per M value written to the database 
is the sum of all prepaid freight cost components as indicated by the 
following equation. 
EQU Prepaid Freight $ per M=.SIGMA.Destination Freight $ per M 
If the price request does not qualify for Prism rates then standard freight 
must be used. Normally a shipment is handled by a pickup at the plant by a 
carrier and delivered in one step. However, shipments to Hawaii and Alaska 
as well as export shipments are handled in a three step process--Plant To 
Port, Port to Port and Port to final location. Hawaii and Alaska 
destinations are calculated by the price engine since standard freight 
rates apply. All other offshore destinations are export and require 
special manual freight calculation and therefore must be exceptioned. 
Standard prepaid freight may be Store Door or Inside Delivery. Other 
premium freight variations (Desktop, Protective Signature Service, air, 
two man delivery, lift gate or export) will be exceptions (if charges are 
to be buried in list price),miscellaneous charges added by the user or 
Prepay and Charge. Most export orders have the word "FOR" in the ship to 
zipcode field. The exceptions are Puerto Rica (PI) with zipcodes 
00601-00999, Virgin Islands (VI) with zipcodes 00801-00851, Guam(GU) with 
zipcodes 96910 to 96931 and Canada has a 6 digit zipcode. The zipcodes for 
export shipments will not be in the Zipcodes Coordinate table. 
The shipping charges for a given destination consist of a basic store door 
charges plus optional charges for Inside Delivery and Lift Gate (Lift Gate 
is an option). Initialize above inputs as follows: 
There are two areas in the database that indicate when a shipment is 
prepaid--Freight Payment.sub.-- Method.sub.-- Id field in the Customer 
Order table or Freight.sub.-- Payment.sub.-- Method.sub.-- Ovr field in 
the Order Ship Destination table. If the order table data indicates 
Prepaid and the shipment table record is set to null, the shipment is 
Prepaid. If the order table indicates something other than prepaid but the 
shipment table record indicates prepaid, then the shipment is prepaid. The 
Destination Freight $ Per M is calculated follows: 
Step 1. Determine Destination Shipping Pounds. 
##EQU30## 
Base Calculation Initialization: 1. Ply Paper Mfg Width and Ply Paper Mfg 
Length are found in the Mfg Width and Mfg Length fields on the paper ply 
record for each paper ply. 
2. Ply Carbon Mfg Width and Ply Carbon Mfg Length are found in the Mfg 
Width and Mfg Length fields on the carbon ply record for each carbon ply. 
3. Carbon Total Weight is a Feature List Attribute for each Carbon ID. 
4. Packaging weight is found in the Pricing Constants table. 
5. Set Destination Quantity equal to the value in the Ship Qty field in the 
Order Ship Destination table. 
6. Order As Weight is a Feature List Attribute attached to each paper Id. 
______________________________________ 
Pricing Rule 
Pricing Rule Input 
Rule Description 
Effected Factor 
Operation 
______________________________________ 
1 Palletizing 
Packaging 2.5% Add 
Weight % 
______________________________________ 
Step 2. Calculate Number of Full Trucks. 
##EQU31## 
Base Calculation Initialization: 1. Destination Ship Pounds was determined 
in step 1. 
2. Truck Maximum Pounds is found in the Pricing Constants table. Step 3. 
Calculate Partial Truck Pounds 
EQU Partial Truck Pounds=[Destination Ship Pounds-(Truck Maximum 
Pounds.times.Number Full Trucks)] 
Base Calculation Initialization: 
1. Destination Ship Pounds was determined in step 1. 
2. Truck Maximum Pounds is found in the Pricing Constants table. 
3. Number Full trucks was determined in step 2. 
Step 4. Calculate Destination Freight Charge per M. 
##EQU32## 
Base Calculation Initialization: 1. Partial Truck Pounds was determined in 
step 3. 
2. Order Quantity is set equal to Order.sub.-- Qty field on the Customer 
Order Table. 
3. Quantity Per Carton should be initialized to any value greater than zero 
found in the Special Quantity display attribute attached to the Special 
feature id (Feature Type=Packaging). If this feature or feature attribute 
is not defined for this order then set equal to the Std.sub.-- 
Carton.sub.-- Quantity field in the Manufacturing Order table. 
4. Lookup values for Partial Truck Minimum $ and Partial Truck $/CWT in the 
Freight Rate table. Set Partial Truck Minimum $ equal to the value in the 
Freight Minimum Flat Charge field and Partial Truck $/CWT equal to the 
value in the Freight Variable Charge field. Note--convert the value in 
Freight Variable Charge field to $/CWT if necessary. If the value in the 
Variable Charge Unit Id field is $/CTN then convert Freight Variable 
Charge to $/CWT. 
##EQU33## 
Quantity Per Carton (see item #3 above under Base Calculation 
Initialization) $/Carton is the value in the Freight Variable Charge 
field. Destination Pounds Shipped was determined in step 1. Set 
Destination Quantity equal to the value in the Ship Qty field in the Order 
Ship Destination table. Three values are needed to locate the freight rate 
record--Freight Charge ID, mileage and Ship Pounds. 
A. The value for Freight Charge ID is "Store Door." 
B. Ship Pounds is equal to the Partial Truck Pounds value determined in 
step 3 when the destination is a direct ship from plant to the customer. 
If the destination is a storage warehouse the prepaid freight calculation 
represents the charges for releases from the warehouse. The quantity per 
release, the number of releases and the final customer destinations are 
generally not known at order placement time. Therefore the charge is based 
on an average Ship Pounds. Set the value for Ship Pounds equal to the 
Partial Truck Pounds value determined in step 3 divided by the value of 
the Storage Average releases found in the Pricing Constants table. 
Currently there are three possible value depending on the total List price 
value for the forms: 
______________________________________ 
Total Forms List Value 
Average Number of Releases 
______________________________________ 
0 5 
7,000 6 
4,0000 10 
______________________________________ 
C. Mileage 
Mileage is a calculation when the destination is the customer. This 
calculation is based on latitude and longitude coordinates for the 
shipment's origin and destination zipcodes. If the value in the 
Whse.sub.-- Id field in the Order Ship Destination table is null then the 
shipment is direct to the customer. If the Whse Id indicates a storage 
warehouse, then set mileage equal to the Storage Average Distance value 
found in the Pricing Constants table. 
Mileage Calculation for Direct Ship To Customer 
Set the destination zipcode equal to the zipcode of the Destination Id 
referred to in the Order.sub.-- Ship.sub.-- Destination table when the 
destination is not an offshore location (Hi. or Ark.). If destination 
location is offshore then destination zipcode is based on a departure port 
found in the Pricing Constants table. If destination is HI then set 
destination zipcode equal to the value for the Hawaii Departure Port 
Zipcode pricing constant. If destination is Alaska then set destination 
zipcode equal to the value for the Alaska Departure Port Zipcode pricing 
constant. The origin zipcode is determined from the Plant.sub.-- Id found 
in the Order.sub.-- Plant.sub.-- Assignment table. Lookup latitude and 
longitude coordinates and State for each zipcode in the Zipcode.sub.-- 
Coordinates table. 
a. Convert latitude and longitude degrees , minutes and seconds to a total 
longitude and latitude value for each ship from and ship to location using 
the following equation. 
##EQU34## 
The above conversion equation should be applied to each of the four 
coordinates. 
Origin Total Latitude 
Origin Total Longitude 
Destination Total Latitude 
Destination Total Longitude 
b. Use the total values for each of the four coordinates to compute 
shipping mileage. 
##EQU35## 
Latitude Mileage Factor (69.2), Longitude Mileage Factor (0.77) and Highway 
Mileage Factor (29%) are found be in the pricing constants table. 
5. Next Bracket Minimum $, Next Bracket Pounds and Next Bracket $/CWT are 
initialized differently depending on the destination pounds. If the value 
of the Ship Pounds Minimum field for the record found in the above lookup 
(for Partial Truck $/CWT) is greater than or equal to the LTL Rate Minimum 
Pounds value found in the Pricing Constants table then select the next 
record after the one found for Partial Truck $/CWT. Set Next Bracket 
Minimum $ equal to the value in the Freight Minimum Flat Charge field, 
Next Bracket Pounds equal to the value in the Ship Pounds Minimum field 
and Next Bracket $/CWT equal to the value in the Freight Variable Charge 
field. If the value of the Ship Pounds Minimum field for the record found 
in the above lookup (for Partial Truck $/CWT) is less than the LTL Rate 
Minimum Pounds value found in the Pricing Constants table then set all 
three inputs equal to 0. 
6. Set Inside Minimum $, Inside Maximum $ and Inside $/CWT equal to zero if 
the value for Delivery.sub.-- Point in the Order Ship Destination table 
indicates Store Door delivery. If the value for Delivery.sub.-- Point 
indicates Inside Delivery then lookup the values for the Inside Minimum $ 
and Inside $/CWT inputs in the Freight Rate table where the value in the 
Freight Charge Id field is equal to Inside Delivery and the value in the 
Ship Pounds Minimum field is the closest to but less than the value for 
Partial Truck Pounds determined in step 3. 
If the value of the Ship Pounds Minimum field for the record found in the 
above lookup (for Partial Truck $/CWT) is less than the Truck Rate Minimum 
Pounds value found in the Pricing Constants table then set Inside Maximum 
$ equal to zero. If the value of the Ship Pounds Minimum field for the 
record found in the above lookup (for Partial Truck $/CWT) is greater than 
or equal to the Truck Rate Minimum Pounds value found in the Pricing 
Constants table then set Inside Maximum $ equal to the value for Inside 
Maximum $ in the Pricing Constants table. 
7. Set Lift Gate $ equal to zero. 
8. Full Truck $--the Number Full Trucks was determined in step 2. If the 
value for Number Full Truck is zero then set Full Truck $ equal to zero. 
If the value for Number Full Truck is greater than zero then lookup the 
charge for a full truck in the Freight Rate table using the Freight Charge 
Id, Mileage Minimum and Ship Pounds fields. The Freight Charge Id is equal 
to Store Door, the value in the Ship Pounds Minimum field should be equal 
to or greater than the Truck Rate Minimum Pounds value found in the 
Pricing Constants table. Set Full Truck $ equal to the value in the 
Freight Minimum Flat Charge field . 
9. Ocean Freight $/Ctn, Port Partial Truck Minimum $, Port Partial Truck 
$/CWT, Port Next Bracket Minimum $, Port Next Bracket Pounds and Port Full 
Truck $--If destination location is not offshore (Hawaii or Alaska) or 
destination location is offshore and the destination is a warehouse, then 
set all inputs equal to zero. If destination location is offshore (Hawaii 
or Alaska) and a direct ship to customer, then initialize inputs as 
follows: 
A. Ocean Freight $/Ctn and Ocean Freight Minimum $--Lookup values in the 
Freight Rate table by setting the value for freight Charge Id equal to 
"Ocean". Set Ocean Freight $/Ctn equal to Freight Variable Charge and 
Ocean Freight Minimum $ equal to Freight Minimum Flat Charge. 
B. Port Partial Truck Minimum $ and Port Partial Truck $/CWT--Lookup values 
for Port Partial Truck Minimum $ and Port Partial Truck $/CWT in the 
Freight Rate table. Set Port Partial Truck Minimum $ equal to the value in 
the Freight Minimum Flat Charge field and Port Partial Truck $/CWT equal 
to the value in the Freight Variable Charge field. Note--convert the value 
in Freight Variable Charge field to $/CWT if necessary. 
If the value in the Variable Charge Unit Id field is $/CTN then convert 
Freight Variable Charge to $/CWT. 
##EQU36## 
Quantity Per Carton (see item #3 above under Base Calculation 
Initialization) $/Carton is the value in the Freight Variable Charge 
field. 
Destination Pounds Shipped was determined in step 1. 
Set Destination Quantity equal to the value in the Ship Qty field in the 
Order Ship Destination table. 
Three values are needed to locate the freight rate record for port 
shipments--Freight Charge ID, mileage and Ship Pounds. 
1. The value for Freight Charge ID is "Store Door." 
2. Ship Pounds is equal to the Partial Truck Pounds value determined in 
step 3. 
3. Mileage is calculated the same as 4 C above except the origin zipcode 
must be set to the to either the Hawaii Destination Port Zipcode or the 
Alaska Destination Port Zipcode in the Pricing Constant table. Set the 
destination zipcode equal to the zipcode of the Destination Id referred to 
in the Order.sub.-- Ship.sub.-- Destination table. 
C. Port Next Bracket Minimum $ and Port Next Bracket Pounds--Next Bracket 
Minimum $, Next Bracket Pounds and Next Bracket $/CWT are initialized 
differently depending on the destination pounds. If the value of the Ship 
Pounds Minimum field for the record found in the above lookup (for Port 
Partial Truck $/CWT) is greater than or equal to the LTL Rate Minimum 
Pounds value found in the Pricing Constants table then select the next 
record after the one found for Port Partial Truck $/CWT. Set Port Next 
Bracket Minimum $ equal to the value in the Freight Minimum Flat Charge 
field, Port Next Bracket Pounds equal to the value in the Ship Pounds 
Minimum field and Port Next Bracket $/CWT equal to the value in the 
Freight Variable Charge field. If the value of the Ship Pounds Minimum 
field for the record found in the above lookup (for Port Partial Truck 
$/CWT) is less than the LTL Rate Minimum Pounds value found in the Pricing 
Constants table then set all three inputs equal to 0. 
D. Port Full Truck $--The Number Full Trucks was determined in step 2. If 
the value for Number Full Truck is zero then set Port Full Truck $ equal 
to zero. If the value for Number Full Truck is greater than zero then 
lookup the charge for a full truck in the Freight Rate table using the 
Freight Charge Id, Mileage Minimum and Ship Pounds fields. The value for 
Freight Charge Id is equal to "Store Door", the value in the Ship Pounds 
Minimum field should be equal to or greater than the Truck Rate Minimum 
Pounds value found in the Pricing Constants table. Set Port Full Truck $ 
equal to the value in the Freight Minimum Flat Charge field. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Freight Rate Table (sample data) 
Freight Variable 
Freight Destination 
Minimum 
Freight 
Charge 
Charge 
Mileage 
Pounds 
Ship Flat Variable 
Unit 
ID Minimum 
Minimum 
Type Charge 
Charge 
ID 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Store 
0 0 UPS 0 5.00 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
0 5 UPS 0 4.50 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
0 20 UPS 0 4.00 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
0 50 UPS 0 3.50 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
500 0 UPS 0 6.00 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
500 5 UPS 0 5.50 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
500 20 UPS 0 5.00 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
500 50 UPS 0 4.50 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
0 200 LTL 22.00 
15.00 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
0 1000 LTL 40.70 
10.00 $/CTN 
Door 
Store 
0 5000 LTL 52.00 
8.00 $/CWT 
Door 
Store 
0 8000 LTL 87.20 
5.00 $/CWT 
Door 
Store 
500 200 LTL 22.00 
18.00 $/CWT 
Door 
Store 
500 1000 LTL 40.70 
12.00 $/CWT 
Door 
Store 
500 5000 LTL 52.00 
10.00 $/CWT 
Door 
Store 
500 8000 LTL 87.20 
6.50 $/CWT 
Door 
Store 
0 10000 TRUCK 
175.00 
0 None 
Door 
Store 
500 10000 TRUCK 
600.00 
0 None 
Door 
Inside 
0 0 UPS 0 0 None 
Delivery 
Inside 
0 200 LTL/ 22.00 
2.85 $/CWT 
Delivery TRUCK 
Lift 0 0 UPS 0 0 None 
Gate 
Lift 0 200 LTL/ 80.00 
0 None 
Gate TRUCK 
Ocean 
0 0 SHIP 55.00 
3.06 $/CTN 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Storage 
There are five storage rate variations available which may be included in 
list price. 
1. Standard 
2. Add On 
3. Short Store Period Option (SSPO) 
4. High Value Carton Option (HVCO) 
5. Negotiated Rates (i.e., PRISM) 
Standard, Add-On and SSPO are normally selectable by the CSR when storage 
is requested by the customer. The selected value will be stored in the 
Customer.sub.-- Order table in the Storage.sub.-- Type field. 
Standard Storage: 
A percentage of the form list price will be generated as the storage charge 
in this case. Also, a check will be performed to find out if this order is 
a candidate for HVCO rates. HVCO is not selectable but will be 
automatically used by the system if Standard storage is requested and the 
order total list price or the carton list price meets certain `high value` 
qualifiers. In this case, the value of the Storage.sub.-- Type field will 
remain unchanged and the HVCO.sub.-- Storage indicator field on the 
Customer.sub.-- Order table will be set to TRUE. 
Add-On Storage: 
Add On option has two rates; one is a flat charge per carton which is 
included in list price and the other is a per carton per month charge 
which is added to the invoice and is not included in list price. 
Short Storage Period Option: 
The SSPO option is a discounted storage option that is only given to 
customers who guarantee to have all forms released from storage is a 
period that is shorter than the standard 1 year. The SSPO type will always 
cause an exception because the rate must be manually calculated by a 
Distribution Services Specialist. 
Negotiated Rates: 
The only time that the user cannot choose which of the three storage 
variations will be used in when the customer has already been set up as a 
negotiated rate customer. In this case, the Storage.sub.-- Type and 
HVCO.sub.-- Storage fields will be NULL and the PRISM.sub.-- Storage 
indicator field will be set to TRUE. This indicates that the Pricing 
Engine must use the PRISM.sub.-- Storage table for storage and freight 
rate lookups. Please see the section following this Storage Cost Equation 
for a further discussion of the details surrounding identifying and 
processing Negotiated Rate storage orders. Separate cost components will 
be developed for PRISM Storage (negotiated rates) and for Standard Rate 
Storage. 
PRISM Storage Equation (Negotiated Rates) 
##EQU37## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. PRISM Storage Rate is found in the 
Storage.sub.-- Rate field in the PRISM.sub.-- Storage table. The key to 
the Prism Storage table includes . . . 
CADD Customer Number: This is found in the Sold-To Customer Address record. 
Category: Category is either `Z` which indicates that the record is a 
customer level record or a `P` which represents the record is at a 
Customer Form Number level. This field is used in combination with the 
Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value fields. The Pricing Engine should 
always look for more specific records first. If a customer level record 
exists and a form number level record exists for the same customer, the 
form number level record should be used. Therefore, the Pricing Engine 
will always try to find a Category `P` record first where the value of 
Cust.sub.-- Form.sub.-- Number from the Customer Order table falls 
alphabetically within the range of values represented by the fields 
Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value. If this record cannot be found, 
then a search for a record at the customer level will be performed. This 
search will not use the Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value fields. If 
no customer level record is found, a not-priceable exception is raised. 
Note: There may be multiple records returned that fit the customer form 
number criteria. In these cases, there should be only two, one which is 
for that specific customer form number only (i.e. Begin.sub.-- 
Value=End.sub.-- Value) and one where the specified customer form number 
fits within the range defined by Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value. 
In these cases, the record specific to the specified customer form number 
should be used (i.e. the one where Begin.sub.-- Value=End.sub.-- Value) 
Storage.sub.-- Method: This field is either `C`, which indicates the 
customer has requested full carton releases only, or a `P`, which allows 
the customer to release forms from Storage in less than full cartons. This 
value is set by examining the value of Full.sub.-- Carton.sub.-- Release 
on the Customer Order table. A value of `Y` (True) in this field means 
that Storage.sub.-- Method should be `C`. A value of `N` (False) indicates 
that Storage.sub.-- Method should be `P`. 
Storage Invoice Timing: This field is either `R`, which indicates the 
customer will be invoiced for storage at release of stored forms or `S`, 
which designates the customers desire to be invoiced for storage when they 
are stored. This value is set equal to the value of Storage.sub.-- 
lnvoice.sub.-- Timing on the Customer Order table. 
Effective Date: this value should be set equal to the current date. 
2. Quantity Stored is the summation of Ship.sub.-- Qty field on all Order 
Ship Destination records where the destination is an SRC warehouse. Note: 
for simplification purposes, this calculation ignores a potential plant 
overrun and customers instruction for disposition of the overrun quantity 
(ship to storage or ship direct). 
3. Order Quantity is set equal to the value of Order.sub.-- Qty on the 
Customer Order table. 
4. Forms Value per M is either the Forms List Price as calculated by the 
Pricing Engine or the Forms Sell Price as set by the CSR or Sales 
Representative. Which to use is determined by looking at the Based.sub.-- 
on.sub.-- Sell.sub.-- Price field on the PRISM.sub.-- Storage record found 
in Step 1 above. If this value is `Y` (True), then Forms Value per M 
should be set equal to the Forms Sell Price, otherwise, Forms Value per M 
should be set equal to the Forms List Price. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
PRISM.sub.-- Storage Table (sample records only) 
CADD Customer Storage 
Storage Invoice 
Storage 
Freight 
Number Category 
Begin Value 
End Value 
Method 
Timing Rate 
Rate 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
1000 P U-001 U-999 
C Invoice Stored 
14% 8% 
1001 C 8502 8502 P Invoice Release 
20% 10% 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
See the next section titled PRISM Freight and Storage Extra for more 
details on the use of the columns in this table. 
PRISM Storage Pricing Rules 
No Pricing Rules have been identified for the PRISM Storage calculation at 
this time. 
Storage Equation (Standard Rates) 
##EQU38## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. Storage Rate is set equal to 
Storage.sub.-- Pct in the Storage table when the order is not a 
`negotiated` rate order. The key to the correct record for this lookup is 
based on . . . 
Storage.sub.-- Type as defined in the Storage.sub.-- Type field on Customer 
Order table. If Standard is chosen, the HVCO checks described below must 
be done and will be used instead of standard when the HVCO condition(s) 
are TRUE. 
Invoice.sub.-- Type as defined in the Storage.sub.-- Invoice.sub.-- Timing 
field on the Customer Order table. 
2. Quantity Stored is the summation of Ship.sub.-- Qty field on all Order 
Ship Destination records where the destination is an SRC warehouse. Note: 
for simplification purposes, this calculation ignores a potential plant 
overrun and customer's instruction for disposition of the overrun quantity 
(ship to storage or ship direct). 
3. Order Quantity is set equal to the value of Order.sub.-- Qty on the 
Customer Order table. 
4. Form Value per M is the summation of all cost components across the 
entire Customer Order excluding Freight and Storage. 
5. Per Carton Charge is set equal to Storage.sub.-- Ctn in the Storage 
table. 
6. The Carton Quantity is set equal to the Special Qty display attribute on 
the Special Packaging feature. If this feature does not exist, then this 
value is set to Std.sub.-- Carton.sub.-- Qty on the Mfg Order table. 
7. Storage Maximum is set equal to Storage.sub.-- Max in the Storage table. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Storage Table 
Storage.sub.-- Type 
Invoice.sub.-- Type 
Storage.sub.-- Pct 
Storage.sub.-- Ctn 
Storage.sub.-- Max 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Standard 
Invoiced Stored 
8% $0.00 $000.00 
Standard 
Invoiced Released 
14% $0.00 $000.00 
Add On Invoiced Stored 
0% $3.00 $100.00 
Add On Invoiced Released 
0% $3.00 $100.00 
HVCO Invoiced Stored 
1% $6.00 $000.00 
HVCO Invoiced Released 
6% $6.00 $000.00 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
HVCO Verifications: 
If the user selected the Standard storage option, then check to see if 
order qualifies for HVCO storage rates. Both of the following conditions 
must be true in order to receive HVCO rates. 
First HVCO Check: Value of Stored Forms 
This check validates that the value of the stored forms hits the level 
necessary to receive HVCO rates. 
##EQU39## 
Compare this calculated value with the HVCO Order Qualifier found in the 
Pricing Constants table. If the calculated value is equal to or greater 
than the HVCO Order Qualifier constant, then continue with the second HVCO 
check. If not, skip the second check and continue with Standard rates. 
Second HVCO Check: Value of Forms in One Carton 
This check validates that the value of the forms contained within one 
carton hits the level necessary to receive HVCO rates. 
##EQU40## 
Compare this calculated value with the HVCO Carton Qualifier found in the 
Pricing Constants table. If the calculated value is equal to or greater 
than the HVCO Carton Qualifier constant, then use HVCO rates. If not, 
continue with Standard rates. 
Storage Pricing Rules 
No Pricing Rules have been identified for the Storage calculation at this 
time. 
PRISM Freight and Storage Extra 
When SRC customers put their forms into storage, they have two options 
available on how those forms are released from storage. The first is to 
have them release in full cartons. Customers who select this option for 
all their stored forms will get standard freight and storage rates. The 
second option is to have forms shipped to them in less than full carton 
quantities. Those customers who select to have one or more of their stored 
forms released in this fashion are considered Pic-n-Pac customers and have 
special negotiated rates for freight and storage. This memo will discuss 
the data and process necessary for recognizing these customers and 
properly calculating freight and storage charges. 
Data: 
There are three tables in the order entry system 10 (also referred to 
herein as the STAR system) that will contain the data necessary to 
determine both if a customer is a Pic-n-Pac customer and what are the 
negotiated rates for that customer. 
1. Customer Address table. This table will contain a Boolean indicator, 
STD.sub.-- FULL.sub.-- CTN, which will indicate if the customer has one or 
more forms that are released in less than full carton. 
2. Customer Order table. This table will contain a Boolean indicator, 
FULL.sub.-- CARTON.sub.-- RELEASE, which will indicate if the customer 
wishes to have this specific order released as full carton or less than 
full carton. It will also contain a numeric field, OVERRUN.sub.-- 
STORAGE.sub.-- PCT, to indicate the customer's wish regarding how much of 
any overrun quantity should be shipped to storage. This may be 0% if all 
overrun quantity is to be sent directly to the customer, 100% if all the 
overrun quantity should be stored or any percentage in between. 
3. PRISM Storage table. This table will have one to many records in it to 
identify the negotiated rates for a Pic-n-Pac customer. The layout is as 
follows . . . 
______________________________________ 
PRISM.sub.-- STORAGE: 
______________________________________ 
CADD.sub.-- CUST.sub.-- NUM 
Varchar2 (7) 
Not Null 
CATEGORY Varchar2 (1) 
Nullable 
BEGIN.sub.-- VALUE Varchar2 (10) 
Nullable 
END.sub.-- VALUE Varchar2 (10) 
Nullable 
STORAGE.sub.-- METHOD 
Varchar2 (1) 
Not Null 
STORAGE.sub.-- INVOICE.sub.-- TIMING 
Varchar2 (1) 
Not Null 
STORAGE.sub.-- RATE 
Number Not Null 
FREIGHT.sub.-- RATE 
Number Not Null 
EFFECTIVE.sub.-- DATE 
Date Not Null 
EXPIRATION.sub.-- DATE 
Date Not Null 
______________________________________ 
A Pic-n-Pac customer may choose one of three options for determining which 
forms have a negotiated rate. 
1. All forms 
The customer can choose to have all their forms stored at the negotiated 
rate. In this case, the PRISM Storage record would have their CADD 
Customer number defined with Category, Begin Value and End Value being 
null. 
2. A range of product codes 
The customer may choose to have a single product code or set of product 
codes stored at a negotiated rate. In this case, the PRISM Storage record 
would contain the CADD Customer number with the Category being set to "C". 
The Begin Value and End Value will be used to set the range of product 
codes that are included in this negotiated rate. 
3. A range of form numbers 
The customer may choose to have a single form or set of forms stored at a 
negotiated rate. In this case, the PRISM Storage record would contain the 
CADD Customer number with the Category being set to "P". The Begin Value 
and End Value will be used to set the range of customer form numbers that 
are included in this negotiated rate. 
In addition to these four fields, two others are used to identify the 
specific record that should be used for a given order. 
1. Storage Method 
This field will contain a "C" or a "P". The "C" indicates that this is a 
negotiated rate for an order that is to be released as full cartons only. 
This rate may or may not be different than the Standard full carton rate 
that non Pic-n-Pac customers receive. The "P" indicates that the record 
represents the negotiated rate for an order that will be released in less 
than full carton quantities. 
2. Storage Invoice Timing 
This field will indicate if the customer wishes to pay for storage when the 
forms are stored (Invoice Stored) or when the forms are released from 
storage (Invoice Release). This field will contain an "S" for Invoice 
Stored or an "R" for Invoice Release. The remaining fields hold the 
specific freight and storage rates for this Pic-n-Pac customer and/or form 
number/product code combination and the effective date range of the 
record. 
Process: 
There are four processes that will create and/or use the data as described 
above. 
1. Conversion and Interfaces: 
C&I will be responsible for populating STAR tables with data brought over 
from the PRISM system. Specifically, C&I will populate the STD.sub.-- 
FULL.sub.-- CTN Boolean field on Customer Address as well as all the data 
in the PRISM Storage table. 
2. Order Entry: 
If the customer is a Pic-n-Pac customer, CSRs will not be able to select a 
storage charge method as it will default to Pic-n-Pac and cannot be 
changed. In this case; however, the CSR must choose whether the customer 
wishes to have this specific order release in full carton or less than 
full carton quantities. This data will be stored in the Boolean field Full 
Carton Release. 
The field OVERRUN.sub.-- STORAGE.sub.-- PCT must also be entered during the 
order entry process. This field must be entered for all orders that have 
any portion going to storage regardless of whether the customer is a 
Pic-n-Pac customer or not. This information will be passed to TOPS. It is 
TOPS who will determine how to break up the overrun quantity to be shipped 
directly among the various shipping destinations when more than one direct 
ship exists. 
3. Validation: 
Validation will be responsible for populating the Product Code field in the 
Manufacturing Order table. This code is developed from the product type 
and various features that exist on the form. 
4. Pricing: 
Pricing will use the data in STAR to determine if the customer is Pic-n-Pac 
and also to determine what rate should be used for both freight and 
storage. 
First, pricing will determine if there is any storage for this order by 
looking for any records in the Order Ship Destination table to determine 
if any have the Warehouse ID is populated. If any are found, Pricing will 
read the Ship Quantity to determine how many forms are being stored. 
If there is storage for the order, Pricing will then determine the data 
necessary to identify the specific PRISM Storage record that applies to 
the order. This data includes . . . 
a) CADD Customer Number from the Customer Address table 
b) Customer Form Number from the Customer Order table 
c) Full Carton Release from the Customer Order table 
d) Product Code from the Manufacturing Order table 
e) Storage Invoice Timing from the Customer Order table. 
Once it is determined that there is storage and it is a Pic-n-Pac customer, 
Pricing will select the correct PRISM storage record based on the data 
listed above. Pricing will always look for a record that is more specific 
first and work backwards toward more general records. For example, if 
there is a PRISM Storage record for all forms for a CADD Customer and a 
second for a specific form for that same CADD Customer, then Pricing would 
use the form specific record before using the general Customer record. The 
order of the data from most detailed to most general is . . . 
1. Form Number 
2. Product Code 
3. CADD Customer 
The storage method and invoice timing data will also need to be considered 
to select the correct record from the PRISM Storage table. 
Miscellaneous Notes: 
If a customer is marked as a Pic-n-Pac customer on the Customer Address 
record, we will always attempt to find the PRISM Storage record that 
should be used. If we are unable to find any record for that customer, the 
order will be exceptioned to a pricing analyst. 
For split shipments, the portion of the shipment that is being shipped 
directly will receive the same freight rate as that portion that is 
stored. For instance, if a Pic-n-Pac customer requests 50% of the quantity 
to be shipped directly and 50% to be stored, the freight rate used for the 
50% shipped directly will be the same as the PRISM freight rate for that 
customer order. 
The Stanfast.RTM. Pricing equations and rules are as follows (some pricing 
tables referred to below are not actually shown in the present 
specification because the content thereof is self explanatory): 
Cost Component Development 
Cost component development for Stanfast Products follows the rules for 
Rotary cost component development with the exception of the Material cost 
components. Since we do not charge specifically for materials for Stanfast 
products, the code that develops material cost components in the Rotary 
world should not be run for Stanfast orders. 
STANFAST Pre-Figured Cost 
This equation represents the calculation of cost for the Stanfast products 
and includes the following base charges and upcharges . . . 
Base List Price . . . Included in base 
Paper Upcharge . . . Included in base 
Soy Base Ink Upcharge 
Ink Color Upcharge 
Multiple Ink Color Upcharge 
Heat Resistant Ink Upcharge 
Backprinting Upcharge 
Punching Upcharge 
Special Packaging Quantity Upcharge 
Multi-Destination Upcharge 
PMT Proof Upcharge 
Part to Part Upcharge 
The remainder of this section will discuss the evaluation of each of the 
types of charges in the following cost component equation. 
Stanfast Pre-Figured Cost Equation: 
EQU Stanfast Pre-figured Cost=Base list Price+Paper Upcharge+Soy Base Ink 
Upcharge+Ink Color Upcharge+Multiple Ink Upcharge+Heat Resistant Ink 
Upcharge+Backprinting Upcharge+Punching Upcharge+Special Pkging Quantity 
Upcharge+Multi-Destination Upcharge+PMT Proof Upcharge+Part to Part 
Upcharge. 
Base List Price: 
The base price of a Stanfast order includes the Base List Price charge and 
the Paper Upcharge. This is done primarily to make it more like the rotary 
orders that do not have the concept of a "base" paper. Therefore, the base 
rotary order is priced with the actual paper that will be used on the 
order. By including this upcharge in the Stanfast Base Price, this base 
price will also be based on the actual paper that is used for the order. 
The Base List Price for the Stanfast product is based on Stanfast product 
type, category, quantity, form size and number of plies. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Stanfast.sub.-- Price Reference Table: 
Base List 
Product Type 
Quantity 
Dimension 1 
Dimension 2 
Number Plies 
Price 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Stanfast Cut Sheet 
500 
5 1/2 8 1/2 1 $85.60 
Stanfast Cut Sheet 
1,000 
8 1/2 11 1 $68.56 
Stanfast Cut Sheet 
2,000 
8 1/2 11 1 $75.90 
Stanfast Carbonless Sets 
1,000 
5 1/2 8 1/2 
2 $92.75 
Stanfast Carbonless Sets 
2,000 
4 1/4 11 3 $129.82 
Stanfast Carbonless Sets 
3,000 
8 1/2 3 1/2 
4 $115.60 
Stanfast Envelopes 
500 
4 1/8 9 1/2 
1 $112.20 
Stanfast Envelopes 
1,000 
3 1/2 6 1 $72.64 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Note: This is only a sample of the data for this table. See the Stanfast 
Catalog for all data values. 
The charge to be applied to this form for Base List Price will be a lookup 
in the Stanfast.sub.-- Price table from above. The key fields are to this 
table are determined as follows . . . 
Product Type 
This value is looked up in the Manufacturing.sub.-- Order table in the 
Product.sub.-- Type.sub.-- ID field. This value is then used directly as a 
lookup in the Stanfast.sub.-- Price table. Note that the displayed values 
above are the decode of the Product.sub.-- Type.sub.-- lID field as 
defined in the STAR.sub.-- Codes table. 
Quantity 
This value is looked up in the Customer.sub.-- Order table in the 
Order.sub.-- Qty field. The Stanfast.sub.-- Price record selected should 
be the one with the largest Quantity that is less than or equal to 
Order.sub.-- Qty. 
Form Size 
Form size includes both form length and form width. The record selected 
from the Stanfast.sub.-- Price table should be selected in the following 
fashion . . . 
Rule 1: Attempt to find a record where the customer specified form size is 
exactly equal to the Stanfast.sub.-- Price form size as indicated by 
Dimension 1 and Dimension 2. 
Rule 2: Where Rule 1 cannot be accommodated, find the record which 
represents the smallest area (Dimension 1*Dimension 2) where . . . 
the lesser of Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 is &gt;=the lesser of the customer 
specified length and width 
- AND - 
the greater of Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 is &gt;=the greater of the customer 
specified length and width. 
For example, a 5".times.8.5" form could be run with a 5.5".times.8.5" paper 
(1 up) or with a 8.5".times.11" paper (2 up). In this case, the 
5.5".times.8.5" paper would be chosen because it represents a smaller 
area. 
Number of Plies 
The number of plies field is calculated by counting the number of ply 
records that exist in the database for the current Manufacturing Order. 
Paper Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of papers that are not 
considered part of the base specification for the given Stanfast product. 
##EQU41## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. Ply # Upcharge LPMSI should be set 
equal to 0 if the Ply # Paper is found in the Stanfast.sub.-- Base.sub.-- 
Specs table shown below. If it is not found in this table, this input 
should be set to the value of "Paper Upcharge LPMSI" as found in the 
Stanfast.sub.-- Paper.sub.-- Upcharge table. The key to this table is 
product type, Number of Form Plies, Request Paper ID, Base Paper ID and 
Brackett Square Inches. 
Product Type is found in the like named field in the Manufacturing Order. 
Number of Form Plies is calculated by counting the number of Paper plies in 
the Ply table for the current Mfg Order. 
Request Paper ID is the Feature ID of the paper associated with this ply. 
The Base Paper ID is the Feature ID of the paper as found in the 
Stanfast.sub.-- Base.sub.-- Specification table. 
Brackett Square Inches is the multiplication of Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 
(rounded to 3 decimal places) as determined necessary during the Form Size 
calculation of the Base Lookup described above. Note that this is not 
necessarily equal to the customer specified dimensions. 
2. Brackett Dimension 1 and Brackett Dimension 2 are the same as found in 
the Form Size calculation of the Base Lookup described above. 
Note: The calculated square inch value must fall in a range indicated by 
the Base.sub.-- Price.sub.-- Brachet.sub.-- Minimum.sub.-- Sq. In. and 
Base.sub.-- Price.sub.-- Bracket.sub.-- Maximum.sub.-- Sq. In. Otherwise, 
an error condition exist. 
______________________________________ 
Stanfast.sub.-- Base.sub.-- Spec Table: 
Product Type ID 
Ply Number 
Feature ID Form Plies 
______________________________________ 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Wht Bond 1 
Carbonless Sets 
1 15 Wht CB 2 
Carbonless Sets 
2 15 Canary CF 2 
Carbonless Sets 
1 15 Wht CB 3 
Carbonless Sets 
2 17 Can CFB 3 
Carbonless Sets 
3 15 Pnk CF 3 
Carbonless Sets 
1 15 Wht CB 4 
Carbonless Sets 
2 17 Can CFB 4 
Carbonless Sets 
3 17 Pnk CFB 4 
Carbonless Sets 
4 15 Grod CF 4 
Carbonless Sets 
1 15 Wht CB 5 
Carbonless Sets 
2 17 Grn CFB 5 
Carbonless Sets 
3 17 Can CFB 5 
Carbonless Sets 
4 17 Pnk CFB 5 
Carbonless Sets 
5 15 Grod CF 5 
Envelope 1 24 Wht Wove Envelope 
1 
______________________________________ 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Stanfast.sub.-- Paper.sub.-- Upcharge Table 
Paper 
Form Minimum 
Maximum 
Upcharge 
Product Type 
Plies 
Requested Paper ID 
Base Paper ID 
Square Inches 
Square Inches 
LPMSI 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Blue Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
31.266 31.266 0.29425 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Blue Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
34.391 34.391 0.26751 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Blue Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 0.23477 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Black Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
31.266 31.266 0.29425 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Black Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
34.391 34.391 0.26751 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Black Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 0.23477 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Blue Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
31.266 31.266 0.46441 
With Window 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Blue Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
34.391 34.391 0.42221 
With Window 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Blue Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 0.37053 
With Window 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Black Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
31.266 31.266 0.46441 
with Window 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Black Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
34.391 34.391 0.42221 
with Window 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - Black Inside Tint 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 0.37053 
with Window 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - with Window 
24 Wht Wove 
21.000 21.000 0.25333 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - with Window 
24 Wht Wove 
23.563 23.563 0.22578 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - with Window 
24 Wht Wove 
31.266 31.266 0.17015 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - with Window 
24 Wht Wove 
34.391 34.391 0.15469 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Wove - with Window 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 0.13576 
Envelope 
1 20 Wht 25% Rag 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 1.91694 
Envelope 
1 24 wht 25% Rag 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 2.13946 
Envelope 
1 24 wht Classic Laid 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 1.73933 
Envelope 
1 24 Ivory Classic Laid 
24 Wht Wove 
39.188 39.188 1.95981 
Carbonless sets 
2 15 Grod CF 15 Can CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
2 15 Pnk CF 15 Can CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
3 15 Can CF 15 Pnk CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
3 15 Grod CF 15 Pnk CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
3 17 Pnk CFB 17 Can CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
3 17 Grn CFB 17 Can CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
4 15 Pnk CF 15 Grod CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
4 15 Can CF 15 Grod CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
4 17 Pnk CFB 17 Can CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
4 17 Grn CFB 17 Can CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
4 17 Can CFB 17 Pnk CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
4 17 Grn CFB 17 Pnk CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 15 Grod CF 15 Can CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 15 Pnk CF 15 Grod CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 15 Can CF 15 Grod CF 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 17 Pnk CFB 17 Can CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 17 Grn CFB 17 Can CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 17 Can CFB 17 Pnk CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 17 Grn CFB 17 Pnk CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 17 Pnk CFB 17 Grn CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
5 17 Can CFB 17 Grn CFB 
0 187 0.00000 
Carbonless sets 
2 15 Wht Ecobond CB 
15 Wht CB 
0 119 0.01412 
Carbonless sets 
2 15 Can Ecobond CF 
15 Can CF 
0 119 0.01412 
Carbonless sets 
2 15 PNK Ecobond CF 
15 Can CF 
0 119 0.01412 
Carbonless sets 
3 15 Wht Ecobond CB 
15 Wht CB 
0 119 0.01005 
Carbonless sets 
3 15 can Ecobond CF 
15 Pnk CF 
0 119 0.01005 
Carbonless sets 
3 15 PNK Ecobond CF 
15 Pnk CF 
0 119 0.01005 
Carbonless sets 
3 17 Can Ecobond CFB 
17 Can CFB 
0 119 0.01005 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Wht Bond - 5 Hole 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 93.5 0.08492 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 can bond 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Pink bond 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Blu bond 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Grn bond 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Grod bond 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Buff bond 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 90 can Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.42032 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 90 Pnk Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.42032 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 90 Blu Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.42032 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 90 Grn Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.42032 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 90 Grod Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.42032 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 90 Buff Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.42032 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 110 can Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.51615 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 110 Pnk Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.51615 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 110 Blu Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.51615 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 110 Grn Index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.51615 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 110 Grod Index 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.51615 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 110 Buff Index 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.51615 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Wht 25% Rag Bond 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.33914 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Wht 25% Rag Bond 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.38567 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Wht Classic Laid 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.35487 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Ivory Classic Laid 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.36246 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 60 Wht offset 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.16535 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 90 Wht index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.35957 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 110 Wht index 20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.44128 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 50 Wht dry gum 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.78652 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Wht Ecobond 50/10 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.05348 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Wht 25% Rag Ecobond 75/25 
20 Wht Bond 
0 187 0.43840 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Wht Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.00000 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 can Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Pnk Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Blu Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Grn Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Grod Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Buff Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.07818 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 20 Wht 25% Rag Xero Bond 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.60032 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Wht Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.09219 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 can Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.09262 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Pnk Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.09262 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Blu Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.09262 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Grn Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.09262 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Grod Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.09262 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Buff Xerographic 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.09262 
Stanfast Sheets 
1 24 Wht 25% Rag Xero Bond 
20 Wht Bond 
93.5 119 0.68278 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Soy Base Ink Upcharge: 
EQU Soy Base Ink Upcharge=Soy Ink Charge.times.Number of Soy Inks 
Base Calculation Initializations: 
1. The Soy Ink Charge is set to 0.00/M for the base calculation. It will be 
updated via the rules where soy base inks exist on the form. 
2. The Number of Soy Inks is determined by counting the total number of soy 
inks that are used across all ply faces for the order. 
Ink Color Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of using colors that are not 
considered the base color for the given Stanfast product. 
##EQU42## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Number of Base Inks is calculated 
by summing the number of unique colors of inks on the order where . . . 
the "Base Heat Ink" Feature List Attribute is TRUE and the "Heat Resistant 
Ind" Display Attribute is TRUE 
the "Base Non-Heat Ink" Feature List Attribute is TRUE and the "Heat 
Resistant Ind" Display Attribute is FALSE 
2. The Number of Std Inks is calculated by summing the number of unique 
colors of inks on the order where . . . 
the "Standard Heat Ink" Feature List Attribute is TRUE and the "Heat 
Resistant Ind" Display Attribute is TRUE 
the "Standard Non-Heat Ink" Feature List Attribute is TRUE and the "Heat 
Resistant Ind" Display Attribute is FALSE 
3. The Number of Inks is calculated by counting all unique inks across the 
entire form. 
4. The Order Quantity is initialized with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
5. The Std Ink Charge and the Non-Std Ink Charge should be set to $0.00 for 
the base calculation. These values will be updated by the rules where 
these ink types exist. 
Multiple Ink Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of using multiple colors of ink 
on a given ply. 
##EQU43## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Order Quantity is initialized 
with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the Customer Order table. 
2. The # of Plies w/Multiple Inks is calculated by examining the number of 
ink features per front ply face and counting the number of front ply faces 
that have more than one ink. This includes base inks, standard and 
non-standard inks. 
3. The Multiple Ink Flat Charge and Multiple Ink Running Charge should be 
set to $0.00 for the base calculation. These values will be changed by the 
rules if multiple inks exist on any ply within the order. 
Heat Resistant Ink Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of using heat resistant inks on 
a given ply. 
##EQU44## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Order Quantity is initialized 
with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the Customer Order table. 
2. The Heat Ink Flat Charge and Heat Ink Running Charge should be 
initialized to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
3. The # Heat Inks should be calculated by counting the number of inks 
across all ply faces that have the Heat Resistant Ind display attribute is 
set to TRUE. 
Backprinting Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of printing on the back face of 
a given ply. 
##EQU45## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Order Quantity is initialized 
with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the Customer Order table. 
2. The # of Plies w/Backprinting is calculated by examining the all plies 
and determining which have ink features that are located on the back face. 
Each ply should be counted only once regardless of the number of inks that 
exist on the ply. 
3. The Backprinting Flat Charge and Backprinting Running Charge should be 
set to $0.00 for the base calculation. These values will be changed by the 
rules if backprinting exists on any ply within the order. 
Punching Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of punching holes or lines of 
holes where the center of the holes is the same distance from a common 
edge of the form. Multiple holes where the center of the holes is not the 
same distance from the edge should be exceptioned. 
##EQU46## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Order Quantity is initialized 
with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the Customer Order table. 
2. The # of Plies with Punching is initialized with the count of the number 
of ply records that exist for the current Manufacturing Order that have a 
punching feature attached. 
3. The Punching Flat Charge and Punching Running Charge should be set to 
$0.00 for the base calculation. These values will be changed by the rules 
if a punch feature exists on the order. 
Special Packaging Quantity Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of packing the forms in other 
than the standard quantity per box. 
Special Packing Quantity Upcharge=Special Quantity Running 
Charge.times.Number of Plys 
Base Calculation Initializations: 
1. The Special Quantity Running Charge should be set to $0.00 for the base 
calculation. This value will be changed by the rules if a special 
packaging feature exists on the order where special quantity is specified. 
2. The Number of Plies should be populated with the number of ply records 
found in the ply table for the manufacturing order. 
Multi Destination Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of shipping product to more 
than two destinations. 
##EQU47## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Multi Destination Upcharge should 
be set to $0.00 for the base calculation. 
2. The Number of Destinations should be populated with the number of Order 
Ship Destination records found associated with this customer order. 
PMT Proof Upcharge: 
This charge will cover the additional costs of creating PMT Proofs for the 
customer. 
##EQU48## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The PMT Proof Upcharge should be set 
to $0.00 for the base calculation. 
2. The Number of PMT Proofs is calculated by adding the "Qty" attribute for 
each Proof Feature where the "Type" attribute=PMT. For example, if the 
order had two proof features with the "Type" attribute=PMT and the first 
had a "Qty" attribute=1 and the second had a "Qty" attribute=3, then the 
value put into Number of PMT Proofs would be the sum of those numbers, 4. 
Part to Part Upcharge: 
This upcharge will cover manufacturing charges for composition changes that 
occur form paper ply to paper ply. 
##EQU49## 
1. The Part to Part Flat Charge should be set to $0.00 for the base 
calculation. This value will be set by rules. 
2. Number of Composition Complexities Front is determined by reading each 
paper ply and counting each complexity in the Composition Complexity Front 
field where the value is not Null and the value is not Same as Another. 
3. Number of Composition Complexities Back is determined by reading each 
paper ply and counting each complexity in the Composition Complexity Back 
field where the value is not Null and the value is not Same as Another. 
4. The Order Quantity is initialized with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
STANFAST Composition 
The following is the equation of cost for the Composition operation for 
Stanfast products. 
Composition Upcharge: 
##EQU50## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Number of Faces for each version 
will be determined by reading each ply and tallying them by the values 
found in Composition Complexitity Front and Composition Complexity Back 
fields. 
2. Upcharges for each version will be set to 0.00 for the base calculation. 
The upcharges will be applied via Pricing Rules. 
3. Order Quantity is set equal to the Order Qty field on the Customer Order 
table. 
STANFAST Gathering 
The following is the equation of cost for the Gathering operation on 
Stanfast products. 
Gathering Upcharge: 
Gathering Upcharge $/M=Gathering Running Charge.times.Number of Plys 
Base Calculation Initializations: 
1. The Gathering Running Charge is initialized to $0.00 for the base 
calculation. It will be updated by the pricing rules when the gathering 
operation is specified by the manufacturing plan. 
2. The Number of Plies is initialized during the base calculation by 
counting the number of paper plies that are part of the manufacturing 
order. 
STANFAST Guillotine 
The following are the equation of cost and pricing rules for the Guillotine 
operation on Stanfast products. 
Guillotine Equation: 
##EQU51## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Guillotine Running Charge is 
initialized to $0.00 for the base calculation. It will be updated by the 
pricing rules when the guillotine operation is specified by the 
manufacturing plan. 
2. The Order Quantity is initialized with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
STANFAST Perf/Score 
The following is the equation of cost for the Perfing/Scoring operation on 
Stanfast products. 
Perf/Score Upcharge: 
##EQU52## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Perf/Score Flat Charge is 
initialized to $0.00 for the base calculation. It will be updated by the 
pricing rules when full horizontal or vertical perfs or scores exist. 
2. The Perf/I Score Running Charge is initialized to $0.00 for the base 
calculation. It will be updated by the pricing rules when full horizontal 
or vertical perfs or scores exist. 
3. The Order Quantity is initialize with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
4. The Number of Plies is initialized by counting the number of paper ply 
records for this manufacturing order that have the perf/I score feature 
attached. 
STANFAST Folding 
The following are the equation of cost and pricing rules for the Folding 
operation on Stanfast products. 
Folding Equation: 
##EQU53## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Folding Flat Charge is 
initialized to $0.00 for the base calculation. It will be updated by the 
pricing rules when the Folding operation is specified by the manufacturing 
plan. 
2. The Folding Running Charge is initialized to $0.00 for the base 
calculation. It will be updated by the pricing rules when the Folding 
operation is specified by the manufacturing plan. 
3. The Order Quantity is initialized with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
STANFAST Numbering 
The following is the equation of cost for the Numbering operation on 
Stanfast products. 
Numbering Upcharge: 
##EQU54## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Numbering Flat Charge is 
initialized to $0.00 for the base calculation. It will be updated by the 
pricing rules where the Numbering operation exists. 
2. The Numbering Running Charge is initialized to $0.00 for the base 
calculation. It will be updated by the pricing rules where the Numbering 
operation exists. 
3. The Order Quantity is initialize with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
STANFAST Padding 
The following are the equation of cost and pricing rules for the Padding 
operation on Stanfast products. 
Padding Equation: 
##EQU55## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Padding Running Charge is 
initialized to $0.00 for the base calculation. It will be updated by the 
pricing rules when the Padding operation is specified by the manufacturing 
plan. 
2. The Order Quantity is initialized with the Order.sub.-- Qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
STANFAST Wrapping 
The following is the equation of cost for the Wrapping operation on 
Stanfast products. 
Wrapping Upcharge: 
##EQU56## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Wrapping Upcharge $/Package is 
initialized to zero (0) for the base calculation. 
2. The Label Upcharge $/Package is initialized to zero (0) for the base 
calculation. 
3. The Quantity per Pack is set equal to the value found in the "Qty" order 
feature attribute attached to the PolyWrapping feature. 
STANFAST Minimum Quantity 
The following is the equation of cost for the Minimum Quantity cost 
component on Stanfast products. This cost component is added to any 
Stanfast order where the order quantity is less than 500. 
Minimum Quantity Upcharge: 
##EQU57## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Prepaid Forms Value/M is 
initialized to the sum of all Stanfast cost components except PRISM or 
Standard Storage. 
2. The Order Quantity is set equal to the order.sub.-- qty field on the 
Customer Order table. 
STANFAST Freight 
The following is the equation of cost for Prepaid Freight on Stanfast 
products. 
Prepaid Freight Upcharge: 
Note--Each prepaid ship destination will have a separate cost component. 
There are two areas in the database that indicate when a shipment is 
prepaid--Freight.sub.-- Payment.sub.-- Method.sub.-- Id field in the 
Customer Order table or Freight.sub.-- Payment.sub.-- Method.sub.-- Ovr 
field in the Order Ship Destination table. If the order table data 
indicates Prepaid and the shipment table record is set to null, the 
shipment is Prepaid. If the order table indicates something other than 
prepaid but the shipment table record indicates prepaid, then the shipment 
is prepaid. 
##EQU58## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. The Freight Rate is initialized to 
0.00 for the base calculation. 
2. The Base List Price is set equal to the value of the Base List Price 
input in the Stanfast Pre-figured Cost Component. 
3. The Freight Flat $ is initialized to $0.00 for the base calculation. 
4. The Inside Delivery Additional Freight Rate is set to 0.00 for the base 
calculation. 
5. Set Destination Quantity equal to the value in the Ship Qty field in the 
Order Ship Destination table 
STANFAST Storage 
There are five storage rate variations available which may be included in 
list price. 
1. Included 
2. Add On 
3. ShortStorePeriod Option (SSPO) 
4. High Value Carton Option (HVCO) 
5. Negotiated Rates 
Included, Add-On and SSPO are normally selectable by the CSR when storage 
is requested by the customer. The selected value will be stored in the 
Customer.sub.-- Order table in the Storage.sub.-- Type field. 
Included Storage: 
A percentage of the form list price will be generated as the storage charge 
in this case. Also, a check will be performed to find out if this order is 
a candidate for HVCO rates. HVCO is not selectable but will be 
automatically used by the system if Included storage is requested and the 
order total list price or the carton list price meets certain `high value` 
qualifiers. In this case, the value of the Storage.sub.-- Type field will 
remain unchanged and the HVCO.sub.-- Storage indicator field on the 
Customer.sub.-- Order table will be set to TRUE. 
Add-On Storage: 
Add On option has two rates; one is a flat charge per carton which is 
included in list price and the other is a per carton per month charge 
which is added to the invoice and is not included in list price. 
Short Storage Period Option: 
The SSPO option is a discounted storage option that is only given to 
customers who guarantee to have all forms released from storage is a 
period that is shorter than the standard 1 year. The SSPO type will always 
cause an exception because the rate must be manually calculated by a 
Distribution Services Specialist. 
Negotiated Rates: 
The only time that the user cannot choose which of the three storage 
variations will be used in when the customer has already been set up as a 
negotiated rate customer. In this case, the Storage.sub.-- Type and 
HVCO.sub.-- Storage fields will be NULL and the PRISM.sub.-- Storage 
indicator field will be set to TRUE. This indicates that the Pricing 
Engine must use the PRISM.sub.-- Storage table for storage and freight 
rate lookups. Please see the section following this Storage Cost Equation 
for a further discussion of the details surrounding identifying and 
processing Negotiated Rate storage orders. Separate cost components will 
be developed for PRISM Storage (negotiated rates) and for Standard Rate 
Storage. 
PRISM Storage Equation (Negotiated Rates) 
##EQU59## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. PRISM Storage Rate is found in the 
Storage.sub.-- Rate field in the PRISM.sub.-- Storage table. The key to 
the Prism Storage table includes . . . 
CADD Customer Number: This is found in the Sold-To Customer Address record. 
Category: Category is either `Z` which indicates that the record is a 
customer level record or a `P` which represents the record is at a 
Customer Form Number level. This field is used in combination with the 
Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value fields. The Pricing Engine should 
always look for more specific records first. If a customer level record 
exists and a form number level record exists for the same customer, the 
form number level record should be used. Therefore, the Pricing Engine 
will always try to find a Category `P` record first where the value of 
Cust.sub.-- Form.sub.-- Number from the Customer Order table falls 
alphabetically within the range of values represented by the fields 
Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value. If this record cannot be found, 
then a search for a record at the customer level will be performed. This 
search will not use the Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value fields. If 
no customer level record is found, a not-priceable exception is raised. 
Note: There may be multiple records returned that fit the customer form 
number criteria. In these cases, there should be only two, one which is 
for that specific customer form number only (i.e. Begin.sub.-- 
Value=End.sub.-- Value) and one where the specified customer form number 
fits within the range defined by Begin.sub.-- Value and End.sub.-- Value. 
In these cases, the record specific to the specified customer form number 
should be used (i.e. the one where Begin.sub.-- Value=End.sub.-- Value) 
Storage.sub.-- Method: This field is either `C`, which indicates the 
customer has requested full carton releases only, or a `P`, which allows 
the customer to release forms from Storage in less than full cartons. This 
value is set by examining the value of Full.sub.-- Carton.sub.-- Release 
on the Customer Order table. A value of `Y` (True) in this field means 
that Storage.sub.-- Method should be `C`. A value of `N` (False) indicates 
that Storage.sub.-- Method should be `P`. 
Storage Invoice Timing: This field is either `R`, which indicates the 
customer will be invoiced for storage at release of stored forms or `S`, 
which designates the customers desire to be invoiced for storage when they 
are stored. This value is set equal to the value of Storage.sub.-- 
lnvoice.sub.-- Timing on the Customer Order table. 
Effective Date: this value should be set equal to the STAR Date (i.e. 
current date). 
2. Quantity Stored is the summation of Ship.sub.-- Qty field on all Order 
Ship Destination records where the destination is an SRC warehouse. Note: 
for simplification purposes, this calculation ignores a potential plant 
overrun and customer's instruction for disposition of the overrun quantity 
(ship to storage or ship direct). 
3. Order Quantity is set equal to the value of Order.sub.-- Qty on the 
Customer Order table. 
4. Forms Value per M is either the Forms List Price as calculated by the 
Pricing Engine or the Forms Sell Price as set by the CSR or Sales 
Representative. Which to use is determined by looking at the Based.sub.-- 
on.sub.-- Sell.sub.-- Price field on the PRISM.sub.-- Storage record found 
in Step 1 above. If this value is `Y` (True), then Forms Value per M 
should be set equal to the Forms Sell Price, otherwise, Forms Value per M 
should be set equal to the Forms List Price. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
PRISM.sub.-- Storage Table (sample records only) 
CADD Customer Storage 
Storage Invoice 
Storage 
Freight 
Number Category 
Begin Value 
End Value 
Method 
Timing Rate 
Rate 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
1000 P U-001 U-999 
C Invoice Stored 
14% 8% 
1001 C 8502 8502 P Invoice Release 
20% 10% 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
See the next section titled PRISM Freight and Storage Extra for more 
details on the use of the columns in this table. 
Storage Equation (Standard Rates) 
##EQU60## 
where . . . 
##EQU61## 
Base Calculation Initializations: 1. Storage Rate is set equal to 
Storage.sub.-- Pct in the Storage table when the order is not a 
`negotiated` rate order. The key to the correct record for this lookup is 
based on . . . 
Storage.sub.-- Type as defined in the Storage.sub.-- Type field on Customer 
Order table. If Included is chosen, the HVCO checks described below must 
be done and will be used instead of included when the HVCO condition(s) 
are TRUE. 
Invoice.sub.-- Type as defined in the Storage.sub.-- Invoice.sub.-- Timing 
field on the Customer Order table. 
2. Quantity Stored is the summation of Ship.sub.-- Qty field on all Order 
Ship Destination records where the destination is an SRC warehouse. Note: 
for simplification purposes, this calculation ignores a potential plant 
overrun and customer's instruction for disposition of the overrun quantity 
(ship to storage or ship direct). 
3. Order Quantity is set equal to the value of Order.sub.-- Qty on the 
Customer Order table. 
4. Form Value per M is the summation of all cost components across the 
entire Customer Order excluding Freight and Storage. 
5. Per Carton Charge is set equal to Storage.sub.-- Ctn in the Storage 
table. 
6. The Carton Quantity is set equal to the Special Qty display attribute on 
the Special Packaging feature. If this feature does not exist, then this 
value is set to Std.sub.-- Carton.sub.-- Qty on the Mfg Order table. 
7. Storage Maximum is set equal to Storage.sub.-- Max in the Storage table. 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Storage Table 
Storage.sub.-- Type 
Invoice.sub.-- Type 
Storage.sub.-- Pct 
Storage.sub.-- Ctn 
Storage.sub.-- Max 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
Included 
Invoiced Stored 
8% $0.00 $000.00 
Included 
Invoiced Released 
14% $0.00 $000.00 
Add On Invoiced Stored 
0% $3.00 $100.00 
Add On Invoiced Released 
0% $3.00 $100.00 
HVCO Invoiced Stored 
1% $6.00 $99,999.99 
HVCO Invoiced Released 
6% $6.00 $99,999.99 
__________________________________________________________________________ 
HVCO Verifications: 
If the user selected the Included storage option, then check to see if 
order qualifies for HVCO storage rates. Both of the following conditions 
must be true in order to receive HVCO rates. 
First HVCO Check: Value of Stored Forms 
This check validates that the value of the stored forms hits the level 
necessary to receive HVCO rates. 
##EQU62## 
Compare this calculated value with the HVCO Order Qualifier found in the 
Pricing Constants table. If the calculated value is equal to or greater 
than the HVCO Order Qualifier constant, then continue with the second HVCO 
check. If not, skip the second check and continue with Included rates. 
Second HVCO Check: Value of Forms in One Carton 
This check validates that the value of the forms contained within one 
carton hits the level necessary to receive HVCO rates. 
##EQU63## 
Compare this calculated value with the HVCO Carton Qualifier found in the 
Pricing Constants table. If the calculated value is equal to or greater 
than the HVCO Carton Qualifier constant, then use HVCO rates. If not, 
continue with Included rates. 
PRISM Freight and Storage Extra 
When SRC customers put their forms into storage, they have two options 
available on how those forms are released from storage. The first is to 
have them release in full cartons. Customers who select this option for 
all their stored forms will get standard freight and storage rates. The 
second option is to have forms shipped to them in less than full carton 
quantities. Those customers who select to have one or more of their stored 
forms released in this fashion are considered Pic-n-Pac customers and have 
special negotiated rates for freight and storage. This memo will discuss 
the data and process necessary for recognizing these customers and 
properly calculating freight and storage charges. 
Data: 
There are three tables in the STAR system that will contain the data 
necessary to determine both if a customer is a Pic-n-Pac customer and what 
are the negotiated rates for that customer. 
1. Customer Address table. This table will contain a Boolean indicator, 
STD.sub.-- FULL.sub.-- CTN, which will indicate if the customer has one or 
more forms that are released in less than full carton. 
2. Customer Order table. This table will contain a Boolean indicator, 
FULL.sub.-- CARTON.sub.-- RELEASE, which will indicate if the customer 
wishes to have this specific order released as full carton or less than 
full carton. It will also contain a numeric field, OVERRUN.sub.-- 
STORAGE.sub.-- PCT, to indicate the customer's wish regarding how much of 
any overrun quantity should be shipped to storage. This may be 0% if all 
overrun quantity is to be sent directly to the customer, 100% if all the 
overrun quantity should be stored or any percentage in between. 
3. PRISM Storage table. This table will have one to many records in it to 
identify the negotiated rates for a Pic-n-Pac customer. The layout is as 
follows . . . 
______________________________________ 
PRISM.sub.-- STORAGE: 
______________________________________ 
CADD.sub.-- CUST.sub.-- NUM 
Varchar2 (7) 
Not Null 
CATEGORY Varchar2 (1) 
Nullable 
BEGIN.sub.-- VALUE Varchar2 (10) 
Nullable 
END.sub.-- VALUE Varchar2 (10) 
Nullable 
STORAGE.sub.-- METHOD 
Varchar2 (1) 
Not Null 
STORAGE.sub.-- INVOICE.sub.-- TIMING 
Varchar2 (1) 
Not Null 
STORAGE.sub.-- RATE 
Number Not Null 
FREIGHT.sub.-- RATE 
Number Not Null 
EFFECTIVE.sub.-- DATE 
Date Not Null 
EXPIRATION.sub.-- DATE 
Date Not Null 
______________________________________ 
A Pic-n-Pac customer may choose one of three options for determining which 
forms have a negotiated rate. 
1. All forms 
The customer can choose to have all their forms stored at the negotiated 
rate. In this case, the Storage record would have their CADD Customer 
number defined with Category, Begin Value and End Value being null. 
2. A range of product codes 
The customer may choose to have a single product code or set of product 
codes stored at a negotiated rate. In this case, the Storage record would 
contain the CADD Customer number with the Category being set to "C". The 
Begin Value and End Value will be used to set the range of product codes 
that are included in this negotiated rate. 
3. A range of form numbers 
The customer may choose to have a single form or set of forms stored at a 
negotiated rate. In this case, the storage record would contain the CADD 
Customer number with the Category being set to "P". The Begin Value and 
End Value will be used to set the range of customer form numbers that are 
included in this negotiated rate. 
In addition to these four fields, two others are used to identify the 
specific record that should be used for a given order. 
1. Storage Method 
This field will contain a "C" or a "P". The "C" indicates that this is a 
negotiated rate for an order that is to be released as full cartons only. 
This rate may or may not be different than the Standard full carton rate 
that non Pic-n-Pac customers receive. The "P" indicates that the record 
represents the negotiated rate for an order that will be released in less 
than full carton quantities. 
2. Storage Invoice Timing 
This field will indicate if the customer wishes to pay for storage when the 
forms are stored (Invoice Stored) or when the forms are released from 
storage (Invoice Release). This field will contain an "S" for Invoice 
Stored or an "R" for Invoice Release. 
The remaining fields hold the specific freight and storage rates for this 
Pic-n-Pac customer and/or form number/product code combination and the 
effective date range of the record. 
Process: 
There are four processes that will create and/or use the data as described 
above. 
1. Conversion and Interfaces: 
C&I will be responsible for populating STAR tables with data brought over 
from another system. Specifically, C&I will populate the STD.sub.-- 
FULL.sub.-- CTN Boolean field on Customer Address as well as all the data 
in the Storage table. 
2. Order Entry: 
If the customer is a Pic-n-Pac customer, CSRs will not be able to select a 
storage charge method as it will default to Pic-n-Pac and cannot be 
changed. In this case; however, the CSR must choose whether the customer 
wishes to have this specific order release in full carton or less than 
full carton quantities. This data will be stored in the Boolean field Full 
Carton Release. 
The field OVERRUN.sub.-- STORAGE.sub.-- PCT must also be entered during the 
order entry process. This field must be entered for all orders that have 
any portion going to storage regardless of whether the customer is a 
Pic-n-Pac customer or not. This information will be passed to TOPS. It is 
TOPS who will determine how to break up the overrun quantity to be shipped 
directly among the various shipping destinations when more than one direct 
ship exists. 
3. Validation: 
Validation will be responsible for populating the Product Code field in the 
Manufacturing Order table. This code is developed from the product type 
and various features that exist on the form. 
4. Pricing: 
Pricing will use the data in STAR to determine if the customer is Pic-n-Pac 
and also to determine what rate should be used for both freight and 
storage. 
First, pricing will determine if there is any storage for this order by 
looking for any records in the Order Ship Destination table to determine 
if any have the Warehouse ID is populated. If any are found, Pricing will 
read the Ship Quantity to determine how many forms are being stored. 
If there is storage for the order, Pricing will then determine the data 
necessary to identify the specific Storage record that applies to the 
order. This data includes . . . 
a) CADD Customer Number from the Customer Address table 
b) Customer Form Number from the Customer Order table 
c) Full Carton Release from the Customer Order table 
d) Product Code from the Manufacturing Order table 
e) Storage Invoice Timing from the Customer Order table. 
Once it is determined that there is storage and it is a Pic-n-Pac customer, 
Pricing will select the correct storage record based on the data listed 
above. Pricing will always look for a record that is more specific first 
and work backwards toward more general records. For example, if there is a 
Storage record for all forms for a CADD Customer and a second for a 
specific form for that same CADD Customer, then Pricing would use the form 
specific record before using the general Customer record. The order of the 
data from most detailed to most general is . . . 
1. Form Number 
2. Product Code 
3. CADD Customer 
The storage method and invoice timing data will also need to be considered 
to select the correct record from the Storage table. 
Miscellaneous Notes: 
If a customer is marked as a Pic-n-Pac customer on the Customer Address 
record, we will always attempt to find the Storage record that should be 
used. If we are unable to find any record for that customer, the order 
will be exceptioned to a pricing analyst. 
For split shipments, the portion of the shipment that is being shipped 
directly will receive the same freight rate as that portion that is 
stored. For instance, if a Pic-n-Pac customer requests 50% of the quantity 
to be shipped directly and 50% to be stored, the freight rate used for the 
50% shipped directly will be the same as the freight rate for that 
customer order. 
Referring now to FIGS. 2, 3 and 7, forms order transmission 400 is 
described in detail. Following order entry 100, order validation 200, and 
order pricing 300, the priced and validated order is transmitted to the 
printing station computer system 14 where a user is prompted to select 
whether the manufacturing steps are to be printed at printer 46, 
transmitted to the digital press 44 as a digital file, or both, see steps 
402, 404, 406, and 408. Additionally, the manufacturing steps are saved in 
a data file, see step 410. 
As will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art, the order 
entry system of the present invention is a computer based system which 
operates with the aid of a conventional operating system, e.g., the 
Microsoft.RTM. Windows.RTM. 95 operating system available from the 
Microsoft Corporation. Additionally, the order entry system may utilize or 
may be programmed to be compatible with the following commercially 
available software: Windows NT (network GUI operating system, available 
from Microsoft Corp.); Exchange (electronic mail, available from Microsoft 
Corp.); Powerbuilder (GUI development tool, available from Sybase Inc., 
Cincinnati, Ohio); Tuxedo/WS (transaction manager--client, available from 
BEA Systems, Sunnyvale, Calif.); Tuxedo /T, /Q (transaction manager, 
available form BEA Systems); Oracle SQLnet (database access--client, 
available from Oracle Corporation, Redwood City, Calif.); Oracle RDBMS 
(relational database, available from Oracle Corporation); PDW (forms 
design tool, available from F3 Software Corporation, Burlington, Mass.); 
SDM Client (repository--client, available from Filenet Corporation, 
Columbus, Ohio); Mezzanine (forms repository, available from Filenet 
Corp.); AION DS, ES (rule based system, available from Platinum Software 
Corporation, Teaneck, N.J.); CA-Unicenter (security system, available from 
Computer Associates, Alameda, Calif.); XCOM (file transfer tool, available 
from Computer Associates); and, AIX (UNIX operating system, available from 
IBM Corp., Wilkesboro, N.C.). As will be appreciated by those skilled in 
the art, these and other system functions may be executed with software 
created in accordance with the preferred operational features of the 
present invention. 
Having described the invention in detail and by reference to preferred 
embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that modifications and variations 
are possible without departing from the scope of the invention defined in 
the appended claims.